diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-8.txt | 4111 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 62129 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 380939 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/38340-h.htm | 5127 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i023.png | bin | 0 -> 25427 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i024.png | bin | 0 -> 19969 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i031.png | bin | 0 -> 14674 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i032.png | bin | 0 -> 26985 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i056.png | bin | 0 -> 14843 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i057a.png | bin | 0 -> 13791 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i057b.png | bin | 0 -> 14176 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i058.png | bin | 0 -> 28632 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i059a.png | bin | 0 -> 14525 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i059b.png | bin | 0 -> 27454 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i060.png | bin | 0 -> 23246 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i061.png | bin | 0 -> 34520 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i093.png | bin | 0 -> 19923 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340-h/images/i115.png | bin | 0 -> 32344 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340.txt | 4112 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 38340.zip | bin | 0 -> 62127 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
23 files changed, 13366 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/38340-8.txt b/38340-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b29dcef --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4111 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches, by +Walter J. Kleinlein + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches + +Author: Walter J. Kleinlein + +Release Date: December 19, 2011 [EBook #38340] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + + + + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + + + + + + + RULES AND PRACTICE + FOR + Adjusting Watches + + BY + + WALTER J. KLEINLEIN + +AUTHOR OF "THE WATCH ADJUSTER AND HIS WORK" + + + Copyright, 1920, by Walter J. Kleinlein + + _All rights reserved_ + + + + +PREFACE + + +In the early days of horology the apprentice was taught the art of +making a complete watch. Production was slow, very few duplicate +watches were constructed, and it was necessary that extra material be +made individually by hand in the same way that the original part was +produced. As time passed the value of the repairer was indicated by +his ability to make new parts and to replace them so that the watch +would again be in running condition. This was the prevailing situation +for many years and the repairer was judged according to his skill in +making and finishing the various parts. + +A similar method of judging ability is still in force among some +employers, although the development of the industry into machine and +specialized work has made many changes in regard to the most important +duties of the repairer. + +It is no longer necessary for him to know how to make a complete watch +and only on occasional instances is it necessary for him to make a +part. Genuine material for modern watches is supplied by the +manufacturer at less expense than it can be produced by the individual +and in this particular branch of the work the repairer's requirements +have been very considerably curtailed. + +A more exacting and a higher standard of timekeeping has developed, +however, and in this field the requirements of the watchmaker have +increased to the extent that it is no longer sufficient to merely +restore a good watch to running condition. It must keep time. This +development has grown gradually and surely and the past twenty-five +years may be assumed as the period of greatest advance. + +It has been made possible by scientific and practical refinements +which permit the adjustment of watches so that they will keep time +within closely defined allowances under varying conditions. + +The larger problem of the successful repairer of today, therefore, is +that of understanding the principles governing close time and of +knowing how and where to look for the causes of variation, so that the +higher standard of timekeeping may be restored in case of damage since +the original adjustment. + +It is naturally essential to know when material is correct, how to +make it fit in its proper place, and how to make and finish some of +the individual parts. It is also commendable to be skilful in all +classes of lathe work, as this at times gains prestige for the workman +through restoring old model watches to running condition. + +It is, however, a disadvantage to develop one's ability in making +parts for watches of a bygone age and neglecting the training that +happens to be most essential and of daily advantage in repairing +modern watches so that they will keep time as consistently after +repairs have been made as they did when new. + +The object of this book is to present the essential points of watch +adjusting in an elementary and non-technical way that will interest +the average watchmaker and to enable him to have a convenient source +of information, covering the necessary refinements that are +fundamental in repairing, regulating and adjusting the better class of +watches. + +The author trusts that the experienced successful watchmaker will read +the book with interest and also with profit and that the novice will +be enabled to foresee that there is something more to the art of +watchmaking and repairing than that of merely assembling a watch and +making it "tick." + +It so happens that the author has had many years of experience in both +factories and repair shops and that a considerable part of his duties +have been devoted to instruction. + +He has for a long time felt the need of a book that would, above all +else, be practical in its description of the rules that an adjuster +follows and which would prove its value in actual experience by being +personal as far as permissible in the same sense that detailed shop +instruction would be. + +Since writing the article entitled "The Watch Adjuster and His Work" +several years ago numerous inquiries have been received, for this +class of information and the present book is an effort to meet this +demand in a manner that can be followed without highly technical or +theoretical education. + +To promote advancement and interest in everyday practical results is +the foremost consideration, and to this end definite means are +presented for personal development and for obtaining better results +from high grade watches than can possibly be obtained without a fair +knowledge of the final details which go so far toward assuring close +time. + + WALTER J. KLEINLEIN, + July 21, 1920 Waltham, Mass. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +PART I.--THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE + +CHAPTER I + Page +The Compensation Balance, Controlling Factor 3 + + 1. General Method of Obtaining Results + 2. How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow + or Fast in Heat Compared to Cold. + 3. Composition of and Distortions of Compensation + Balances. + 4. Tests and Experiments. + 5. Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations. + 6. Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment. + +CHAPTER II + +Equipment for Temperature Adjusting 9 + + 7. Various Methods Available. + 8. Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions. + 9. The Lower Temperature Box. + +CHAPTER III + +Difference in Observatory and Commercial Systems 13 + + 10. Observatory System. + 11. Commercial System. + 12. Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation + 13. Value of the Normal Period Rate. + 14. Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards + for Gain or Loss in Time. + 15. Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature. + +CHAPTER IV + +Some Practical Methods of Correction 19 + + 16. Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of + the Balance. + 17. Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below + Normal Size and Weight + 18. Over or Under Compensation. + 19. Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation. + 20. Example Illustrating that Temperature Variation + is Not Always Due to the Balance and Spring. + +CHAPTER V + +The Middle Temperature Error 26 + + 21. Why this Error Exists and What it Consists of. + 22. How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome this Error. + + +PART II.--THE ADJUSTMENTS TO ISOCHRONISM AND POSITIONS + +CHAPTER VI + +General Consideration 31 + + 23. Optional Allowances for Variation. + 24. Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting. + 25. Train and Escapement Freedom. + +CHAPTER VII + +Theory and Practice 39 + + 26. Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal + Hairspring. + 27. How Theory Works Out in Practice and what + Isochronism Consists of. + 28. Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation. + +CHAPTER VIII + +Relative Pinning Points of the Hairspring 43 + + 29. Original Springing of Watches. + 30. How Pinning Point Alterations are Made. + 31. Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Watches. + 32. How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch. + 33. Results in Vertical Position Rates due to Changing + the Pinning Point. + 34. The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated. + 35. Principle of Pinning Point Alterations. + 36. Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models. + +CHAPTER IX + +Manipulation of the Regulator Pins 51 + + 37. Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins + 38. Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil + Between the Pins. + 39. Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing + the Regulator Pins. + +CHAPTER X + +Factory and Repair Shop Adjusting 53 + + 40. Routine Varies According to Circumstances. + 41. Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop of + One or Two Workmen. + 42. Advantages of Understanding Adjusting Even + Though Watches are Not Tested in Positions or + Isochronism. + 43. Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience. + +CHAPTER XI + +Preliminary Notes and Practice for Beginners 56 + + 44. Practical Suggestions. + 45. The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust. + 46. Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down. + 47. Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble. + 48. Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot. + 49. Examining the Hairspring. + 50. Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion. + 51. Detailed Practice. + 52. Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison. + 53. Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction. + +CHAPTER XII + +Preliminary Notes and Practice on Vertical Corrections 64 + + 54. Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation. + 55. Poor Motion, Cause and Effect. + 56. Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation. + 57. Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance + 58. Concentricity of the Hairspring. + 59. Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning + Point Alterations. + 60. Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of + Position Rates + +CHAPTER XIII + +Concrete Examples Showing Definite Three Position Alterations +and Labor Utilized 70 + + 61. Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the Variation. + 62. Example No. 1, Three Positions, Columbus. + 63. Example No. 2, Three Positions, Ball. + 64. Example No. 3, Three Positions, Elgin. + 65. Example No. 4, Three Positions, Hampden. + +CHAPTER XIV + +Concrete Examples Showing Definite Five Position Alterations +and Labor Utilized 77 + + 66. What Five Position Adjusting Consists of--Detailed Allowances. + 67. Example No. 5, Five Positions, Hamilton. + 68. Example No. 6, Five Positions, Elgin, B. W. R. + 69. Example No. 7, Five Positions, Waltham, Vang. + 70. Example No. 8, Five Positions, Vacheron and Constantin. + 71. Example No. 9, Five Positions, E. Howard + 72. Example No. 10, Five Positions, Illinois, B. S. + 73. Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates. + 74. How to Locate Defective Gearings. + +CHAPTER XV + +Timing and Final Regulation 91 + + 75. Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers. + 76. Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator. + 77. Effect of the Middle Temperature Error. + 78. Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates. + + +PART III.--SPECIAL NOTES + +CHAPTER XVI + +Special Notes 99 + + 79. Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples) + 80. Truing the Balance. + 81. Poising the Balance. + 82. Truing Hairsprings. + 83. Treating a Rusty Hairspring. + 84. Stopping by Escapement Locking when Hands are + set Backward or When Watch Receives a Jar. + 85. Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches. + + + + +RULES AND PRACTICE FOR ADJUSTING WATCHES + + +PART I + +THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE COMPENSATION BALANCE CONTROLLING FACTOR + + +1. _General Method of Obtaining Results._ + +Only since the introduction of the compensation balance which received +its most substantial early experiments as recently as the year 1859, +has it been possible to control the variation in pocket timepieces +which is caused by changes in temperature. Previous to this +introduction it was not uncommon for the best watches to vary as much +as two or three minutes with changes of forty or fifty degrees Fahr. +Through experiment and improvement in the quality and application of +balance materials, such advancement has been made, that this variation +has been reduced to seconds and temperature adjusting is now quite +universal in the production of medium and high grade watches. + +In the large factories, girls and young men of very little previous +experience are frequently taught to make the alterations and to do the +testing, while men of experience in watchmaking handle only the more +intricate cases such as "stoppers" and radical rates that may require +investigation of the inner workings of the movement. The simplicity of +the adjustment naturally becomes more apparent with experience and the +general alterations consist merely of transferring the balance screws +in opposite pairs, either forward or backward one or more holes, +according to the extent of the correction desired. + +As these alterations are quite positive the adjustment can be +undertaken with considerable certainty of obtaining results in every +instance. + +The repairer will not find as much daily necessity for understanding +temperature adjusting as he will for being thorough in Position +adjusting. The subject is covered, however, for the benefit of those +who may desire practical experience in this branch of adjusting and +also for those who desire a general knowledge of the details. + + +2. _How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow or Fast in Heat +Compared to Cold._ + +If a watch rates slow in heat compared to cold it is necessary to +shift screws in opposite pairs out toward the cut or free end of the +rims; because when the metals expand the hairspring becomes weaker and +produces a loss in time. During this period the free ends of the +balance rims, carrying the transferred weight are forced toward the +center and produce a gaining rate which compensates for the loss +caused by the weakened spring. + +As the metals contract in cold the free ends of the balance are drawn +outward from their true form and the concentrated weight of these +screws near the ends reduces the fast rate in cold and in principle +works both ways in its action on the rate. + +Should the circumstances be just opposite, or the rate be fast in heat +compared to the rate in cold, it will be necessary to move the screws +away from the free end of the rims. In doing this, less weight will be +carried toward the center as the free ends curl inward and as a +result, the rate in heat will become slower and the slow rate in cold +will be reduced. + + +3. _Composition of and Distortions of Compensation Balances._ + +Compensation balances are generally made of one layer of brass and one +of steel, with the brass on the outside consisting of about +three-fifths of the total thickness and the steel on the inside +consisting of about two-fifths. These metals are firmly soldered +together and the distortions in changes of temperature are as follows. +In heat both metals expand, which infers that the rims become longer +as well as wider and thicker. Brass expands more than steel and +because of its attachment to the steel it cannot continue to lengthen +in its true circular form, due to the fact that the steel does not +become enough longer to maintain the true curve, and the result is +that the free ends of the rims are forced inward. + +In cold the brass, contracting more than the steel, pulls the rim +outward at the free end which is just in reverse of the operations in +heat. + +The end of the rim which is attached to the balance arm always moves +in the opposite direction from the free end, or outward from the +center of balance, when the free end moves in, and inward when the +free end moves out. In comparison, however, this movement is +negligible as will be noted later in the results obtained in moving +screws in that direction. + + +4. _Tests and Experiments._ + +It is generally understood that the purpose of the compensation +balance is to act in opposition to the error caused principally by the +hairspring. The steel hairspring having no compensating qualities, +either grows stronger or weaker with changes in temperature. When it +becomes longer, wider and thicker in heat, experiments seem to prove +that the increased width and thickness are not in proportion to the +increased length, for if they were, the spring would actually be +stronger; while timing proves that it is weaker because of the loss in +time. In cold the shortening factor seems to dominate because of a +gain in time. + +In a series of tests with steel springs on uncut steel brass balances, +the temperature error in the extremes of 40 degrees and 90 degrees +Fahrenheit was found to be from eighty to one hundred and sixty +seconds. With the same balances cut the error was reduced from seventy +to one hundred and thirty seconds in each instance, without any +correction of the balance screws. + +A former test with palladium springs on the same balances, previous to +having been cut, showed a considerably reduced error, indicating that +the steel springs were mainly responsible for the temperature +variations. + +The above tests were in actual practice and results are given as +noted, regardless of scientific or established formula relating to the +cubic measurement of metals in changes of temperature. + + +5. _Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations._ + +As a rule compensation balances generally have five or six pairs of +balance screws in addition to two pairs of mean time screws. High +grade Swiss and some American models do not have mean time screws and +are therefore generally supplied with seven or eight pairs of balance +screws. The mean time screws are never disturbed in making alterations +for temperature, such alterations being confined to the balance screws +only and the mean time screws are reserved for timing. + +For appearance sake the balance screws should be evenly distributed, +although it is necessary at times to closely assemble them to obtain +temperature results and they should not be disturbed in making +ordinary repairs, as the adjustment may be destroyed in so doing. With +the larger balances the moving of one pair of screws for a distance of +one hole, generally makes a difference of four or five seconds in the +temperature rate. In the case of smaller balances this alteration does +not make as much difference, although the weight and location of the +screws has considerable influence on the result. + +A pair of screws shifted from the second holes from the cuts, to the +holes adjoining the cuts, will generally make a correction four or +five times as great as would be obtained by shifting a pair of screws +from the third to the fourth holes from the arms. The same +proportional difference is obtained in moving a pair of screws from +the center of the rims out to the cut, compared to moving a pair of +screws from the holes nearest the arms out to the center of the rims. +This principle also obtains in moving the screws in the opposite +direction and is due to the fact that while the metals composing the +balance follow the common laws of expansion and contraction, the +balance actually becomes smaller in area during expansion and larger +during contraction. This condition is made possible entirely through +joining the metals in proper proportion and then cutting the rims. + +In the factories where large quantities of a particular model having a +standard style balance are handled, tests are usually made to +determine as to just what degree of correction will be obtained by +shifting various pairs of screws certain distances. This information +is then used in making alterations with considerable certainty. The +expert temperature adjuster becomes fully informed as to the +peculiarities of various models and is capable of getting larger +percentages of watches within the limits of allowance, after making +alterations, than he could obtain otherwise. + +Through understanding the various models individually, he is also +enabled to furnish information that will cause intelligent arrangement +of the balance screws, for each model, when they are originally +fitted. The production thereby showing a greater yield of good watches +that do not require alterations after the first test. + + +6. _Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment._ + +When the original temperature adjustment has been carefully executed +it is quite permanent and unless the screws have been mutilated or +changed in location there will seldom be an occasion for readjusting. +The balance may be retrued and repoised many times and the spring may +be retrued, altered, or even changed, without seriously interfering +with the temperature rating, as long as the screws are not shifted. In +changing the spring, however, it is necessary that the same number of +coils and the same size of spring be used, as otherwise readjusting +would be required. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPERATURE ADJUSTING + + +7. _Various Methods Available._ + +Two boxes are necessary for temperature testing. One fitted up to +maintain a temperature of about 90° Fahr. and the other maintaining a +temperature of about 40° Fahr. + +The method employed in obtaining the high temperature varies in +different styles of boxes, while the low temperature is always +obtained through the use of ice. When only an occasional test is made, +any simple method whereby approximately close results in the two +extremes can be obtained, may be used. For instance, the watch may be +enclosed in a tin box and placed in sand that is kept at a temperature +of 90 or 95 degrees F. A thermometer placed in the sand indicates when +the temperature rises too high or falls too low. The ordinary +household refrigerator may be used for testing the cold. Tests by this +method are advisable only for short periods and for an approximate +idea as to the extent of error. + +If frequent tests are made and accurate results are expected, it is +quite important that the special boxes be used. Such boxes are often +constructed with a capacity of four or five hundred watches, or they +may be constructed to receive only half a dozen watches. Some are made +with a zinc or copper tank in which warm water is placed and which +surrounds the chamber in which the watches are deposited. The water is +kept at the desired temperature by means of a small adjustable flame. +In other instances electrical arrangements are used, in which case no +water is required. + +In either instance a thermostat controls the source of heat. + + +8. _Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions._ + +A very practical arrangement for testing a few watches at a time in +the higher temperature is shown in Fig. 1. This is electrically +equipped and will maintain an even temperature at all times. + +The outside of the box is constructed of about one-half inch lumber +and the inside is lined with asbestos. It is about fourteen inches +high by ten inches wide and eight inches deep. + +"A". Is an incandescent lamp set in a porcelain base. + +"B". Is a porcelain plug through which the wires "C" enter the box. + +"D" and "E". Are metal uprights with a thumbscrew on the top, under +each of which a wire terminates. + +"F". Is the compensating bar, one end of which is fastened solidly to +"D" with rivets. + +The opposite end is free and rests against the end of a thumbscrew +which passes through "E." + +The thumbscrew is to be adjusted so that the free end of "F" will rest +against it in a temperature of 70° Fahr. or any lower temperature. As +the temperature rises the free end of the bar moves away from the end +of thumbscrew, breaking the circuit and extinguishing the light, which +cuts off the source of heat. As the temperature decreases the bar +again comes into contact and creates the circuit. + +This bar can be made of various compensating metals, one combination +of which is a strip of zinc about six inches long by three eighths of +an inch wide and one thirty-second of an inch thick. On the outside of +this soft solder a strip of tin six inches or a trifle less in length, +by one fourth inch wide and one thirty-second of an inch thick. Both +metals should be bent to a curved form before they are soldered +together as shown in the cut. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1] + +It is generally preferable to have the bar taper to a slightly +narrower width at its free end, and near this free end it is necessary +to solder a small strip of platinum at the point where the end of +thumbscrew comes in contact. + +"G", "H", "I" and "J" are ventilating holes one inch in diameter and +covered by a swinging slide so that the holes can be opened or closed +as desired for regulating the ventilation. "K". Is a shelf of brass +screen located about five inches from the top and on which the watches +and a thermometer are placed in testing. + +"L". Is a handle for the purpose of convenience in carrying the box. +The front is to be enclosed by a door made in two parts, the upper +section of which is glass which will admit of observing the +thermometer. Proper adjustment of the thumbscrew and bar makes the box +ready for use. + + +9. _The Lower Temperature Box._ + +Fig. 2 shows a box specially made for testing watches in cold. It is +constructed of wood and stands about twenty-four inches high without +the legs and about eighteen inches square. + +A double partition packed with about one inch of sawdust will be most +reliable. + +The upper half of the box should contain a watertight zinc tank for +holding cracked ice and about an inch of space should be left above +for circulation of the air. + +The chamber for receiving the watches may be about six inches square +and supported by a crosspiece and attachment to the front. It should +be covered above to prevent particles of ice from falling on the +watches which are to be placed on the floor or on a shelf of the +chamber, but the sides may be left partly open to improve the +circulation of cold air. The door may also be filled with sawdust but +does not require glass as the moisture would prevent observation of +the thermometer which should be inside for checking up the temperature +when the door is opened. + +[Illustration: Fig. 2] + +The bottom of the tank should be slightly higher on one side than on +the other, with a one-half inch drain pipe fitted to the low side. The +inlet end of the pipe should be covered with a fine screen to prevent +dirt from accumulating in the pipe and the outlet may be either at the +extreme bottom or on one of the sides as shown in the cut. The upper +part or cover of box should be made so that it can be easily removed +for filling and cleaning the tank. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +DIFFERENCE IN OBSERVATORY AND COMMERCIAL SYSTEMS + + +10. _Observatory System._ + +In the foreign observatories where watches are generally tested for +competition prize, or certificate purposes, they are subjected to +either three or five day tests in each temperature, preceded by one +intermediate day at normal temperature which is not considered in +making the deductions. The purpose of this is to allow the metals to +assume the natural condition before being placed in, or changed from, +one degree of temperature to another. After the three or five day +test, according to the grade of the watch, the average of the daily +rates in each temperature is considered in making the comparison and +arriving at the total variation. The total error is then considered in +the summary, as a fraction of a second variation per each degree of +temperature. As an example we will consider that the total error +between the two averages is five seconds and that the difference in +the two extremes of temperature was fifty degrees F. The variation +would be given as one-tenth of a second per each degree of +temperature. + + +11. _Commercial System._ + +In manufacturing watches for commercial purposes, both foreign and +domestic, the tests are generally made for twenty-four hours in each +temperature and the difference in the rates is considered as the total +error. + +Sometimes preliminary tests of four or six hours in each temperature +are made to obtain an estimate as to the extent of error, then +alterations are made, after which the watch is subjected to the +regular twenty-four hour test. There is nothing to be gained by this +in regular work, although for a special rush job a day's time may be +saved. Watches are always expected to be in first-class condition and +such features as close fitting pivots or dirty oil will prevent any +dependable timing. It is also advisable to time them closely before +the test is made, as too great mean time variation may confuse in +estimating the error, especially if the time is not taken in each +temperature exactly at the end of twenty-four hours. + +The testing should preferably be done in the dial up position to +eliminate poise errors as much as possible. The first test is made in +heat at 90° Fahr., then in normal temperature of sixty-five or seventy +degrees and finally in the lower extreme of 40° Fahr. + +When the watch is removed from the cold box it will be covered with +moisture which will immediately begin to condense. The time should +therefore be quickly noted and the watch replaced in the higher +temperature box for four or five hours to become thoroughly dry and +prevent against rusting of the steel parts. + + +12. _Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation._ + +A card ruled similar to the cut shown in Fig. 3, may be used for +entering the rates and the watch need only be set at the beginning of +each test, as deductions can be made from the entries on the card and +the variation accurately ascertained without resetting or disturbing +the time. + +Details as to the methods to be followed would be about as follows: +Wind and set the watch to correct time, place it in the heat box and +at the end of twenty-four hours enter the variation from correct time +in the upper left hand square of the card. + +Assuming that the time is four seconds fast, enter this as shown in +the first column Fig. 3, then wind but do not set the watch and place +it in normal temperature and at the end of twenty-four hours enter the +total variation noted in the second square of first column. Assuming +the time to be just correct, place a zero as shown. Next wind the +watch and place it in the cold box, and assuming that the variation is +sixteen seconds fast at the end of twenty-four hours, enter this in +the lower square of the first column as shown in Fig. 3. The watch is +next placed in the heat box to dry and the variation shown in the +three sets of figures in first column are carried out as follows. + +Fig. 3 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | + 4 | + 4 | + 2 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | 0 | - 4 | + 6 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +16 | +16 | + 8 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 0 + +In the upper square we find +4, enter this in upper square of second +column at its full value as shown. + +Next we find a "0" in the second square of first column, and as this +is a loss of four seconds from the entry shown in the square above we +carry it out in second column as -4. In the lower square of first +column we find +16 and as this is a gain of sixteen seconds over the +square above, it is necessary to carry this to second column at its +full value as per illustration. + +To determine the extent of variation between heat and cold, simply +ignore the normal rate of -4 in the second column and subtract +4, +from +16, which indicates an error of twelve seconds slow in heat +compared to cold. + +Or it may be determined as twelve seconds fast in cold compared to +heat. For convenience sake it is advisable to form the habit of using +one of the temperatures as a unit for comparison and wherever large +quantities of watches are adjusted, it is generally the custom to use +the higher temperature for this purpose and the rate is stated as +either slow or fast in heat. In this instance the rate is slow in heat +and it will be necessary to shift one or more pairs of screws toward +the cut as explained in Chapter 1, No. 2. + + +13. _Value of the Normal Period Rate._ + +The rate in the normal period cannot be considered as of any value, +its importance consisting only of allowing the metals to return to the +natural form and tension before being placed in the cold box. + +This is quite important in obtaining a true estimate of the error, +because of the fact that in transferring the watch immediately from +the extreme of heat to the extreme of cold, there will be a period of +time during which the metals are readjusting themselves to the natural +form, and the variation in time during this period will not be +accounted for, as the real comparative rate will not begin to develop +until after the natural form and tension is reached. + +If the limit of time devoted to testing is no object and if a very +fine rate is desired the observatory method is of course to be +preferred. However, by allowing an intermediate day at normal +temperature we have the assurance that the hairspring is at the same +tension and that the balance has the same form concentrically when the +test begins in cold that it had when the test began in heat. + +As the object is to find the variation between the two temperature +extremes the estimate will be quite close enough and allows the saving +of many days' time. Some authorities advocate in addition to the five +days required for observatory testing in each temperature that the +watch be subjected to an intermediate day in each, instead of in +normal, before considering the daily rate. This seems very logical, as +the time noted each day would be taken at the actual extremes in both +instances and any outside factor in the timing would be eliminated. + + +14. _Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards for Gain or Loss +in Time._ + +In making entries on the rate cards and in figuring the variations the +sign + is used as denoting that the watch is running faster than the +standard time and the sign - is used as denoting that it is running +slower than standard time. + +This is stated for the reason that in some instances, generally +foreign, the signs are used in reverse, or as indicating that the +watch requires a correction of + or - the number of seconds indicated, +to attain the correct standard of time. When the signs are identical +in a column it is necessary to subtract the lesser from the greater +and the result is the variation. There are often instances however, +when one rate will be + and the other - as shown in second column of +Fig. 4, and in these instances it is necessary to add the figures to +obtain the variation. + +The first column is always the progressive rate and the second column +shows the variation carried out. This example shows +8 in heat, the +normal rate in the second square is not considered, for the reason +previously explained and the rate in cold is shown as -1. The total +variation between the extremes is therefore arrived at by adding +8 +and -1, which in this instance gives us a total of nine seconds fast +in heat. + +Fig. 4 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | + 8 | + 8 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | +20 | +12 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +19 | - 1 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 9 + + +15. _Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature._ + +The extremes of 40° and 90° Fahr. have been used for the reason that +they are best suited for general purposes. When it is known, however, +that a watch is to be used in a warm climate the extremes may be +raised five or ten degrees to advantage. If the watch is to be used in +a cold climate, the extremes may be lowered this amount. The metals, +however, can only stand the strain of expansion and contraction to a +certain degree, and still maintain the positive qualities. Therefore +it is quite important that the extremes be not raised or lowered very +much beyond these figures. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +SOME PRACTICAL METHODS OF CORRECTION + + +16. _Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of the Balance._ + +In altering the location of screws during the temperature adjustment +it is often possible to either mar or improve the appearance of the +balance. As a demonstration of this point the correction made in +regard to Fig. 3 is analyzed. The balance had twelve screw holes in +each rim, with the space between the first and second holes from the +arms equal to double the space between any other two holes. There were +seven screws in each rim, equally divided as per cut Fig. 5, which +indicates screws in the first, second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth +and twelfth holes. + +[Illustration: Fig. 5] + +A correction of the rate could have been obtained by shifting the +screws in either the sixth or eighth holes forward three holes. Or +those in either the first or second holes could have been shifted to +the ninth holes and those in the fourth holes might have been shifted +to the ninth holes with good results possible in either instance. + +Moving one pair of screws under any circumstances however would have +caused a massing of three pairs of screws at some point and a vacant +space of three holes at another point which would not present a very +good appearance for high grade work. Therefore the alteration made was +to move the screws from the second to the third holes, fourth to +seventh, and from the eighth to the ninth holes as indicated by the +positions shown in Fig. 6. + +[Illustration: Fig. 6] + +Examination of the fourth column Fig. 3, which gives the result of the +second test will show that the desired correction was obtained with a +better appearance of the balance than would have been possible if only +one pair of screws had been shifted. + +In following the logic of the alterations made we must consider that +the screws moved from the second to third holes made no correction, +due to the fact that the balance rims remain almost stationary at this +point, the alteration being for appearance only, those moved from the +fourth to the seventh holes were estimated for a correction of seven +or eight seconds only, for the reason that the alteration did not +carry them beyond the center of the rims where the greatest curvature +takes place. The screws moved from the eighth to the ninth holes +however were estimated for the full correction of four or five seconds +which is to be expected through shifting a normal pair of screws from +one hole to another beyond the center of the rim on sixteen or +eighteen size balances. In moving a pair of screws one hole between +the first quarter and the center of the rims, a correction of from two +to three seconds can be expected and from the center to the cut the +difference for one hole is generally four or five seconds, while an +alteration between the arm and the first quarter seldom yields any +correction. + +The matter of appearance should at all times be respected, for it is +just as easy to obtain results in most instances and also have a +well-appearing balance. There is also less disturbance of the poise +usually in moving several pairs of screws a short distance than there +is in moving one pair a longer distance. + + +17. _Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below Normal Size and +Weight._ + +Normal corrections can only be realized when normal screws are +shifted. Some balances have one half, or quarter head screws which of +course will not produce a correction as great as will be obtained by +shifting regular screws. Sometimes platinum, or other extra heavy +screws will be found in balances and these will produce a correction +almost double that of ordinary screws of the same size. + + +18. _Over or Under Compensation._ + +On some occasions it will be found impossible to maintain a pleasing +arrangement of the screws because the temperature variation will make +it necessary to mass all of the screws either in the holes nearest the +cuts or in those nearest the arms. + +This is due to either over or under compensation of the balance. Over +compensation is caused by too large a proportion of brass in the rims, +which causes them to curve inward too far at the free ends in heat and +outward too far in cold. When the extent of this error is so great +that the rate is still fast in heat, with the screws massed in the +holes nearest the arm, a correction can be obtained by fitting heavier +screws in the holes adjacent to the arms and lighter screws in the +holes nearer the free ends. + +When the rate in heat is slow with the screws massed at the free ends +of rims the balance is under compensated, which is caused by too +large a proportion of steel compared to the proportion of brass in the +rims. This prevents the free ends of rims from curving inward far +enough to carry the weight the proper distance toward the center of +balance. A correction for this can be obtained by fitting heavier +screws in the holes adjacent to the cuts and lighter screws in the +holes toward the center of rims. + +In changing the weight of screws as stated above it should be +remembered that the gross weight of all screws must remain the same or +the timing will be seriously affected. It is also important that the +poise be tested whenever a considerable degree of alteration is made, +as this will assist in obtaining an accurate rate. + + +19. _Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation._ + +Balances having the extreme degree of over or under compensation will +seldom be found in high grade watches. In any instance, however, it is +possible to obtain a better distribution of the screws by fitting +either a larger or a smaller hairspring. For instance, we will assume +a case of under compensation in which the screws have all been massed +at the holes nearest the cuts. If the spring has seventeen coils, a +correction of from five to ten seconds can be obtained by selecting +and fitting a spring of the same make that will have eighteen coils, +and the correction obtained will permit of shifting one or two pairs +of screws back toward the arms. + +In case of over compensation a spring of the same make, one coil +smaller, will permit of shifting one or two pairs of screws toward the +free ends of rims. + +In a series of tests it was demonstrated that by duplicating or +changing springs of the same make and size, on balances that had +previously been compensated, there was very slight difference in the +temperature variation of the watch. Also by changing pinning points or +breaking out one-fourth to one-half of the coil around collet and +adding weight to the balances to correct the mean time the difference +in the variation was almost negligible. + +On the other hand it was found that by replacing the springs with +others of larger or smaller size, variations of from three to ten +seconds were noted in all instances. + +In selecting and fitting a spring that will be one coil larger or +smaller, it should be noted that the inner coil of the original spring +and that of the new spring are approximately the same distance from +the collet. For if there was considerable space between the collet and +inner coil of the original spring, and the new spring was colleted +quite close, there might be the addition of an extra coil in the +inside only. This was found to produce only a very slight correction, +compared to that obtained by the addition of a complete outer coil. +These tests indicate that the proportion of strength of the spring in +the temperatures varies with any appreciable change in length while +slight changes make practically no difference. + + +20. _Example Demonstrating that Temperature Variation is not Always +Due to the Balance and Spring._ + +Fig. 7 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | -10 | -10 | + 4 | + 4 | + 1 | + 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | - 6 | + 4 | + 5 | + 1 | + 4 | + 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +12 | +18 | + 1 | - 4 | + 7 | + 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 28 8 2 + +The following example is submitted to show that temperature variation +is not always due to the balance and spring, and that the general +condition of the watch may be responsible. The second column of Fig. +7, indicates an error of twenty-eight seconds slow in heat with all +screws assembled in the holes nearest the free ends of the rims. + +Examination proved that the motion of the balance in cold was reduced +to about one-fourth of a turn. In heat the arc of motion was at least +one full turn. This difference in motion was sufficient to prove that +there was some binding in the train. + +A very close fitting of the escape pivots was found and this +undoubtedly caused binding of the pivots in heat due to slight +expansion. Expansion of the stone would also tend to close the hole, +and while the degree of temperature would hardly have any bearing on +this point it is sufficient to show in what direction the tendency +would be. The fourth wheel end shake was very close and probably +caused binding of the wheel in cold, due to greater contraction of the +bridge than of the fourth pinion. Furthermore the mainspring was only +0.02 of a millimeter narrower than the space in the barrel box. This +no doubt also caused binding through greater contraction of the barrel +than occurred in the mainspring. + +The above defects were remedied and the rate was found to be eight +seconds plus in heat as per third and fourth columns Fig. 7. + +This made it necessary to shift several of the screws away from the +cut, in almost the same position in which they were before the +alteration which caused the close assembling of the screws was made. +The final rate was two seconds slow in heat as shown in fifth and +sixth columns. + +The variation of thirty-six seconds between the second and fourth +columns was entirely erroneous, and was due to condition of the watch +irrespective of the balance and hairspring. Should the variation with +the screws assembled have been by chance within the limits of +allowance the watch would undoubtedly have been a very unreliable +timepiece. The errors in the watch would no doubt have been corrected +during the position adjustment later, but the large error in +temperature which would have been introduced by wrongly moving the +screws, would have prevented reliable timing until possibly at some +future period a test in temperature would have been made and the +screws replaced in the proper positions. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE MIDDLE TEMPERATURE ERROR + + +21. _Why This Error Exists and What it Consists Of._ + +In adjusting watches to temperature it is not always possible nor +expected to obtain a perfect rate between the two extremes, +manufacturers generally allowing from two to ten seconds variation +according to the grade. + +Even when the rate obtained is perfect it will only be so at the two +extremes and there will always be a few seconds variation in the +middle or normal temperature. + +This variation will always be a gain of from two to four seconds in +the higher grades of steel brass balances and usually more in cheaper +balances. + +As there is no possible correction for this irregularity in ordinary +balances it has long been known as the middle temperature error and +for many years was one of the most perplexing problems that the +manufacturer of specially fine timepieces had to deal with. + +Various devices were originated from time to time for the purpose of +counteracting the error but they were always too infinitely +complicated to be of commercial or scientific value, and none of them +were ever adopted as a solution of the problem. + +In chapter I, No. 3, will be found a description of the distortions of +compensation balances in the extremes of temperature and the cause of +the middle error is due entirely to the fact that these distortions +are not exactly equal in both directions. The free ends of the rims +are drawn outward from the concentric form to a slightly greater +proportional degree as the temperature decreases from normal and they +are not forced inward at an even proportional degree with increase of +temperature. + + +22. _How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome the Middle Temperature Error._ + +Through extensive experiment in the foreign laboratories balances +containing nickel steel have been found to almost eliminate the middle +error, which is reduced to one second or less, making it possible to +obtain perfect adjustment in various temperatures. + +All highest prize watches passing through the Geneva Observatory are +equipped with these balances and they have been adopted for commercial +use to a large extent by the manufacturers of the finer grades of +watches. + +From the same source success has recently been attained in applying +this metal to hairsprings and using them in connection with uncut +balances, but owing to the necessary high cost of production, their +general use may be delayed for some years to come. Their general use +however would revolutionize the present-day methods of adjusting to +temperature as there would be practically no expansion or contraction +to deal with. + +Nickel steel balances will always be found to have the cuts about one +eighth of the circle distant from the arms instead of close to the +arms. This is made necessary by the fact that the coefficient of +nickel steel is about ten times less than that of ordinary steel, and +if the cuts were made close to the arms the brass in expansion would +force the free end of the rims to curve inward to such an extent that +it would cause an abnormally fast rate in heat. + +By making the cuts more central the length of the segments are +reduced, thereby causing less curvature of the extreme ends and more +nearly equalizing the extent of curvature both ways from the +concentric form. This equalization is what causes the reduction in the +middle error and its absence in ordinary balances is what causes the +larger error. + +Non-magnetic or palladium balances are also credited with a smaller +middle temperature error than the ordinary steel brass balance, but +owing to the unstable nature of the metal they have not proved to be +as reliable in other respects and are not used to any large extent. + +The middle temperature error is of course a small factor in the larger +sense of obtaining time from commercial watches but its influence is +apparent in timing and it will therefore be considered further in the +section devoted to Final Regulation, Chapter XV, No. 77. + + + + +PART II + +THE ADJUSTMENT TO ISOCHRONISM AND POSITIONS + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +GENERAL CONSIDERATION + + +23. _Optional Allowances for Variation._ + +The phrase "Adjusted to Isochronism and Positions" does not always +indicate the same high quality or the expense assumed in obtaining +close rating in different kinds of watches. + +One particular model may be stamped "Adjusted to Five Positions" and +this may indicate that the manufacturer of this model has tested all +watches of this grade for twenty-four hours in each of five positions +and that the extreme extent of variation from one position to any +other, among any of these watches, did not exceed six seconds. Another +model may be stamped in exactly the same way and it may indicate that +all watches of that particular grade have been tested in exactly the +same way and that the extreme extent of variation from one position to +any other, did not exceed twenty-five seconds. + +The statement regarding the number of positions to which the watch has +been adjusted is just as legitimate in the latter instance as it is in +the former, for the watches are really tested in five positions and +required to perform within specified allowances. + +The important difference is in the established limits of requirement, +one demanding an extreme of only six seconds variation and the other +allowing twenty-five seconds. Both watches may have the same number of +jewels and there is no way to discern the actual variation except +through a test in positions. + +Technically it would be just as legitimate to stamp and advertise +watches as above and have an allowance of fifty or more seconds, +providing that they were actually tested and not allowed to pass with +a variation greater than this limit. + +Close limits of allowance require adjusters of greater skill and +material of a finer degree of accuracy, however, than do greater +allowances, but the dealer and consumer are generally not informed in +regard to this particular point. Some watchmakers also do not +understand this feature clearly and the limits of variation to which +watches have been adjusted are seldom considered. + +Should the difference in allowances and identical advertising be +interpreted as an injustice to the manufacturer who maintains close +limits for his various grades of watches, it must be remembered that +they speak for themselves after passing over the counter and into the +hands of satisfied customers. His reputation after a period of years +will be more firmly established than will that of his less particular +competitor in the high grade field. A similar situation prevails in +the repair shop, and the fact that many of the leading dealers and +railroad watch inspectors require at least a three position adjustment +in the repairing of high grade watches, is convincing evidence that +position rating demonstrates its importance in actual service when +applied to repair work, as surely as it does when applied to new +watches. + +In placing limits of allowance for variation in various grades it is +not intended that all watches of a particular grade will have the +extreme variation. It is possible that an individual watch in the +twenty-five seconds allowance class may have an even better rate than +another watch that is in the six seconds class. It is also possible +for a watch in either class to have a perfect rate, although these +would be rather exceptional instances. + + +24. _Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting._ + +The adjustments to isochronism and positions are not permanent to the +same extent that the temperature adjustment is, and they can be +damaged or destroyed entirely by the average workman in making +ordinary repairs unless he is familiar with the common principles +governing their production and maintenance. + +Experienced workmen who are familiar with these principles avoid +unconsciously doing any damage and make practical repairs in a manner +that will maintain or improve the original adjustment and time-keeping +qualities of the watch. + +To know and to make use of these principles does not make a "putterer" +of the workman, in fact the consequence is just the reverse, because +the training acquired tends to eliminate guess work and enables him to +determine more readily as to just what the trouble may be, how to +correct it, and as to just what degree of perfection is required in a +particular instance. + +Certain practical requirements are necessary in reaching this standard +of workmanship and it would not be profitable to attempt to do +adjusting unless one has first had a reasonable degree of training as +a watchmaker or repairer, especially in such branches of the work as +truing and poising balances; truing, leveling and centering +hairsprings; matching the escapement; finishing pivots, and properly +cleaning and assembling watches. + +These mechanical requirements and experiences alone are not +sufficient, however, and a certain amount of study must be +consolidated with them in order to become proficient. This study +should not deal so much with the problems of manufacture of the watch, +or its various parts, as it does with the problems pertaining to the +finished results that are to be obtained through refinement and +intelligent assembly of these parts. The workman's willingness to +indulge in such study is a very large asset among the requirements, +and it only remains for him to obtain the proper class of instruction +and then to conscientiously follow correct methods in his practice and +to make personal experiments, conforming to the instruction, so that +his confidence will become more enduring. + +It is further required that he be capable of realizing the difference +between genuine and imitation materials, especially such essentials as +balance staffs, hole jewels, mainsprings and roller jewels, which are +the most frequently changed and most frequently substituted parts of +watches. Imitation materials may be less expensive as a matter of +first cost but staffs may have pivots and shoulders out of line, or +out of true; hole jewels may be rough, out of round or extremely +thick; mainsprings soft, or of improper proportion, and roller jewels +may have sharp edges which cause rubbing in the fork and "hanging up" +when the second hand is reversed. It is most satisfactory to depend +upon the materials supplied by the manufacturer of the watch, as +imitation goods are seldom any better. + + +25. _Train and Escapement Freedom._ + +Beyond a general insight of high class watch-work this book is not +intended to meet the requirements of beginners. It is designed +principally for watchmakers of some experience, and cannot presume to +cover details that would be essential for those in early +apprenticeship. It is thought essential, however, to consider some +matters in a general way and among these are the subjects of side +shakes and end shakes, and the escapement, as far as they pertain to +general inspection of the watch without consideration of details that +refer to correction of irregularities which are presumed to have been +acquired in earlier training. + +Thoroughness of mechanical ability always demands a system of +inspection and of making corrections and it is quite necessary to +follow some method that will reveal any point or points that may not +be up to standard. + +As a rule it is best to begin at either end of the watch, and if it is +to be taken down the best place to begin is usually with the balance +and examine each part as it is removed until the barrel has been +reached. If it is not to be taken down, just as good results will be +obtained by beginning the examination at the barrel and finishing with +the balance. Sometimes watchmakers of considerable ability will demand +as a basic consideration that pivots be fitted with very little side +shake and that end shakes also be quite close if close time is to be +expected. + +These presumed to be, wide side shakes and long end shakes, very often +have nothing whatever to do with the absence of a close position rate +and frequently are absolutely necessary for good performance of the +watch and proper space for oil. + +The importance of reasonable limits is of course granted, but it is +very detrimental to have pivots too close fitting and more stoppage +and irregular time keeping can be traced to lack of freedom than can +be traced to excessive shakes. + +If the repairer is not familiar with accepted standards of side and +end shakes, he can improve his judgment by examining watches of the +higher grades and comparing the results with those found in cheaper +makes of watches. + +Such examination will invariably disclose the fact that fine watches +receive very careful consideration in this respect. The center, third +and fourth wheels generally having from 0.03 mm. to 0.05 mm. freedom +for end shake and 0.015 mm. to 0.02 mm. for side shake. The escape +wheel, pallet and balance will be found to run quite uniform at from +0.02 mm. to 0.03 mm. freedom for end shake and from 0.0075 mm. to +0.0125 mm. for side shake. The smaller and thinner watches generally +favoring the lesser figures and the larger and thicker watches +favoring the higher. + +This uniformity of freedom will be found absent in cheaper watches; +for instance, a center wheel may have 0.02 mm. end shake and 0.01 mm. +side shake which would be very close fitting for large pivots. The +fourth wheel may have as much as 0.08 mm. end shake and 0.03 mm. side +shake which would be too great. The pallet may have 0.05 mm. end shake +and the balance 0.01 mm. and in this instance the short end shake of +the balance would be more detrimental in most instances than would the +longer end shake of the pallet. The variation will even be found to +exceed these figures and when they are found in connection with thick, +straight hole jewels they often interfere with a close position rate +and with regularity of time in service. The interference in +timekeeping is considerably aggravated in cases where one pivot has +excessive side shake and the opposite pivot is close fitting, as this +tends to cause almost certain binding of the close fitting pivot as +soon as the power of the mainspring is applied. + +The end shake and side shake allowance for the barrel depends +considerably upon its style of construction. Safety barrels +constructed so that the arbor revolves with the main wheel, when the +watch is running, may have about the same end shake and side shake as +applied to the center, third and fourth wheels, and if the pivots of +the arbor are quite large they may have a trifle more side shake. + +As a rule larger pivots will stand more side shake than smaller +pivots; this, however, does not apply in the case of large bearings, +such as safety main wheels that revolve around a stationary arbor, or +going barrels where the entire barrel revolves around the stationary +arbor when the watch is running. + +In such instances the main wheel or barrel should have from 0.03 mm. +to 0.05 mm. end shake on the arbor and should be just free for side +shake. + +The arbor which turns only when the watch is wound requires merely +freedom for end shake between the plates, as well as for side shake +where the pivots pass through the plates. + +With reference to the escapement, good watchmakers often have +different methods of examining the various points and of making +corrections and it is not of so much importance as to just how +correct conditions are obtained, as it is that they actually be +obtained. + +Whatever the method may be it is certain that each escape wheel tooth +must have positive locking on each pallet stone and that there must be +positive space for drop between the back of each stone and the pointed +end of each escape wheel tooth. There must also be sufficient draw +when each tooth and stone are locked to hold the fork against the +bankings. + +When the lock, drop and draw are correct it is next necessary to see +that the fork length and guard pin freedom are correct. + +There is only one positive method of determining as to when the fork +length is correct, and this is through closing the bankings to drop. + +This can be done either before or after placing the balance in the +watch and merely requires turning the banking screws so that the +excentric pins will close in on the fork until the fork arrives at the +pins, at the same instant that the tooth drops on the pallet stone. +This eliminates any slide of the stone on the tooth beyond the actual +locking and in this condition it is required that the roller jewel +pass through the fork slot and out of the fork horn entirely on both +sides with perfect freedom. + +Should it touch on both sides of the fork, then the fork is either too +long or the roller jewel is too far forward, and if it touches on one +side only it may require simply equalization of the freedom. The guard +pin length also must be obtained with the bankings closed to drop and +should be just free from the safety roller on both sides. + +When the inspection proves that these conditions have been properly +provided for, it is necessary to slightly open the bankings so that +there will be just a trifle of slide of each stone, on each tooth, +after the locking takes place. + +Extremely wide side shakes of the escape, pallet or balance pivots +will sometimes cause striking of the roller jewel when conditions are +otherwise correct, and these side shakes should not be very much +beyond the extreme limits mentioned in this number. The fact of this +feature, however, should not be construed as a recommendation that +these pivots be closely fitted, for reasonable freedom is to be +desired because it is positively necessary. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THEORY AND PRACTICE + + +26. _Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal Hairspring._ + +Theory teaches us in brief, that the position adjustment is made +necessary principally because of frictional errors. It would therefore +seem that if the watch was mechanically correct there would be little +or no requirement for position alterations. + +We are also advised that an isochronal hairspring is one which will +cause the long and short arcs of the balance to be made in equal time +and that to attain this, the center of gravity of the spring must +coincide with the center of gravity of the balance and that a certain +pinning point is necessary in producing this result. + +Now if we have a watch of correct mechanical construction and fitted +with an isochronal spring it would seem that a close rating timepiece +would be assured. + + +27. _How Theory Works Out in Practice and What Isochronism Consists +of._ + +Practical adjusting, however, proves that such is not the case, for +even when the construction and alterations produce watches as nearly +correct as scientific methods can determine, there is often +considerable variation in the position rates. A twenty-four hour test +in any position may prove that the long and short arcs are made in +equal time showing the spring to be isochronous and yet the position +variations have not been accounted for. In this connection experience +proves that a spring showing a perfect isochronal rate may have its +collet pinning point changed, in relation to the pinning point at the +stud and that through such an alteration, a correction in positions +can be obtained, without in the least disturbing the perfect +isochronal rate. + +This indicates that the separation of the two adjustments which is +possible in theory, does not hold good in practice, because a spring +showing a perfect isochronal rate has been altered for the purpose of +counteracting some position error and thereby producing a practical +center of gravity of the balance and spring combined, instead of +separately. + +This may be further explained as creating an error in a spring which +is supposed to be theoretically isochronous, with the idea of making +it act in opposition to the position error and the combination thus +obtained produces practical isochronism as well as a corrected +position rate. + +It is not suggested that these relative pinning points be altered for +the purpose of overcoming position variation such as may be caused by +dirt and gummy oil, damaged pivots, or balances that are out of poise. +The watch should be in first-class condition and have a good motion in +every position and then the alterations may be safely undertaken in +accordance with the principles. + +Adjusted to isochronism indicates that the watch functions uniformly +during the entire twenty-four hours running. It is immaterial as to +whether the rate be perfect or whether it be a gain or a loss, so long +as it is uniform. + +The watch is not isochronous if there is both a gain and a loss in the +rate, even though the time be perfect at the expiration of twenty-four +hours. + +Experiment will demonstrate that watches carefully adjusted to +positions will also have a very close isochronal rate. These +isochronal experiments can be made by timing watches for twenty-four +hours in any one of the vertical positions and noting the variation +in periods of from four to twelve hours and by comparing the variation +in the first period, during which time the arc of motion is long, with +the variation in the latter period when the mainspring power is weaker +and the arc of motion is short. + + +28. _Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation._ + +The most common causes of isochronal variation with which the repairer +has to deal and which are often very destructive to position rates, as +well as to general time keeping, may be found in the factor of, out of +poise and uneven motive force, which is one of the elementary +principles of adjusting. This feature should be thoroughly understood +by all watchmakers, so that as good results as possible may be +obtained from all watches above low grade, even though no test for +adjustment is to be made. + +When the balance is slightly out of poise and the motion is exactly +one and one-fourth turn during the twenty-four hours, this out of +poise will not affect the isochronism. When the motion varies and +reaches approximately one and one-half turn during the first few hours +after winding and then drops to one and one-quarter turn and finally +to one turn or less during the latter part of the twenty-four hours, +the poise error will have considerable effect. This factor is not +perceptible in the flat positions, but shows up to the full extent in +the vertical positions and the variation differs according to the +location of the point that is heavy. For example, if the balance is +heavy on the lower side when at rest, the watch will lose during the +hours that the arc of motion is over one and one-fourth turn and will +gain when the motion drops to one turn or less. + +Should the heavy point be on the top side of balance the result will +be reversed and the watch will gain when the motion is over one and +one-fourth turn and will lose when it drops to one turn or less. + +The total variation may be either seconds or minutes, depending upon +the extent of the poise error and experiments will prove that serious +isochronal variations can be traced to the simple cause of lack of +poise and irregular motion in more instances than to any other cause. + +The arc of one and one-fourth turn is the ideal motion, as slight +poise errors are neutralized at this point, but very few watches will +maintain this motion for twenty-four hours, therefore the poise must +be as nearly perfect as possible. The nearest approach to even motion +of modern watches is found in the fine Swiss grades equipped with stop +work, which causes only the best part of the mainspring to be +utilized. + +Such watches also receive the most expert attention as to gearings of +wheels and pinions and the train wheels are specially rounded up on +their respective staffs. This latter feature has been adopted by at +least two of the American manufacturers of fine watches during the +past few years with considerable benefit in producing even motion and +the use of lighter mainsprings. It should be definitely understood +that these tests refer to the vertical positions of the watch only and +that the horizontal positions are not affected in the same way by lack +of poise. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +RELATIVE PINNING POINTS OF THE HAIRSPRING + + +29. _Original Springing of Watches._ + +Theory and practice agree that different models of watches have +important relative points of attachment of the spring to collet and +stud. In the original springing and adjusting of high grade watches, +these points receive careful consideration, and only a very small +percentage ever require future alterations. + +There are instances, however, where the original allowance of position +variation has been considerable, also medium grades where no attention +has been directed to pinning points and in which an occasional +alteration may be required before a close position rate can be +obtained. + + +30. _How Pinning Point Alterations are Made._ + +These alterations are generally made by breaking off or letting out a +small section of the inner coil at the collet. In making such +alterations a quarter of a coil broken away at the collet will have +the same effect as will a quarter of a coil broken off at the outer +end and will require less weighting of the balance to correct the mean +time. It will also avoid breaking and remaking the over coil and the +possible necessity of readjustment to temperature. Letting out the +spring can be accomplished by unpinning and repinning the spring at +collet with less of the coil entered in the pinhole. This is not a +positive alteration, however, because very often the segment in the +pinhole is as short as it can be with safety. + +A more substantial correction is that of reforming the over coil in a +manner that will cause the end holding the stud to be shifted further +forward. + +The method of obtaining this correction is illustrated in Fig. 8. The +broken line shows the original formation of the over coil with the +stud on the line "B". The solid lines show the corrections with the +stud shifted to the line A. + +[Illustration: Fig. 8] + +When the collet is turned to replace the spring in beat, the stud will +be in its original location on the line "B." + +This will cause the pinning point at collet to be shifted from "A" to +"B" and bring it that much nearer to the horizontal line "C." + +This alteration has the same effect as that of letting out the spring +at the collet or of moving the stud forward on the over coil, with the +advantage of eliminating any change in the mean time. + +It should be definitely understood that the objective in making the +above alterations and as illustrated with the aid of the following +cuts, is the relation of the pinning point at collet to the pinning +point at stud, and that the change in length of the spring has no +bearing on the matter whatever as far as the position rate is +concerned. + + +31. _Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Models._ + +It is often supposed that hairsprings having exactly even coils are +correct for close position and isochronal rating. Such springs do +approximate the nearest correct relation in more instances than any +other relation. They are precisely correct for very few models, +however, and are very incorrect for many models, as will be seen +through study of the following cuts showing the various points of +attachment and the different results obtainable in each. + + +32. _How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch._ + +A very simple method of locating the proper point of attachment of the +spring to collet is to face the train side of the movement and hold +the balance stationary with a small twig, and with the pallet fork +just midway between the two bankings. + +[Illustration: Fig. 9] + +Presume the existence of a vertical line through the center of +hairspring and collet as shown at "A B" Fig. 9. Then presume a +horizontal line as shown at "C D" on the same cut. + +[Illustration: Fig. 10] + +The proper pinning point is at the intersection of the collet and +horizontal line; the spring may be either over or under even coils, +depending entirely upon the location of the stud hole in the balance +bridge as demonstrated by Figures 9, 10, 14, 15. + +When the spring develops to the right from collet as shown in Fig. 9, +for example, the proper point of attachment is on the right side of +collet as shown at "E" Fig. 9, and also at "J" Fig. 14. + +If it develops to the left as the springs of all fine Swiss watches +do, the proper point of attachment is on the left side of collet as +shown at "F" Fig. 10. + + +33. _Results in Vertical Position Rates Due to Changing the Pinning +Point._ + +In either of the above instances the spring will develop upward as it +leaves the collet. These points of attachment always produce a fast +pendant up rate when compared to the opposite, or pendant down rate, +and all high grade watches are originally fitted with springs +conforming to this principle. + +If these points of attachment were changed to the opposite side of +collet so that the spring would develop downward as shown at "G" Fig. +11, and "H" Fig. 12, the results would be reversed and the pendant up +rate would be slow in comparison to the pendant down rate. + +[Illustration: Fig. 11] + +This point of attachment in which the spring develops downward from +the collet is generally known as the slow point among adjusters, and +when a spring is pinned at either the slow or fast point the pendant +right and left positions generally compare quite closely to each other +in timing, provided that the poise and other conditions of the watch +are correct. + +If the pinning point was changed to the intersection of the collet and +vertical line as shown in "I" Fig. 13, the pendant up and down rates +would compare nearly equal to each other and the pendant right +position would be slow compared to the pendant left position. + +[Illustration: Fig. 12] + +If it were pinned at the intersection of the collet and vertical line +just opposite to that shown in Fig. 13, the pendant left position +would be slow compared to the pendant right position. + +[Illustration: Fig. 13] + +The vertical points of attachment are seldom used, for the reason that +the variation between the pendant right and left positions would be +very difficult to control within close limits, due to the existence of +the natural error. As these positions, together with the pendant up +position are the most important of the four vertical positions, they +are given preference, and the natural error is placed in the pendant +down position where it will be the least detrimental to the +performance of the watch. + + +34. _The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated._ + +[Illustration: Fig. 14] + +The natural error generally consists of from twelve to fifteen seconds +in finely constructed watches, and exists because of the fact that it +is impossible to perfectly poise a spiral spring. The location of the +heavy point, however, may be shifted by changing the point of +attachment at collet as described in No. 33, this Chapter. The nearest +approximation of a poised spiral spring is probably attained through +L. Lossier's inner terminal curve. Results are not positive, however, +and any deviation from the required precision makes the curve +valueless. It is possible to obtain perfect adjustment between three +vertical quarter positions and the two horizontal positions, but all +four quarter positions cannot be perfectly adjusted because the +natural error will show up in one of them. Manufacturers of fine +watches do not of course presume to supply perfect adjustment in the +five positions. Some however, have considerably closer limits of +allowance for variation than do others and it is logical to presume +that a line of high grade watches having a five position allowance of +six seconds from one position to any other would show better results +than another line which had even a six position adjustment and an +allowance of fifteen seconds from one position to any other. + + +35. _Principle of Pinning Point Alterations._ + +[Illustration: Fig. 15] + +When an alteration of any pinning point is necessary, the extent and +direction of the alteration are determined by the rate of the watch. +For instance, if a spring is pinned at the fast point and if a +slightly slower pendant up rate is desired, the spring can be broken +off at the collet and pinned one-eighth above the horizontal line. + +If the rate is to be made slightly faster, the spring can be let out a +trifle at the collet, the over coil reformed or the stud moved forward +on the over coil so that the collet point of attachment will come +slightly below the horizontal line when the spring is placed in beat. +The former alteration causes an approach toward the slow point and in +making the latter alteration we assume that the fast point is a trifle +below the horizontal line on that particular watch. When altering +springs from the extreme fast point to the extreme slow point, it is +advisable to remove a trifle less of the inner coil than the extreme +calculation. This will cause the point of attachment to be slightly +above the horizontal line on the slow side and will most always +produce the result desired and if it does not, there is still a +possibility of further alteration. The same principle applies in +making an alteration from the extreme slow to the extreme fast point +and in this case the point of attachment to collet may be just a +trifle below the horizontal line. + +The theory of this is that all shortening of the coil from the fast to +the slow point produces a slower rate pendant up, until the extreme +slow point is reached. After passing this extreme slow point the +pendant up rate begins to grow faster until the extreme fast point is +reached. [A]The designations "right" and "left" in regard to pinning +points are used with the explicit understanding that the individual is +facing the train side of the movement. The same designations used as +referring to position rates, or results to be expected in positions +should be interpreted to mean with the individual facing the dial side +of the watch. + + +36. _Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models._ + +The points shown in Figures 14 and 15 refer generally to American +hunting models. In all other high grade watches the location of the +balance and spring will be found either to the right or left of the +center of the watch. + +In American hunting models the balance and spring are located in the +lower center of the watch. + +This is due to the fact that American manufacturers do not construct +separate models for hunting watches as is done by foreign +manufacturers. + +Instead of producing an entirely separate model, the method simply +calls for a change in the construction of the barrel bridge by +reversing the position of the barrel and winding wheels. This places +the winding sleeve at figure three on the dial, which is customary on +hunting watches and causes the entire movement to be shifted by ninety +degrees with the balance just about opposite the pendant. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote A: Important Note.] + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +MANIPULATION OF THE REGULATOR PINS + + +37. _Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins._ + +On some occasions when the pinning points seem to be comparatively +close and the watch is in good condition with the balance in poise, it +is possible to obtain corrections by closing or opening the regulator +pins. + +This, however, can only be resorted to, to a limited extent, as +otherwise the value of the regulator may be impaired. + +The pins should not be closed tight enough to cause "kinking" of the +over coil and they should not be spread apart any more than enough to +make the mean rate about 2 seconds per hour slower. + +Some models of watches consistently require that the pins be closed, +while other models require that they be slightly spread, and it is +therefore advisable not to disturb the pins when cleaning watches +unless they have been bent by incompetent hands. + +It is better to reserve the majority of pin alterations for such time +as the position rate determines the necessity of an alteration. When +the pins are open, however, it is necessary to adjust the coil so that +its vibration will be equal. + +Correct execution in spreading or closing the pins will very often +make it possible to obtain a correction of six or eight seconds +between the vertical and horizontal positions. + + +38. _Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil Between the Pins._ + +The proper method of examining this vibration is to stop the balance +and observe the movement of the coil between the pins. + +The vibration should be equal at the slightest oscillation of the +balance as well as during the longer arcs. The coil should not rest +against one or the other of the pins at any time unless they are both +closed. Emphasis is placed upon equal vibration of the coil when the +pins are open because of its importance, and if results are not +obtained (as expected) the examination should be repeated to see if +correct conditions have been attained. Examination of this vibration +should be made from both sides of the pins and usually the best +estimate can be obtained by looking between the pins from the stud +side. + + +39. _Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing the +Regulator Pins._ + +When the regulator pins are tightly closed and the watch has a fast +pendant up position rate, it will be possible to obtain a slower rate +by slightly spreading the pins. + +When the pins are spread and vibration of the coil between them can be +discerned, and the pendant up rate is slow, a faster rate can be +obtained by closing them. + +In spreading the pins they should be drawn away from the coil equally, +as otherwise the coil will strike one pin with more force than the +other, which will not produce results as expected and will cause +uncertain regulation. In closing the pins they should be drawn +together one at a time until both are in equal contact. They should +not be merely squeezed together, as this causes distortion of the coil +at the point of contact. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +FACTORY AND REPAIR SHOP ADJUSTING + + +40. _Routine Varies According to Circumstances._ + +The principles covering the adjustment of watches are the same in the +repair shop as they are in the factory and they are equally the same +in the various lines of high grade watches regardless as to whether +they are of American or foreign extraction. + +The routine covering the work to be done, however, may vary, depending +upon the quantity of watches that are turned out. In the factories +where large numbers of watches are adjusted the adjuster is trained in +the various branches of watch work and eventually devotes his entire +time to adjusting. The watches are generally turned over to him after +they are all assembled and ready for the final balance and spring +work, or after they have been finished and rated, in which instance he +receives only those that are not within the requirements and he then +makes the necessary alterations, after which they are again tested for +results. + +In some repair shops where large numbers of fine watches are handled, +a similar system is used and one competent adjuster devotes his time +principally to the work of timing and adjusting. + + +41. _Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop of One or Two +Workmen._ + +By far the greater number of watchmakers are employed in stores having +only one or two workmen who are required to do the cleaning and to +make all repairs. For this reason an adjuster of equal skill could not +do as much actual adjusting as could be done in either of the two +previous instances, but for the same reason he would not be expected +to do as much. + +He can, however, adjust the high grade watches that he repairs just as +closely, and he should not permit himself to feel that time and the +nature of his position prohibits him from doing so. Whether it does, +or does not prevent him from obtaining close rates depends entirely +upon his training and understanding of the necessary details. If he is +skilful and accurate, his output of work in the long run will not be +reduced, his work will give better satisfaction and he will have less +"comebacks" to take up his valuable time. + + +42. _Advantage of Understanding Adjusting Even Though Watches are Not +Tested in Positions or Isochronism._ + +To understand position adjusting thoroughly is of the greatest +advantage in obtaining satisfactory time from any medium or high grade +watches even though they are not to be tested in positions because +vital points will receive intelligent observation where they would +otherwise be overlooked. + + +43. _Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience._ + +The previous notes and rules covering pinning points of the hairspring +as detailed by the cuts and descriptions, together with the concrete +adjusting examples to follow would no doubt be of sufficient note for +watchmakers of considerable experience. + +There are, however, many ambitious workmen who have not devoted any +time whatever to the study or practice of adjusting and to whom some +elementary study and practice may be quite indispensable. + +To be of service to this class of workmen chapters XI and XII are +devoted to preliminary notes and practice lessons. + +The contents of these chapters can be worked out in practice by almost +any workman who is capable of holding a position as watchmaker and it +is substantially necessary that they be mastered before finished +results are to be expected. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE FOR BEGINNERS + + +44. _Practical Suggestions._ + +Experience will eventually prove that most of the variations in +positions are caused by apparently insignificant details. The mistake +made by the average repairer is generally that of failing to detect +these details and to make slight corrections where necessary, as he +proceeds with the ordinary cleaning and repairing of the watch. + +This oversight often prevents what would otherwise be excellent +results in timekeeping and makes it necessary to utilize extra time +and labor in the effort to obtain more consistent timekeeping. + + +45. _The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust._ + +The first consideration in position adjusting should be directed +toward equalizing the time in the two horizontal positions. This +equalization should be accomplished entirely by attention to details +that can be plainly seen before arriving at the point of actual timing +of the watch. The principal requirement for equal time between dial up +and dial down is equal arc of motion of the balance in each of the two +positions, and the adjuster should become capable of obtaining this +equal arc of motion before attempting to obtain close rating in the +other positions. + + +46. _Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down._ + +Variations between dial up and dial down may be due to one or more of +the following causes which have been arranged in two groups, the +first group consisting of the most frequent and common causes, while +the second group consists of causes equally detrimental but less +common. + +Group No. 1 + + 1. Dirt or thick oil in one or both balance jewels. + 2. Burred or marred balance pivots. + 3. End of one balance pivot flat or rough and opposite pivot polished. + 4. Ends of both balance pivots polished but not same form. + 5. Balance pivot bent. + 6. Hairspring rubbing balance arm or stud. + 7. Hairspring concave or convex in form instead of perfectly level. + 8. Over coil rubbing under balance cock. + 9. Over coil rubbing center wheel. (Some watches). + +Group No. 2 + + 10. Balance pivots fitted too close in jewels. + 11. One pivot having excessive side shake and the opposite close + fitting. + 12. Escape or pallet pivots bent or damaged. + 13. Balance end stone pitted or badly out of flat. + 14. Over coil rubbing outside coil, at point where it curves over + spring. + 15. Balance arm or screw touching pallet bridge. + 16. Balance screw out too far, touching bridge or train wheel. + 17. Safety roller rubbing dial plate or jewel setting. + 18. Fork rubbing impulse roller. + 19. Guard pin rubbing edge of safety roller. + 20. Roller jewel long and rubs guard pin. + + +47. _Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble._ + +Any of the above irregularities will cause a variation in motion +between dial up and dial down and invariably the trouble will be +found on the side which has the shorter motion. For instance, a pivot +that is flat or rough on the end will cause a shorter motion, when it +is down, than will the opposite pivot when it is down, provided that +its end is slightly rounded and highly polished. The same is true when +the oil is gummy or dirty in one jewel and the opposite jewel is clean +and freshly oiled. + +Capped escape or pallet pivots when flat or rough on one end have the +same effect to a lesser degree. + +It is never proper to make the end of a pivot flat or rough and +thereby shorten and equalize the motion. Neither should the ends of +both balance pivots be flattened at any time. On the contrary, the +ends of pivots should always be slightly rounded and highly polished: +there is no logical reason for having them otherwise. + + +48. _Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot._ + +There are occasionally instances where a poor motion on one pivot is +caused by a slight burr on the opposite pivot. This is usually due to +the fact that while the burred pivot is running on its own end stone, +there is space enough between the end stone and jewel to give the burr +clearance, but when the position of the watch is reversed, the balance +end shake allowance causes the burr to rub on the top of jewel hole +and prevents perfect freedom of motion when the good pivot is +downward. + + +49. _Examining the Hairspring._ + +The hairspring may be true and level but it should be carefully +examined to see that there is no possibility of touching at any point. +The observation should take place during the full arc of motion of the +balance, for there are some instances in which no rubbing takes place +until the motion accelerates. The watch should be held at different +angles and the space between the balance arm and spring, and the stud +and spring, closely scrutinized for possible contact. The space +between the spring and over coil at the point where the over coil +rises and curves over the spring should be at least equal to the width +of the coils and care should be taken to see that the over coil just +before the point of rising has the usual space between it and the next +coil. Either position in which the hairspring may rub will have a +shorter motion and a gain in time compared to the opposite position in +which there is no interference. + + +50. _Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion._ + +Invariably the arc of motion which is the shortest will gain time +compared to the opposite position which has a longer motion. There +are, however, some few instances in which there are exceptions to this +rule, and knowledge of these exceptions is quite valuable in +preventing confusion and doubtfulness in the certainty of making +specific alterations. As an example in the horizontal positions; if +both end stones are perfect and the freedom of one pivot in the jewel +is correct while the opposite pivot has entirely too much freedom, the +motion may be somewhat shorter with the proper fitting pivot downward +while the rate may be slower compared to the opposite position. This +is caused by the balance describing a larger circle when the large +hole jewel is upward, as the pivot is allowed to travel a greater +distance from the center of the hole as it wavers from side to side +during the oscillations. + +When the watch is reversed the weight of the balance prevents the +pivot from wobbling in the large hole and eliminates the possibility +of compensating for the larger circle described by the balance in the +opposite position. + +The same results are possible when the freedom of both pivots is +correct and when one end stone is pitted, as the pit in the stone +causes a short motion when downward and prevents the pivot from +having any side play whatever, while the opposite pivot enjoys full +play to whatever freedom there may be and through this causing a +somewhat larger circle to be described by the balance and a slower +rate in time. + +It should be understood that this does not refer to instances where +the end stone surface is merely slightly worn, but to pittings in +which the surface of the stone has been actually pierced. In most +instances of slight wear the motion will be shorter and the rate fast +which conforms to the general rule covering rate and motion. + + +51. _Detailed Practice._ + +For preliminary practice in position adjusting, select a watch of +about 17 jewels which has just been cleaned and put in order to the +best of one's ability. + +Regulate it so that it will time within ten seconds in twenty-four +hours. Then run it dial up for twenty-four hours and make a notation +as to the number of seconds either fast or slow. Next run it dial down +for twenty-four hours and make note of the number of seconds fast or +slow in this position. If there is a variation in time between the two +positions it will be found that the position having the faster rate of +the two will also have a shorter arc of motion.[B] + +The exact arc of motion in each position can be known by observing the +arms of the balance and comparing the extent of the arc with some +point on the pallet bridge. + +A variation of one-eighth of an inch in motion will generally make a +difference of four or five seconds in the rate and greater variations +will make corresponding increases in the difference. + +When a watch is in good order a correct motion for the horizontal +positions is generally considered to be that of one and one-half turn, +which consists of three-quarters of a revolution of the balance in +each direction. + +Should the motion be very much below this, in both positions, there +may be something wrong with the general condition of the watch or +possibly there may be a weak mainspring at fault, or an imitation +spring that is too long and thick may take up too much room in the +barrel and cause poor motion as surely as will one that is two weak. + +Assuming, however, that the motion is good in one position and drops +off in the other, it is quite probable that only an ordinary position +correction will be required and the immediate problem to be considered +is that of causing the short arc of motion to accelerate enough to +equal the longer arc. The precise correction required will most +probably be found among the causes listed in No. 46, this Chapter. + + +52. _Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison._ + +The horizontal position which has the slower rate of the two should be +considered as the unit which is correct and it will always have the +longer motion of the two, barring the occasional exception as +described in No. 50. + +This longer arc of motion is universally due to a better condition, +while the shorter motion indicates that something is wrong, and it +should always be the aim of the adjuster to improve some condition +that is below standard, rather than to make some good condition a +little worse in order to equalize the rates. + +It may be possible to equalize horizontal rates by flattening the ends +of pivots, but it does not require much more time to improve the +motion in one position than it does to make it a little worse in +another. The advantage is all one way and results either good or bad +depend entirely upon the viewpoint of the worker and how he applies +himself to the situation. + + +53. _Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction._ + +In the examination of pivots, end stones and jewels, it is necessary +to use a stronger glass than the one used for ordinary work. + +Damaged pivots can often be detected by looking through the end stone +with a strong glass while the balance is moving. If imperfect they +will appear dark or display a slight waver or flash and if they are in +good condition they will appear bright and seem to stand still. They +can also be examined in the lathe and a good true enclosed balance +chuck is of immense value in detecting burrs, chipped edges, rings on +the sides, slight bends and poorly shaped ends. The complete balance +and spring can be inserted and the pivots can be refinished without +disturbing the roller or hairspring. The chuck should be revolving +very slowly when making the examination and moving the belt with the +hand will enable one to see more than can be seen when the lathe is +running at regular speed. Some watchmakers use small bow lathes for +examining and finishing pivots, or the Jacot lathe, which is excellent +for this kind of work. An end stone that has been deeply pitted should +always be discarded and a new one supplied. If the hole is very +slight, however, it can be removed entirely and the surface of the +stone re-polished on a lap charged with No. 5 diamond powder, but the +stone and setting should be thoroughly cleansed by brushing and +pithing before replacement. + +Should a slight particle of diamond or any other hard stone powder +possibly remain on the stone or in the bezel it might eventually enter +the end of pivot and again cause pitting. In case that the end stone +is of the type that is flat and highly polished on both sides, such as +is usually found on detachable dome foreign watches, it can be punched +out with a piece of brass wire or peg wood and replaced in reverse +position, after which the bezel can be closed and the stone will be +just as serviceable as a new one. + +Pivots that have been running on pitted end stones are generally rough +on the end which is charged with some hard substance. They require +special treatment to remove the cause of the pitting and the following +method of refinishing is very good. Place the balance in the lathe and +draw a soft Arkansas oil stone over the end of pivot with pressure +enough to remove a bit of the metal. This will drag out any hard +particles that may be lodged in the end and after this has been done +the pivot should be pithed clean and polished with a smooth hard steel +burnisher covered with oil. + +A hard stone such as sapphire or jasper, or a steel burnisher should +not be used on the pivot until the Arkansas stone has first done its +work, because a hard instrument of this description will force the +small particles that cause the pitting further into the end of the +pivot instead of removing them entirely. + +A pivot that has been treated in this way will not pit the end stone a +second time unless carelessness in the use of hard powder permits +additional particles to come in contact with the pivot or end stone. + +There are some instances in which the steel is highly carbonized but +manufacturers generally use the best steel obtainable for balance +staffs and excessive carbon can generally be detected with a +magnifying glass. Free use of diamond powder and emery wheel dust are +more often responsible. The holes of jewels should never be enlarged +or polished with diamond powder after the jewels have once been placed +in their permanent settings, as this allows the powder to lodge +between the jewel and the setting where it cannot be removed by +cleaning but where it will be drawn out by the oil and charge any +pivot that may be run in the jewel. The grey powder in such instances +may be seen through the top of jewel with a strong glass. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote B: Note Exceptions in No. 50.] + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE ON VERTICAL CORRECTIONS + + +54. _Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation._ + +The first of the vertical positions to be considered is that of +Pendant Up and to understand the causes of and corrections for +variations in this position completes what is known as three position +adjusting. + +The usual causes of variation in the pendant up position as compared +to the horizontal positions are as follows. + + Poor Motion Pendant Up. + Regulator Pins not properly adjusted. + Balance not in poise. + Hairspring not in circle. + Hairspring not pinned at proper point. + + +55. _Poor Motion, Cause and Effect._ + +Among these causes that of Poor Motion covers a number of troubles +such as roller jewel rubbing in fork, guard pin rubbing roller, strong +lock on the escapement, or no lock on some teeth. + +Such causes may not prevent close rating between the horizontal +positions because of non-interference until the position of the watch +is changed. + +The pendant up motion should therefore be the first vertical point of +investigation and if at fault the cause should be eliminated. In this +connection it should not be expected that the arc of motion in the +pendant up or any other vertical position will be as long as it will +be in the horizontal positions, for when a watch is in excellent +condition in every particular the vertical arcs are always +approximately one-fourth of a turn shorter than the horizontal. + +This is due to frictions and is impossible of correction and therefore +should not be confused with a poor motion of greater extent which has +removable causes that are practical of execution. + +A good motion is to be considered as one of the results to be expected +in overhauling and putting a watch in good order and it should not be +understood that it is particularly to be associated with adjusting +only, nor should any watch be slighted in cleaning and assembling with +the idea that adjusting will correct it in a few minutes' time. On the +other hand it should be understood as fundamental that no watch can be +a close time keeper unless it has a good motion and no good adjuster +will attempt to obtain close time in one position or a close rate in +different positions until the motion is first what it should be. If it +is what it should be, about ninety per cent of the necessary work +required for obtaining close position rates will have been completed. + + +56. _Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation._ + +When the watch is in reasonably satisfactory condition and a three +position test proves that the pendant up position has a variation of +from ten to twenty seconds either fast or slow compared to the +horizontal positions, the regulator pins may be the first point of +examination. If there is considerable vibration of the coil between +them, and the pendant rate is slow, it will be necessary to close the +pins and if the rate is fast and the pins are found to be closed so +that there is no vibration of the coil, it will be necessary to spread +them slightly. Closing the pins will of course make the general timing +of the watch faster and spreading them will make it slower and +therefore it will be necessary to regulate the watch for one or two +seconds per hour before again testing it in positions. The result of +either operation, however, will be to cause the rate in the pendant up +position to conform more closely to the horizontal rates. + +Preliminary and profitable two position experiments can be made +between dial up and pendant up, by having the pins closed on most any +watch that is in good order and timing it within five or ten seconds +in twenty-four hours, then rating it in these two positions. Next +spread the pins slightly, re-time the watch and rate it in the same +two positions and compare the variations. A few experiments of this +description will soon demonstrate as to the extent of correction that +can be obtained in this way.[C] The rule of equal vibration of the +coil between the pins after they have been spread must be rigidly +enforced. + + +57. _Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance._ + +Assuming that the motion and regulator pins seem to be satisfactory, +the next point of investigation should be the poise of balance. The +hairspring should be removed and the pivots known to be straight and +polished before testing. The rollers are of course a part of the +balance and are not to be removed. A perfectly poised balance can be +stopped at any point on the tool and it should at least remain +stationary at each of the four quarters of its circumference. No. 28, +Chapter VII, should be consulted for details on poise corrections. + + +58. _Concentricity of the Hairspring._ + +The next point of consideration may be the concentricity of the +hairspring, and it is quite important that the spring be centered as +nearly perfect as the trained eye can determine. Any unusual pressure +of the spring in one direction will cause undue friction and a fast +rate compared to the opposite direction. + +There are several easy tests for determining as to how nearly the +spring may be centered. One of these is to look straight down upon the +spring and examine the space between the coils that extend beyond the +circumference of the dome. This test may be made in three ways, one +with the balance at rest, one with the coils of the spring wound up +and the third with the coils unwound. With the balance at rest and the +spring centered there will be the same space between the coils all +around as though the spring were out of the watch entirely and laying +on the bench. + +If it is not properly centered there will be more space between the +coils on one side than there will be on the opposite. The same +conditions will be apparent when the spring is wound up, although the +coils will all be nearer to each other than they were with the balance +at rest, and when they are unwound the coils will all be farther apart +with the same apparent difference on opposite sides when the centering +is not correct. + +The winding and unwinding of the spring is alternating and almost +instantaneous, as the balance oscillates from one extreme to the +other. For observation of the spring when it is wound or unwound it is +necessary to stop the balance with the finger or camel's hair brush as +it reaches its extreme arc of motion, then hold it stationary for a +few seconds while the space between the coils is being examined. The +balance should then be allowed to swing to the opposite extreme, when +it should again be held for examination of the coils. In one of these +extremes the coils will be wound and in the other they will be unwound +and after a few experiments in stopping and starting the balance it +will be found that the entire examination will not require over ten +seconds' time. + +When the spring is not properly centered the reason is of course +found in some curve of the over coil and the most usual point at fault +is the section or curve on which the regulator pins act. If the coils +open too wide on the side where the regulator pins are located this +section of the coil will be too near the center and should be moved +outward, possibly equal to one-half or one full space of the coils. If +the coils are too close on the side where the pins are it will +probably be found that the section requires shifting toward the center +slightly. The balance should be removed from the watch in either +instance and the coil circled with the over-coiling tweezer, although +experienced workmen can frequently make excellent corrections with a +fine pointed tweezer without removing the balance. + +Finely adjusted watches will always be found to have springs as nearly +perfectly centered as it is possible for expert workmen to get them +and it is quite interesting and instructive to observe the vibration +of a perfect spring by any one interested in the work. + +Some watchmakers center the spring on the balance cock before it is +staked on the balance and very good results can be obtained in this +way. The balance cock is placed on the bench in the inverted position +which makes it easy to locate the point or curve requiring alteration. + + +59. _Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning Point +Alterations._ + +Should most careful investigation of the condition of the watch +indicate that the Motion, Regulator Pins, Poise of Balance and +Centering of the Hairspring as well as the general condition of the +watch are satisfactory and the rating show that there is still +considerable variation between the horizontal positions and the +pendant up position there is still one source through which positive +correction may be obtained. + +This refers to the relative positions of the collet and stud pinning +points which is defined with explanatory cuts and formula in Chapter +VIII. + + +60. _Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of Position Rates._ + +In constructing this chapter and the preceding one it has been +preferred to go into detail for the purpose of defining the possible +corrections and alterations, together with the results to be expected. +Not every watch demanding position correction would require the extent +of investigation and possible alteration that is pointed out and in +most instances the direct cause will be disclosed with very little +investigation. In fact, the experienced adjuster can tell almost +immediately where to look for trouble by merely observing the position +rate as entered on the card. + +It should also be clearly understood by the student that when the +repairing and cleaning of high grade watches is done by one who +understands the details of adjusting, there will be only a very small +proportion of the watches requiring position corrections. As a rule +among experienced adjusters there will be about seventy per cent of +the watches that will have very close rates. If, therefore, one +hundred watches are put in order and tested in positions there should +be seventy that do not require any correction, while about thirty will +require either minor or major alteration. The time required for making +alterations on this thirty per cent of the watches will be offset by a +smaller percentage of unsatisfactory returns and a better reputation +for doing good work. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote C: See Chapter IX, on Regulator Pin Alterations.] + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE THREE POSITION ALTERATIONS AND +LABOR UTILIZED + + +61. _Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the +Variation._ + +In submitting the previous chapters it is assumed that the average +ambitious watchmaker will gain enough knowledge from the various +details to enable him to understand the meaning of the adjustment of +watches, the causes of variations and the principal alterations for +obtaining corrections. + +There are many features covered that will enable him to develop in +practice and to experiment in individual points of importance, without +running up against mathematical deductions that halt and discourage +further interest in the subject. + +To understand the principles constitutes a large percentage of the +qualifications required and to be able to execute the practical +alterations and corrections required in different kinds of variations +completes the general qualifications. It would hardly be sufficient, +however, to conclude the work at this point without giving more +definite examples for comparison, together with some indication as to +the approximate time that may ordinarily be utilized in doing the work +and also showing some instances of a possible choice of several +alterations and why a particular alteration is advisable. For this +reason the following examples will be found to have an important part +in fulfilling the mission of this book. + +In selecting these examples the fineness of results has not been the +principal consideration. The deciding factor was the differences in +variation and alterations, and the fact that they cover the widest +field for general instruction that could be selected from hundreds of +equally good rates among various models of watches which, with three +exceptions, were put in order for railroad service. + +The method of computing the variation from one position to any other +is similar to that used in temperature adjusting as described in +Chapter 3, No. 13. The watch should first be timed closely and then +rated for twenty-four hours in each position. It should be wound +before being started in each position but should be set only on the +first day so that the time is never disturbed. + +The first position to be rated is universally Dial Up, then in +succession Dial Down, Pendant Up, Pendant Right and Pendant Left. The +daily total number of seconds fast or slow should be entered in the +first column of the rate card after each twenty-four hours run. This +column then constitutes the progressive rate from which the actual +variation between the different positions is ascertained. + +The figure in the upper square is first carried out to the adjoining +column at its full value and then the difference between this figure +and that of the second square is entered in the second square of +second column, and so on until the difference between each of the +succeeding squares of first column is registered in the second column. + +If the figure in a square of first column is greater than that in the +preceding square the carried out figure would be entered in second +column as + If the figure is less than the preceding square it would +be carried out as-. + +The total variation in positions is obtained from the figures entered +in second column. If these figures are all entered as either plus or +minus it is necessary to merely subtract the lesser figure from the +greater. If, however, some figures are entered as plus and others as +minus it will be necessary to add the greater figure of each of the +two denominations. + + +62. _Example No. 1, Three Positions._ + +Columbus, No. 358846, Open Face, 17 Jewels. + +Repairs Made. New balance staff, two balance screws changed, +hairspring trued and cleaned. + +After timing the watch closely it was tested in three positions and +found to have a variation of eleven seconds fast pendant up as per +second column, Fig. 16. + +Fig. 16 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _358846_ Make _Columbus_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 1 | + 1 | + 4 | + 4 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | 0 | - 1 | + 7 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +10 | +10 | +14 | + 7 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 11 4 + +Investigation showed the hairspring to be pinned nearly correct, true +level and in circle; balance true; regulator pins closed and motion +satisfactory. A correction could have been made in one of several +ways; either by making a slight alteration of the pinning point at the +collet; correcting a possible slight error in poise or by slightly +spreading the regulator pins. + +As the extent of variation did not indicate any serious error at any +particular point for a watch of this description the possible poise +error and the slight variation in the pinning point were waived and +the regulator pins were spread just enough so that slight equal +vibration of the coil could be seen with a double eyeglass. After this +alteration the mean time was found to be one second per hour slow +which was corrected on the mean time screws and the next test showed +that the variation had been reduced to four second as per fourth +column, Fig. 16. The time consumed in making the alteration aside from +the repairing was less than ten minutes. + + +63. _Example No. 2, Three Positions._ + +Ball No. B060816, Open Face, 17 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Refinished balance pivots and cleaned. The first test in +positions disclosed a variation of thirty-five seconds as per second +column Fig. 17. + +Investigation found the balance true; hairspring true, level and +circle; regulator pins very nearly closed and the motion one and +one-eighth turn. This rate like example No. 1, was also fast in the +pendant up position, but the greater extent of the error indicated +that there must be some serious poise error, and upon investigation +this was found to be the case. A screw on the roller jewel side or at +the bottom when the balance was at rest was found to be heavy. This +was corrected and the next test showed a much improved rate although +there was still a variation of eight seconds fast pendant up as per +fourth column Fig. 17. + +Fig. 17 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _B060816_ Make _Ball_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | + 7 | + 7 | + 7 | + 7 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 2 | 0 | +14 | + 7 | +14 | + 7 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +37 | +35 | +29 | +15 | +24 | +10 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 35 8 3 + +A better rate than this was desired and further examination proved +that the locking of the pallet stones and escape teeth was quite +strong and caused the pendant up motion to have a shorter arc than +would have been entirely desirable. An alteration was made by pushing +the receiving stone further back into the slot and rebanking the +escapement. The third position test showed an improved motion and a +variation of three seconds as per sixth column. The total time +required for making the alterations was about three quarters of an +hour. + + +64. _Example No. 3, Three Positions._ + +Elgin No. 7457488. Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Cleaned; polished pivots and new mainspring fitted. The +first position test showed a variation of nineteen seconds as per +second column, Fig. 18. + +It will be noted that this example differs from Nos. 1 and 2, in that +the rate is slow in the pendant up position. Examination showed all +points satisfactory except that the regulator pins were spread +considerably and allowed too much freedom of vibration for the coil. + +Had this vibration been slight it would have been advisable to examine +the poise. As it was considerable, however, the alteration made was to +close the pins so that only slight vibration was visible with a strong +glass. + +Fig. 18 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _7457488_ Make _Elgin_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | - 9 | - 9 | + 5 | + 5 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | -18 | - 9 | + 8 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | -46 | -28 | + 9 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 19 4 + +This watch was not equipped with mean time screws and it was therefore +necessary to fit a pair of thin timing washers because closing the +pins caused a gaining rate of two seconds per hour in the mean time. +The next position test showed a variation of four seconds as per +fourth column Fig. 18. + +The time consumed in making the alteration and fitting the washers was +about ten minutes. + + +65. _Example No. 4, Three Positions._ + +Hampden No. 1438676, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff and hole jewel fitted and cleaned. + +The first position test showed a variation of twelve seconds slow +pendant up as per second column Fig. 19. + +Fig. 19 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1438676_ Make _Hampden | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 4 | + 2 | + 6 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | - 6 | -10 | + 9 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 2 + +Investigation found all points such as balance true, hairspring true, +level and circle and the regulator pins reasonably satisfactory. The +motion, however, was not as good as it should have been when the +spring was nearly wound up. It was let down to where it would +ordinarily be after about twenty-hours run and found to have barely +one turn pendant up and a trifle over one turn in the flat positions. +This proved that the motion was not satisfactory for a watch that had +just been put in order and all pivots were examined for close end or +side shake; they were found to be satisfactory and the mainspring was +removed for examination and found to be somewhat set and about 0.01 +mm. thinner than those generally used for this grade watch. A new +mainspring was fitted and the motion was improved by about one-fourth +of a turn and the next position test showed a variation of two seconds +as per fourth column Fig. 19. The time consumed in examination and +changing the mainspring was about twenty-five minutes. + +The three position limit of variation allowed by most manufacturers +and railroad inspectors is seven seconds from one position to any +other. Records of thousands of watches on which the work has been +carefully done in putting the watches in order, show that about +seventy per cent of the watches will rate within five seconds in the +three positions without making alterations and that only ten per cent +will be close to the limit of seven seconds, while about twenty per +cent will require alterations such as shown in the four examples +above. (See Chapter XII, No. 60.) + +One or two more examples might be introduced to show variations and +corrections between dial up and dial down; this feature has been +pretty well covered however in Chapter XI, and five position example +No. 9 also shows a variation of the horizontal rates with correction. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE FIVE POSITION ALTERATIONS AND LABOR +UTILIZED + + +66. _What Five Position Adjusting Consists of--Detailed Allowances._ + +Five position adjusting consists of a further refinement of the +condition of the watch. The fact that a very close rate is shown in +the first three positions is not an indication that the watch will be +an excellent timepiece under all conditions. + +In fact there are instances where there may be an excellent three +position rate and a further test in the pendant right and left +positions may disclose some error that would positively prevent close +timing in service. Even under the five position test the limit of +allowance must be reasonably close or unfavorable conditions may exist +and cause irregularity in timing. + +A popular allowance for very fine watches among Swiss and some +American manufacturers is six seconds variation for the five positions +as an extreme limit, and for medium high grades ten seconds extreme +variation is considered a fair allowance. These allowances are +graduated, however, and a six seconds extreme allowance watch would +have an allowance not exceeding three seconds in the horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional in the pendant up position and +one second additional in either the pendant right or pendant left +positions. + +Watches having an extreme allowance of ten seconds may be permitted to +have not more than five seconds variation between the two horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional for the pendant up position +and still three seconds additional in either the pendant right or left +positions. + +It will be noted that there is considerable difference between six or +ten second allowances of this description and straight limits of six +or ten seconds. + +Some manufacturers have greater limits of allowance, sometimes as +great as twenty-five seconds for the five positions, but as a rule the +first three positions are required to rate within seven seconds and +the difference of eighteen seconds is divided between the right and +left positions. + +Under limits of this description a watch that would not be tolerated +under the six or ten seconds class would be considered as good. +Watches having such large allowances, however, and rating close to the +limit are hardly justified in being considered as adjusted to five +positions. The fact that they are so considered however, is the reason +why watchmakers will sometimes fine wide variation in new watches +before they have been damaged or mishandled. The following five +position examples were selected with the same care as were the three +position specimens and will be found to cover a wide field of +variation for comparison with rates that the adjuster may desire to +correct. + + +67. _Example No. 5._ + +Hamilton, No. 248027; Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff and cleaned. The first test in five +positions showed a variation of twenty seconds as per second column +Fig. 20. It will be noted that in four of the positions the rate was +quite close and that the pendant right position had an extremely fast +rate. + +A casual investigation indicated that all points relating to the +spring, regulator pins and balance were reasonably satisfactory but +that there was a slight falling off in motion in the pendant right +position. Further investigation of this feature disclosed a slight +striking sound when the watch was held to the ear in this position. +The dial was removed and the bankings were closed to drop whereupon it +was discovered that the fork was long on the inside, or when the +receiving stone was locked on the escape teeth. This prevented the +roller jewel from passing through the fork freely as it did on the +opposite side. + +The balance pivots had the limit of allowance for side shake which +aided the cause of the roller jewel in striking. + +Fig. 20 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _248027_ Make _Hamilton_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 1 | + 1 | + 3 | + 3 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 2 | + 1 | + 7 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 4 | + 2 | + 8 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | +22 | +18 | +12 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | +20 | - 2 | + 8 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 20 8 + +After correcting the roller jewel shake and readjusting the slide and +guard pin freedom the next test showed a variation of eight seconds in +the five positions as per fourth column Fig. 20. The side shake of the +balance pivots was not detrimental after the real cause of the +variation had been removed and therefore no correction was required in +this respect. + +If the error in the escapement had not existed and if the watch had +shown the same rate with all points appearing to be satisfactory, the +trouble would most likely have been found in the poise of balance with +the upper side heavy in the pendant right position. + +The time consumed in making the correction was about one half hour. + + +68. _Example No. 6._ + +Elgin. B. W. Raymond. No. 4,109,543, Open Face, 15 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New fourth pinion; new end stone; mainspring; refinished +balance pivots and cleaned. Note that this was only a 15-Jewel watch. + +It belonged to a railroad engineer, however, who wanted it placed in +first class condition, as it had not been satisfactory. The first five +position test showed an error of twenty-four seconds as per second +column Fig. 21. + +Examination of the motion, pivots, regulator pins, escapement and +poise proved them to be satisfactory. + +The hairspring however, was found to be pinned at the slow pendant up +point as per illustration in Fig. 22. + +Fig. 21 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _4109543_ Make _Elgin_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 8 | + 8 | + 2 | + 2 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | +16 | + 8 | + 3 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | 0 | -16 | + 2 | - 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P R | + 4 | + 4 | - 1 | - 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P L | - 1 | - 5 | - 6 | - 5 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 24 7 + +The alteration made was to break out one-half of the inner coil at +collet so that it was pinned at the fast point as illustrated in +Fig. 23. + +A pair of balance screws were removed and a heavier pair fitted to +correct the mean time, which would have been about ten minutes fast in +twenty-four hours because of shortening the spring. + +The balance was repoised and the next test in positions showed a +variation of seven seconds as per fourth column Fig. 21. + +The time required for making the alteration was about one half hour. + +[Illustration: Fig. 22] + +[Illustration: Fig. 23] + +This watch was a full plate model with the train developing to the +left from the center and illustrations No. 22 and 23 are given to +show that, while the train follows the Swiss development, the spring +follows the American method and develops to the right from the collet +even though it is located to the left of the watch center. The +principle remains the same as that illustrated by Figs. 9 and 11 and +explained in Chapter VIII. + + +69. _Example No. 7._ + +Waltham. No. 10504112. Open Face, Vanguard model, 23 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Cleaned and new hole jewel. + +First five position test showed a very erratic rate as per second +column Fig. 24. + +Investigation proved that the motion dropped off considerably after a +few hours run and that the mainspring was too weak for this grade of +watch. A proper mainspring was fitted which in turn corrected the +motion, but the next test in positions proved that there was still a +variation of eighteen seconds as per fourth column Fig. 24. + +Fig. 24 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _10504112_ Make _Waltham_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | 0 | 0 | - 2 | - 2 | - 1 | - 1 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | 0 | 0 | - 5 | - 3 | - 1 | 0 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +14 | +14 | -21 | -16 | - 4 | - 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | + 4 | -10 | -19 | + 2 | - 5 | - 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | +16 | +12 | -25 | - 6 | - 3 | + 2 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 24 18 5 + +The balance and spring were removed and considerable poise trouble was +discovered. The trouble was at different points of the balance and no +one location seemed to be heavy at all times. The balance pivots were +carefully gauged with a metric micrometer and found to be out of +round, or to be exact, more oval in form than cylindrical. A new staff +with round pivots was fitted, after which the balance was easily +poised and the next test showed a variation of five seconds as per +sixth column Fig. 24. The total time required for making the +examination and alterations was about one hour. + + +70. _Example No. 8._ + +Vacheron and Constantin. No. 272,854, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff, hole jewel, cap jewel, glass, and +cleaned. + +The first test after making the repairs showed a variation of twelve +seconds as per second column Fig. 25. + +It will be observed that the rates in the horizontal positions are on +the fast side and those in the vertical positions are on the slow +side. In this instance the hairspring developed to the left from the +collet similar to the illustration shown in Fig. 10, page 45. + +Fig. 25 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _272854_ Make _V. & C._ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | - 4 | - 4 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 5 | + 3 | - 8 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | - 1 | - 6 | -14 | - 6 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | - 8 | - 7 | -21 | - 7 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | -17 | - 9 | -25 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 3 + +Investigation found the escapement, regulator pins and pinning point +satisfactory; the motion was one and one-fourth turn in the vertical +positions when fully wound and only a trifle less when partially let +down. In the flat positions, however, the motion was very little +better than in the vertical, which indicated either pivot or end +stone trouble as under normal conditions the flat motion would be +about one-fourth turn greater than that of the vertical. + +Inspection of the end stones proved that they were satisfactory but +the ends of the balance pivots were found to be somewhat flat and not +perfectly polished. + +The ends of the pivots were slightly rounded and highly polished, the +jewels and end stones cleaned and reoiled and the balance replaced, +after which the motion in the flat positions was one and one-half turn +with the mainspring fully wound and only slightly less when partially +let down. + +The motion in the vertical positions was also slightly improved and +the next test in position showed a variation of three seconds as per +fourth column Fig. 25. + +Time required for making the above alteration was about one-half hour. + +In the study of this example it should be clearly understood that when +the ends of balance pivots are flat, burred or not well polished, or +when the end stones are dry or dirty the motion in the horizontal +positions will be shorter than normal and this will always cause the +rate to be faster than it should be. Acceleration of the motion in +such instances by means of refinishing the pivot ends or by cleaning +and reoiling the jewels and end stones will always produce a slower +rate through causing a longer arc of motion. + +This point is covered in Chapter XI, No. 47. + + +71. _Example No. 9._ + +E. Howard. No. 1,116,735. Open Face, 23 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff; hole jewel; mainspring and cleaned. + +The first test in positions showed a variation of eleven seconds. The +rate in all positions was fast with the exception of the dial down +rate, which was slow. See Fig. 26. + +At first glance it might appear that by causing a faster rate of six +or seven seconds in the dial down position the watch would have a very +good rate. This, however, would not be consistent unless the rate was +due to the exception referred to in Chapter XI, No. 50. + +Examination of the motion in the horizontal positions proved that it +was about one fourth turn better in the dial down position than it was +in the dial up position which rate compared very closely with the +vertical positions. It was therefore evident that the dial up rate was +not true and investigation found the oil in the upper jewel had become +thickened by the entrance of dirt which caused the short motion and +fast rate when the balance was running on this end stone. + +Fig. 26 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1116735_ Make _E. Howard_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | - 5 | - 5 | + 2 | + 2 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | - 3 | - 5 | -10 | - 5 | + 4 | + 2 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 1 | + 4 | - 6 | + 4 | + 9 | + 5 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | + 7 | + 6 | 0 | + 6 | +10 | + 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | + 9 | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | +14 | + 4 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 11 11 4 + +After thoroughly cleaning the jewel, end stone and pivot, the motion +in the dial up position was improved and equaled that of the dial down +position. + +The next position test showed the horizontal rates to be equal but the +variation of eleven seconds in the five positions still existed as per +fourth column Fig. 26. The vertical rates were all fast compared to +the horizontal; the regulator pins were found to be slightly open +which prevented a correction at this point. The locking of the +escapement was examined and found to be satisfactory, so the balance +was again removed and tested for poise which was also found +satisfactory. + +The hairspring was pinned at the usual fast point as per illustration +in Fig. 9, Chapter VIII. The most positive alteration to be made under +the circumstances was to break off the spring at the collet and repin +it at about 45° above the horizontal line. This would be slightly +approaching the slow point as explained in detail in Chapter VIII, No. +35. + +The mean rate of the watch would necessarily be faster after +shortening the spring; the mean time screws were found to be turned in +close to the rim and were each turned out about one full turn to +compensate for the gain. The poise was tested and found to remain +correct and the next position test showed a variation of four seconds +as per sixth column Fig. 26. + +The total time required for the alterations was about one hour. + + +72. _Example No. 10._ + +Illinois. No. 1,483,023, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Trued and poised balance, new balance jewel and cleaned. + +This example has been selected for the purpose of illustrating a test +in the sixth or pendant down position and to give a practical +demonstration showing that the rates in the pendant down and pendant +up positions can be reversed, with positive results, through reversing +the collet pinning point of the spring, as covered in "Relative +Pinning Points" Chapter VIII. + +This alteration can be undertaken with assurance of results even +though there may be serious errors of construction in the watch. + +The first five position test proved that the rate pendant up was +extremely fast compared to all other rates as per second column Fig. +27. + +Investigation proved that the hairspring was properly centered and +pinned at the fast pendant point and that the regulator pins were +slightly spread with equal vibration of the coil between them. The +motion was about one and one-fourth turn pendant up and over one and +one-half turn in the horizontal positions when the mainspring was +nearly full wound. The ends of balance pivots were found to be +perfectly flat, which was no doubt due to an effort to produce a +faster rate in the flat positions to cause them to compare more +favorably with the pendant up rate. This, however, was unsuccessful as +indicated by the rate. + +It is quite possible that if the watch ever was closely rated it was +due to counterpoise of the balance as with the present rate the poise, +escapement and regulator pins were satisfactory and did not admit of +further corrections that would be of advantage. + +By examining the P. U. rate in second column Fig. 27, it will be found +to be twelve seconds fast and then by referring to the separate P. D. +(Pendant Down) rate at the bottom, it will be found to be four seconds +slow. Adding these figures gives a total variation of sixteen seconds +between these two positions. + +Fig. 27 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1483023_ Make _Illinois_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | - 3 | - 3 | - 1 | - 1 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | - 8 | - 5 | - 2 | - 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 4 | +12 | - 6 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | 0 | - 4 | - 4 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | - 6 | - 6 | - 7 | - 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P.D. | - 4 +11 | + +--------+-----------------------+ + +Now if these rates were reversed and the P. D. rate was in the place +of the P. U. rate the watch would have shown a very good position +rate in the first five positions and the greater part of the sixteen +seconds variation would have been in the pendant down position where +it would be of the least disadvantage. In order to obtain this +condition the collet pinning point was changed from the fast to the +slow point, or from "E", Fig. 9, to "G", Fig. 11, Chapter VIII. + +A pair of heavier screws were fitted to the balance to compensate for +the difference in time caused by shortening the spring and the next +five position test showed a variation of six seconds. A separate +pendant down test proved that the pendant up and pendant down rates +had been practically reversed as shown in the fourth column. + + +73. _Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates._ + +Extremely fast pendant up rates are not particularly unusual, although +the causes and corrections may be widely different. + +For instance, the poise and motion feature, No. 28, Chapter VII, may +be responsible, or the balance may be in poise and the collet having a +wide slot may cause out of poise and be responsible if the slot is +located at the proper point. A defective escapement or regulator pins +tightly closed may also be responsible. Should these points be found +satisfactory, however, the rate is generally due to one of three +causes. + +1. Excessive side friction of pivots because of being too large in +diameter. + +2. Train wheels and pinions being of incorrect proportion and causing +irregular motion and affecting the vertical positions mostly. + +3. Centrifugal force, which would cause the balance rims to spring +outward in the longer arcs of vibration and thereby produce an +abnormal slow rate in the horizontal positions where the arc of +motion is always longest. This is due to the balance rims being too +heavy in proportion to the arms or center bar. + + * * * * * + +When either of these three conditions are found there will be others +among the same lot of watches, but as a rule they are only found on +older watches made before correct proportions were firmly established. + +Train depthings can often be improved if the workman is equipped with +a rounding up machine and knows how to use it. Otherwise the watch can +be sent to the factory for correction and the only alternative of the +repairer is to cut the spring to the slow point, or counterpoise, with +the intention of eliminating expense and getting as good results as +can be expected for the financial returns that are to be received. + + +74. _How to Locate Defective Gearings._ + +Defective gear or depthing of wheels can be detected in two ways, one +by observing the engaging surfaces of the wheel teeth and another by +testing the engagement of wheel and pinion. + +If the gearing is correct, observation will show that the engaging +surfaces of the wheel teeth are smooth and either dark or possibly +polished from wearing away of the plating. If the gearings are not +correct the engaging surfaces will have cuts or ridges crosswise which +have been produced by the pinion leaves. + +The cause of this cutting is due to either a faulty construction of +the teeth or to the fact that the pitch circle of the wheel is too +small while that of the pinion is too large. + +Testing the gearing in the watch is accomplished by placing the +engaging wheel and pinion in the watch so that they are free to turn +without engaging with any other wheel. A piece of ivory or celluloid +several inches long and about the diameter of a piece of peg wood +should be pointed at one end and this end should be held between the +upper pivot and oil cup of the jewel, with enough pressure of the left +hand to cause friction in turning the pinion. The larger wheel should +then be turned in the direction in which it revolves when running; +this is accomplished with a piece of peg wood held in the right hand. + +If the gearing is perfect there will be smoothness as the wheel and +pinion turn and if it is imperfect there will be a butting effect in +the action. Should there be a slight intermittent stepping action due +to drop of the wheel teeth on the pinion leaves it should not be +mistaken for butting as this is not detrimental and will not cause +cutting of the teeth. + +Watches that have below standard train gearings require considerably +stronger mainsprings than do those which have correct gearing and they +will seldom take a reasonably good motion without a strong spring. + +A safe way to judge gearings if in doubt is by the motion and the +engaging surfaces of the wheel teeth. If the motion is steady and the +teeth are not cut by the pinion leaves they may be considered as +satisfactory. If the motion is steady for a time and then suddenly +drops off there is generally something wrong in the gearing. The wheel +and pinion in error can be determined by noting at what particular +intervals the motion decreases. In nearly all instances this condition +will cause a gaining rate in the vertical positions because of the +fact that the vertical arcs are shorter and comparatively more easily +affected than the horizontal arcs. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +TIMING AND FINAL REGULATION + + +75. _Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers._ + +In the general overhauling of watches, changing staffs, retruing and +repoising of balances it is often necessary to make corrections of +several minutes per day in the mean time. + +For this reason and for the convenience of the future some +manufacturers have provided from two to four mean time screws in the +balances. A complete revolution of these screws either in or out, +generally corrects any variation that may be required and frequently +considerably less is all that is required in bringing the watch to +time. + +It is of course necessary that these screws be turned in opposite +pairs as well as equal distances and that they be fitted with enough +friction to prevent looseness and not too tight to cause bending of +the pivots when they are turned. + +If properly used for the purpose for which they were intended they are +of inestimable value to the repairing fraternity in producing results. + +The manufacturers of some watches do not supply mean time screws with +the balances and the repairer is obliged to depend entirely upon +timing washers for fast corrections, for it is, of course, not to be +expected that repair shops will carry an assortment of all different +kinds of screws such as the factories are able to maintain. + +Occasionally a jeweler or watchmaker will be found who has strenuous +objections to the use of timing washers in any sense, but unless they +are supplied with a large assortment of the various makes and weights +of screws and are willing to use the extra time required for properly +changing the screws it is difficult to see just what legitimate +alternative they can adopt. Investigation of this point disclosed the +fact that the method employed by some watchmakers was to spread the +regulator pins, which would of course make the mean time slower but +would certainly destroy the adjustment to positions and make it +practically impossible to obtain results from the regulator. + +It is admittedly poor workmanship to use ill-fitting washers and poor +taste to use brass washers on high grade gold screw balances, but the +fact should not be overlooked that the manufacturers of many fine +watches use washers to a limited extent, even when an abundance of +balance screws are available and very fine Swiss models are often +supplied with a pair of thin platinum washers which are not easily +detected. The regulator should not be moved from the center of the +index in correcting the mean time but should be used for minor final +regulation only. The length of the hairspring should also not be +disturbed in correcting the mean time of an adjusted watch and while a +slow rate can be corrected by reducing the weight of a pair of balance +screws it is necessary to use either heavier screws or washers for +correcting a fast rate. + + +76. _Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator._ + +Final regulation of watches is necessary after making repairs +regardless as to whether they have been adjusted to positions or not. +Position rating does not necessarily suggest that the timing has been +completed as the object is only to limit the variations from one +position to any other and a test of three or four days should always +be made in one position after the position rating has been completed. +This additional timing has for its purpose the close regulation of the +watch either in the pendant up position or in the position it is +carried. The last column on the rate card is reserved for this +purpose. In this respect the repairer who comes in contact with the +customer may gain considerable advantage by noting in which pocket the +watch is usually carried and then being guided in the final regulation +by this knowledge. The method of doing this regulating consists +generally of moving the regulator which requires certain attention to +be effective when it is moved. + +The regulator should be carefully fitted around the dome and all +attachments in connection should be tightly fitted to the plate or +bridge so that they will remain rigid when regulation takes place. + +The tension around the dome should be even and if a tension spring is +used in connection it should be strong enough to keep the regulator +against the screw constantly without sticking at any point as the +screw is moved forward and backward. + +It should also be closely examined to see that there is no shake. This +can be determined by lightly taking hold of the segment holding the +regulator pins and moving it up and down and side ways before the +tension spring is fitted. This should be examined with a glass and a +correction made if any looseness is noted. + + +77. _Effect of the Middle Temperature Error._ + +In the final regulation of watches it is important that the middle +temperature error receive due consideration. This error is always a +few seconds fast as explained in temperature adjusting Chapter V, No. +21, and is of some consequence in the larger number of complaints +regarding losing rates in the pocket, compared to complaints of +gaining rates. + +The position rating as well as the final regulation is generally done +in normal temperature which produces a rate from two to four seconds +faster than the heat extreme and it is to be expected that the pocket +rate will be slower because the temperature will be higher than +normal. This loss may not be the full amount of the middle error as +it would depend upon the actual temperature encountered for the entire +twenty-four hours and the watch may only be subjected to the pocket +temperature for a part of this period. This works in exactly the same +way in a lower temperature, as the variation is a loss in either +direction from the middle or normal temperature and in case that the +watch should be subjected to a freezing temperature at night the +result will be a loss during that period. + +As an example we will assume the regulation of a watch in which the +temperature rate at the extremes of 40° and 90° Fahr. is perfect, +while at the temperature of 70° it will time four seconds fast. + +Now if this watch is regulated to no variation in the normal +temperature it will be plainly seen that there will be a loss of four +seconds per day if the watch is placed in service at either of the +temperature extremes. If it had been regulated to run four seconds +fast in the middle or normal temperature it would time more nearly +correct in the pocket. + +It is safe to assume that the watch will lose its proportional rate +with a lesser change in temperature and for this reason it is of +advantage to finally regulate all watches from two to four seconds +fast in the rack rather than to time them just correct. + + +78. _Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates._ + +There are additional reasons for the suggestion of timing watches a +few seconds fast rather than just correct. Among them may be mentioned +the fact that many watches are carried in the left vest pocket, and +that in this instance they very often assume the pendant right +position which is generally a trifle slow compared to pendant up in +most watches of close adjustment. Magnetism to any extent whatever +always causes a slow rate and this will have its effect whenever the +balance, hairspring, regulator, regulator spring or pallet are +slightly effected or when the mainspring, large winding wheels or +case springs are considerably charged and experiments have shown that +in no instance has a fast rate been produced from this cause. + +The gradual weakening or loss of elastic force of the hairspring is +also a factor to be considered. + +There are some influences which cause a gaining rate that to some +extent may offset these losses, although in the absence of necessity +for cleaning or other repairs these influences are slight in +comparison to the natural and possible causes for a slow rate. + + + + +PART III + +SPECIAL NOTES + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +SPECIAL NOTES + + +79. _Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples)._ + +In performance of the various alterations and corrections that have +been touched upon in the chapters devoted to position adjusting there +are some points that deserve special note. This refers to positive +execution of the correction which the watchmaker sets out to make. + +As an example we may analyze the simple feature of polishing a pivot +and cleaning and reoiling a jewel to improve the motion in one of the +horizontal positions. Ordinarily this would seem to be a very simple +proceeding requiring no additional remarks. + +It is, however, quite possible to go through all of the operations of +removing, cleaning and reoiling the jewel and polishing the pivot and +then find that no improvement has been made in the motion. + +Invariably the workman of moderate experience will say that he has +just cleaned and reoiled the jewel and polished the pivot and that it +must be all right. + +Investigation, however, will sometimes show that the pivot has again +been marred or that a particle of dirt has found its way into the +jewel hole during replacement either through dust in the oil or +through clinging to the end of the pivot when the balance was laying +on the bench. + +This experience is one that comes occasionally to the best and most +careful adjusters and if it is found that results have not been +obtained the first time it will be necessary to go over the operations +a second time. + +It is possible to almost entirely eliminate this duplication of work +if proper care is exercised in examining the pivot and jewel with a +good glass before replacing and in using oil from a closed receptacle +in which it has not been possible for dust to collect. + +The point raised in this instance is that the improvement desired is +not assured because of merely going through the operations of doing +the work. + +It is necessary to actually remove the cause and then keep it removed. +The proof is found in the improved motion and it would hardly be worth +while to retest in positions until this improvement was obtained. + +Proper curvature of the over coil within the range of the regulator +pins is another feature that may be corrected and the correction +unconsciously destroyed in replacing the balance or in centering the +spring. + +A slight kink in the coil close to the regulator pins may cause the +spring to be forced out of center when the regulator is moved, or it +may cause the coil to lay against one pin and cease vibrating between +the pins. This would cause a gain of some seconds per day when the +regulator had actually been moved to cause a slower rate. + +These two examples are introduced to convey the idea that it is +necessary to actually produce the corrections or alterations in any +instance and that close timing and close position rates depend more +upon this practical execution and understanding as displayed by the +watch repairer than they do upon a high degree of technical knowledge. + +Personal instruction of watchmakers in adjusting has demonstrated in +most instances that the refinements are not considered seriously +enough at first, but that consistent practice and reference to the +rules soon make the proper impression, after which results are +attained in less time than was at first required for faulty +execution. + + +80. _Truing the Balance._ + +The balance should invariably be true in the round and flat and always +in poise before it is placed in the watch. + +It is at times pardonable to pass a balance that is not perfectly true +in the round, especially when the watch has been repaired on several +occasions and it is noted that the rims have a tendency to become set +slightly inward or outward after having been perfectly trued. This +shows a natural tendency of the metals to find a permanent position +which may be slightly away from the true concentric form. A balance of +this description may be poised as it is and often will produce better +timing results than would be gained by perfect truing and subsequent +regulation during readjustment of the metals. + +It is advisable to always have the flat true as by doing so any +slightly bent pivots will be detected through wavering of the balance +and the flat is not very frequently affected by setting of the metals. + +Balances should generally be trued and poised in normal or slightly +above normal temperature. If they are trued in a low temperature they +will be out of true and possibly out of poise in the temperature to +which they are mostly subjected. Compensation balances are not +presumed to be true in the round under variations of temperature and +therefore inspection for true is necessary in somewhere near the same +temperature in which they are trued. + + +81. _Poising the Balance._ + +In poising balances it is necessary to consider the mean rate of the +watch and several details in connection therewith. + +If the rate is known to be fast, weight should be added to the light +side, and if it is known to be slow weight may be removed from the +heavy side. + +If the rims of the balance have been trued outward it is a safe rule +to remove weight from the heavy side in poising and if they have been +bent inward to get the balance true, weight should be added to the +light side in poising. + +A balance that is in perfect poise can be brought to a perfect stop on +a fine jeweled poising tool at any point of its circumference. For +ordinary work it is generally considered as satisfactory if it can be +brought to a perfect stop at each of the four quarters. When the heavy +point seems to be first at one place and then just opposite it is +proof that either a pivot is bent or oval in form instead of round. + +In some instances balances will be found to swing slightly and stop at +several different places. This is usually an indication that there are +several flat places on one or both pivots and if the watch is a fine +one the staff will require changing or the pivots may be rounded up on +a Jacot Lathe. A fine edge jeweled poising tool is best for fine work +as defects in pivots and variations in poise can be more easily +discovered than with calipers. + + +82. _Truing Hairsprings._ + +Original truing of the hairspring is made necessary by the fact of +attaching the collet to its center. When springs are turned out by the +manufacturer they are perfectly true, that is, the coils are level and +perfectly spiral in form and the deviation from this spiral form, made +necessary in attaching the collet, is what demands certain forming of +the inner terminal so that it will blend with the other coils of the +spring which have not been disturbed. + +In attaching the collet it is first necessary to have the spring level +before the pin is forced tightly in place. This can be fairly well +determined by sighting across the flat of the spring and focusing upon +the inner coil to see that it is level for at least one half of its +length from the point of exit. After this operation has been +completed and the pin has been set up tight, with the surplus ends cut +off flush with the collet it will be necessary to slightly pull the +coil up or down, providing it is not perfectly level. The next +operation will be that of truing the round and all work and bending of +the spring for this operation is concentrated within the first quarter +of the coil from its point of attachment and it is seldom ever +necessary to make any bends beyond the first eighth of the coil from +the attached point. + +Figure 28 may be of some value in gaining an idea as to just how this +inner coil should appear when it has been trued. + +The broken lines illustrate a condition after colleting and before +truing. The heavy lines illustrate two positions into either of which +the coil may be formed in getting the spring true. + +[Illustration: Fig. 28] + +The outer black line shows the most adaptable form for most instances. +The inner black line shows the most practical form for use in +instances where there is unusual space between the collet and the +inner coil. It will be noted that these two forms blend into the true +spiral form of the spring at about one-eighth of the coil distant from +the collet. These forms may be used as a basis for truing the spring +in any instance in which it has been bent or mishandled around the +collet after its original truing. + +Experts always true springs after they have been staked to the balance +and a light weight calipers tapered on one end to a smaller diameter +than the collet is used for spinning the balance, making observations, +and corrections. + +Considerable progress can be made by some watchmakers in removing the +spring from the balance and placing it on a colleting tool or tapered +broach and then truing the flat and round as good as possible, after +which it should be perfected in the calipers. When the balance is +spinning in the calipers and the spring is true in the flat there will +be no jumping or quivering of the coils as observation is made across +the top of the inner four or five coils. + +When it is perfectly true in the round and the balance is spinning in +one direction the coils will seem to be whirling into a hole of which +the collet is the center. When spinning the balance in the opposite +direction the effect of the coils will be similar to the waves +produced by dropping a small stone in still water and they will appear +to be whirling away from the center. This effect in both instances is +caused by the eye following the spiral form of the coils as the spring +revolves. + + +83. _Treating a Rusty Hairspring._ + +When rust begins its attack upon any point of a hairspring there will +be a constant loss in time until its advance is stopped. + +Should considerable headway have been made by the rust before the +watchmaker's attention is enlisted for an examination it may be +necessary to change the spring entirely before good results can again +be obtained. + +There are many instances, however, in which proper care at the right +time will produce as good results as will a new spring. + +The first appearance of rust is generally indicated by one or more +spots of a light brown shade and in such instances it has hardly +attacked the metal to any serious extent, although usually enough to +cause a slightly losing rate. At this stage the spots may be scraped +with a piece of peg wood after which the spring can be placed in a +small copper pan containing lard oil to a depth of about one-fourth +inch. + +This pan should then be held over an alcohol lamp until the oil +becomes hot enough to smoke, after which the spring should be removed, +immersed in benzine for about thirty seconds and then dried in +sawdust. This treatment will stop further rust and the only indication +of previous rust may be a removal of the color from the spot which had +been affected. + +In case that the rust has reached a stage far enough advanced to +seriously pit the metal, good results cannot be expected from the +spring even though further rusting may be prevented. + + +84. _Stopping by Escapement Locking When Hands are Set Backward, or +When Watch Receives a Jar._ + +This is sometimes a very annoying trouble and while it should not +occur on high grade watches at all, it does show up just often enough +to cause a certain degree of unpleasantness for the owner of the watch +as well as for the watchmaker. + +There are two principal causes for the difficulty. One is due to the +back of discharging pallet stone having a very sharp corner combined +with a slightly rough edge on the back of the escape wheel teeth and +when the two factors meet with some slight force, such as is caused by +reversal of the train wheels the sharp corner of the stone wedges +itself into the rough surface of the tooth and holds until pulled away +by some small instrument. This can be remedied by removing the sharp +edge of the stone on a diamond charged polishing lap and a very slight +correction is sufficient. + +The second principal cause is due to sharp edges on the roller jewel. +First quality roller jewels always have these edges rounded, as +otherwise they may wedge into the horn of the fork and often will not +release through ordinary shaking of the watch. + +A short guard pin can also cause the trouble by allowing the roller +jewel to catch on the end of the fork horn before it enters, or the +guard pin may catch on the edge of the crescent on the safety roller, +but the two causes mentioned above will allow "hanging up" even when +the guard pin, roller jewel and all other shakes are correct. + +When the above conditions are correct and all setting connections are +properly fitted, the hands may be set either forward or backward +without in any way disturbing the time. There are instances, however, +where the watch will stop when the hands are reversed and at times the +second hand will actually turn backward although the watch will +immediately begin to run as soon as the backward pressure on the hands +is discontinued. + +This is caused by the cannon pinion being so tightly fitted that +turning it backward will require more force than that which is +supplied by the mainspring. A condition of this description is more +pronounced when the mainspring is nearly run down and sometimes it +will happen at such times and will not occur when the spring is fully +wound. + + +85. _Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches._ + +It would be difficult to suggest a best method for general cleaning of +watches. Different watchmakers have different methods and good results +are attained in more than one way. Whatever the method, however, there +are certain definite requirements that are fundamental. + +Among these are the thorough cleansing of pivots, jewels, pinion +leaves, wheel teeth, mainspring and winding parts. + +It is not sufficient to depend upon routine and simply dip the parts +in various solutions, brush and reassemble the watch. There are many +instances in which the oil becomes gummy and sticks to the jewels and +pivots to such an extent that peg wood and pith must be applied with +considerable energy to obtain perfectly clean surfaces and holes. + +The essential feature is that of actually removing every particle of +dirt from the contact surface. + +It is not essential that the plate and bridges should have a high +lustre, as this does not facilitate the running. If it is desired and +if facilities are available, the plates and bridges may be dipped in +benzine and dried in sawdust, then washed and brushed in a solution of +hot water, borax and castile soap, then rinsed in fresh water, dipped +in alcohol and dried in sawdust. This produces a lustre to the plate +bridges and wheels. When it is not convenient to use hot water the +parts may be dipped and brushed in benzine for at least one minute and +dried in sawdust, then dipped in alcohol and again dried in sawdust. +In either event thorough pegging and pithing of the jewels, pivot +holes and pivots is necessary as well as brushing and examining all +wheel teeth and pinion leaves. The steel parts should be examined and +gummy oil eliminated. Fresh oil should be applied in proper quantities +in the proper places. This requires some study, as either too much or +too little oil is detrimental. + +When a watch is cleaned annually by the same workman it is not +necessary that the mainspring be removed and reoiled each time, for a +mainspring properly oiled will last for two or three years before +requiring cleaning and reoiling. + +It is well known that mainsprings frequently break shortly after being +removed and cleaned and this annoyance may be avoided in many +instances by intelligent use of this rule. + +Balances should not be dipped in acid solutions, as the liquid gathers +under the screws and will often cause them to discolor in a short +time. It is better to polish them with fine rouge and cotton thread +arranged on a wire bow as the lustre will be more lasting. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting +Watches, by Walter J. Kleinlein + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + +***** This file should be named 38340-8.txt or 38340-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/3/4/38340/ + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/38340-8.zip b/38340-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf32dea --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-8.zip diff --git a/38340-h.zip b/38340-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec5f34e --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h.zip diff --git a/38340-h/38340-h.htm b/38340-h/38340-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e75c3d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/38340-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5127 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<!-- $Id: header.txt 236 2009-12-07 18:57:00Z vlsimpson $ --> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches, by Walter J. Kleinlein. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + +p { + margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; +} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} /* page numbers */ + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.u {text-decoration: underline;} + +.caption {font-weight: bold;} + +/* Images */ +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + +.figleft { + float: left; + clear: left; + margin-left: 0; + margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-right: 1em; + padding: 0; + text-align: center; +} + +.figright { + float: right; + clear: right; + margin-left: 1em; + margin-bottom: + 1em; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-right: 0; + padding: 0; + text-align: center; +} + +/* Footnotes */ +.footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + +.footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + +.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: + none; +} + +/* Poetry */ +.poem { + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align: left; +} + +.poem br {display: none;} + +.poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + +.poem span.i0 { + display: block; + margin-left: 0em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.poem span.i2 { + display: block; + margin-left: 2em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.poem span.i4 { + display: block; + margin-left: 4em; + padding-left: 3em; + text-indent: -3em; +} + +.floatright1 {float: right; clear: both; padding-right: 4em;} +.floatright2 {float: right; clear: right; padding-right: 2em;} +.floatleft {float: left; padding-top: 1em;} + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches, by +Walter J. Kleinlein + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches + +Author: Walter J. Kleinlein + +Release Date: December 19, 2011 [EBook #38340] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + + + + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + + + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[Pg i]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>RULES AND PRACTICE</h2> +<h3>FOR</h3> +<h1>Adjusting Watches</h1> + +<h3>BY</h3> + +<h2>WALTER J. KLEINLEIN</h2> + +<center><b>AUTHOR OF "THE WATCH ADJUSTER AND HIS WORK"</b></center> + +<hr style="width: 10%;" /> + +<center>Copyright, 1920, by Walter J. Kleinlein</center> + +<hr style="width: 5%;" /> + +<center><i>All rights reserved</i></center> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[Pg iii]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="PREFACE" id="PREFACE"></a>PREFACE</h2> + + +<p>In the early days of horology the apprentice +was taught the art of making a complete watch. +Production was slow, very few duplicate watches +were constructed, and it was necessary that extra +material be made individually by hand in the +same way that the original part was produced. As +time passed the value of the repairer was indicated +by his ability to make new parts and to replace them +so that the watch would again be in running condition. +This was the prevailing situation for many +years and the repairer was judged according to his +skill in making and finishing the various parts.</p> + +<p>A similar method of judging ability is still in +force among some employers, although the development +of the industry into machine and specialized +work has made many changes in regard to the most +important duties of the repairer.</p> + +<p>It is no longer necessary for him to know how to +make a complete watch and only on occasional instances +is it necessary for him to make a part. +Genuine material for modern watches is supplied +by the manufacturer at less expense than it can be +produced by the individual and in this particular +branch of the work the repairer's requirements +have been very considerably curtailed.</p> + +<p>A more exacting and a higher standard of timekeeping +has developed, however, and in this field +the requirements of the watchmaker have increased +to the extent that it is no longer sufficient to merely +restore a good watch to running condition. It +must keep time. This development has grown +gradually and surely and the past twenty-five years +may be assumed as the period of greatest advance.</p> + +<p>It has been made possible by scientific and practical +refinements which permit the adjustment of +watches so that they will keep time within closely +defined allowances under varying conditions.</p> + +<p>The larger problem of the successful repairer of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span> +today, therefore, is that of understanding the +principles governing close time and of knowing how +and where to look for the causes of variation, so +that the higher standard of timekeeping may be +restored in case of damage since the original adjustment.</p> + +<p>It is naturally essential to know when material +is correct, how to make it fit in its proper place, and +how to make and finish some of the individual +parts. It is also commendable to be skilful in all +classes of lathe work, as this at times gains prestige +for the workman through restoring old model +watches to running condition.</p> + +<p>It is, however, a disadvantage to develop one's +ability in making parts for watches of a bygone age +and neglecting the training that happens to be most +essential and of daily advantage in repairing +modern watches so that they will keep time as consistently +after repairs have been made as they did +when new.</p> + +<p>The object of this book is to present the essential +points of watch adjusting in an elementary and +non-technical way that will interest the average +watchmaker and to enable him to have a convenient +source of information, covering the necessary refinements +that are fundamental in repairing, regulating +and adjusting the better class of watches.</p> + +<p>The author trusts that the experienced successful +watchmaker will read the book with interest and +also with profit and that the novice will be enabled +to foresee that there is something more to the art of +watchmaking and repairing than that of merely assembling +a watch and making it "tick."</p> + +<p>It so happens that the author has had many +years of experience in both factories and repair +shops and that a considerable part of his duties +have been devoted to instruction.</p> + +<p>He has for a long time felt the need of a book that +would, above all else, be practical in its description +of the rules that an adjuster follows and which would +prove its value in actual experience by being per<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</a></span>sonal +as far as permissible in the same sense that +detailed shop instruction would be.</p> + +<p>Since writing the article entitled "The Watch +Adjuster and His Work" several years ago numerous +inquiries have been received, for this class of information +and the present book is an effort to meet +this demand in a manner that can be followed +without highly technical or theoretical education.</p> + +<p>To promote advancement and interest in everyday +practical results is the foremost consideration, +and to this end definite means are presented for +personal development and for obtaining better results +from high grade watches than can possibly be +obtained without a fair knowledge of the final details +which go so far toward assuring close time.</p> + +<div class="floatright1">WALTER J. KLEINLEIN,</div> +<div class="floatleft">July 21, 1920</div> +<div class="floatright2">Waltham, Mass.</div> + +<p> <br /><br /><br /></p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CONTENTS" id="CONTENTS"></a>CONTENTS</h2> + + +PART I.—THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE<br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER I<br /> +<a href='#Page_3'>The Compensation Balance, Controlling Factor</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec1.">1.</a> General Method of Obtaining Results</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec2.">2.</a> How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">or Fast in Heat Compared to Cold.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec3.">3.</a> Composition of and Distortions of Compensation</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Balances.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec4.">4.</a> Tests and Experiments.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec5.">5.</a> Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec6.">6.</a> Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER II<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_9'>Equipment for Temperature Adjusting</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec7.">7.</a> Various Methods Available.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec8.">8.</a> Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec9.">9.</a> The Lower Temperature Box.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER III<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_13'>Difference in Observatory and Commercial Systems</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec10.">10.</a> Observatory System.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec11.">11.</a> Commercial System.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec12.">12.</a> Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec13.">13.</a> Value of the Normal Period Rate.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec14.">14.</a> Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">for Gain or Loss in Time.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec15.">15.</a> Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER IV<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_19'>Some Practical Methods of Correction</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec16.">16.</a> Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">the Balance.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec17.">17.</a> Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Normal Size and Weight</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec18.">18.</a> Over or Under Compensation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec19.">19.</a> Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec20.">20.</a> Example Illustrating that Temperature Variation</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">is Not Always Due to the Balance and Spring.</span><br /> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii">[Pg viii]</a></span><br /> +CHAPTER V<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_26'>The Middle Temperature Error</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec21.">21.</a> Why this Error Exists and What it Consists of.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec22.">22.</a> How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome this Error.</span><br /> +<br /> +<br /> +PART II.—THE ADJUSTMENTS TO ISOCHRONISM AND POSITIONS<br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER VI<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_31'>General Consideration</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec23.">23.</a> Optional Allowances for Variation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec24.">24.</a> Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec25.">25.</a> Train and Escapement Freedom.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER VII<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_39'>Theory and Practice</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec26.">26.</a> Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Hairspring.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec27.">27.</a> How Theory Works Out in Practice and what</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Isochronism Consists of.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec28.">28.</a> Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER VIII<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_43'>Relative Pinning Points of the Hairspring</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec29.">29.</a> Original Springing of Watches.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec30.">30.</a> How Pinning Point Alterations are Made.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec31.">31.</a> Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Watches.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec32.">32.</a> How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec33.">33.</a> Results in Vertical Position Rates due to Changing</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">the Pinning Point.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec34.">34.</a> The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec35.">35.</a> Principle of Pinning Point Alterations.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec36.">36.</a> Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models.</span><br /> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[Pg ix]</a></span><br /> +CHAPTER IX<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_51'>Manipulation of the Regulator Pins</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec37.">37.</a> Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec38.">38.</a> Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Between the Pins.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec39.">39.</a> Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">the Regulator Pins.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER X<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_53'>Factory and Repair Shop Adjusting</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec40.">40.</a> Routine Varies According to Circumstances.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec41.">41.</a> Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop of</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">One or Two Workmen.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec42.">42.</a> Advantages of Understanding Adjusting Even</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Though Watches are Not Tested in Positions or</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Isochronism.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec43.">43.</a> Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XI<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_56'>Preliminary Notes and Practice for Beginners</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec44.">44.</a> Practical Suggestions.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec45.">45.</a> The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec46.">46.</a> Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec47.">47.</a> Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec48.">48.</a> Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec49.">49.</a> Examining the Hairspring.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec50.">50.</a> Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec51.">51.</a> Detailed Practice.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec52.">52.</a> Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec53.">53.</a> Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XII<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_64'>Preliminary Notes and Practice on Vertical Corrections</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec54.">54.</a> Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec55.">55.</a> Poor Motion, Cause and Effect.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec56.">56.</a> Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec57.">57.</a> Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec58.">58.</a> Concentricity of the Hairspring.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec59.">59.</a> Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Point Alterations.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec60.">60.</a> Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of</span><br /> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[Pg x]</a></span><span style="margin-left: 3em;">Position Rates</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XIII<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_70'>Concrete Examples Showing Definite Three Position Alterations and Labor Utilized</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec61.">61.</a> Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the Variation.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec62.">62.</a> Example No. 1, Three Positions, Columbus.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec63.">63.</a> Example No. 2, Three Positions, Ball.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec64.">64.</a> Example No. 3, Three Positions, Elgin.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec65.">65.</a> Example No. 4, Three Positions, Hampden.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XIV<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_77'>Concrete Examples Showing Definite Five Position Alterations and Labor Utilized</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec66.">66.</a> What Five Position Adjusting Consists of—Detailed Allowances.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec67.">67.</a> Example No. 5, Five Positions, Hamilton.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec68.">68.</a> Example No. 6, Five Positions, Elgin, B. W. R.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec69.">69.</a> Example No. 7, Five Positions, Waltham, Vang.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec70.">70.</a> Example No. 8, Five Positions, Vacheron and Constantin.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec71.">71.</a> Example No. 9, Five Positions, E. Howard</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec72.">72.</a> Example No. 10, Five Positions, Illinois, B. S.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec73.">73.</a> Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec74.">74.</a> How to Locate Defective Gearings.</span><br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XV<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_91'>Timing and Final Regulation</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec75.">75.</a> Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec76.">76.</a> Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec77.">77.</a> Effect of the Middle Temperature Error.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec78.">78.</a> Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates.</span><br /> +<br /> +<br /> +PART III.—SPECIAL NOTES<br /> +<br /> +CHAPTER XVI<br /> +<br /> + <a href='#Page_99'>Special Notes</a><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec79.">79.</a> Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples)</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec80.">80.</a> Truing the Balance.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec81.">81.</a> Poising the Balance.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec82.">82.</a> Truing Hairsprings.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec83.">83.</a> Treating a Rusty Hairspring.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec84.">84.</a> Stopping by Escapement Locking when Hands are</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">set Backward or When Watch Receives a Jar.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;"><a href="#sec85.">85.</a> Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches.</span><br /> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + + +<h2>RULES AND PRACTICE</h2> +<h4>FOR</h4> +<h1>Adjusting Watches</h1> + + +<h3>PART I<br /> +<br /> +THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE</h3> + +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>THE COMPENSATION BALANCE +CONTROLLING FACTOR</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec1." id="sec1.">1. </a><i>General Method of Obtaining Results.</i></h5> + +<p>Only since the introduction of the compensation +balance which received its most substantial +early experiments as recently as the +year 1859, has it been possible to control the variation +in pocket timepieces which is caused by changes +in temperature. Previous to this introduction it +was not uncommon for the best watches to vary +as much as two or three minutes with changes of +forty or fifty degrees Fahr. Through experiment +and improvement in the quality and application +of balance materials, such advancement has been +made, that this variation has been reduced to seconds +and temperature adjusting is now quite universal +in the production of medium and high grade +watches.</p> + +<p>In the large factories, girls and young men of +very little previous experience are frequently +taught to make the alterations and to do the testing, +while men of experience in watchmaking +handle only the more intricate cases such as "stoppers" +and radical rates that may require investigation +of the inner workings of the movement. +The simplicity of the adjustment naturally becomes +more apparent with experience and the general +alterations consist merely of transferring the balance +screws in opposite pairs, either forward or +backward one or more holes, according to the extent +of the correction desired.</p> + +<p>As these alterations are quite positive the adjustment +can be undertaken with considerable +certainty of obtaining results in every instance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p> + +<p>The repairer will not find as much daily necessity +for understanding temperature adjusting as he will +for being thorough in Position adjusting. The subject +is covered, however, for the benefit of those who +may desire practical experience in this branch of +adjusting and also for those who desire a general +knowledge of the details.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec2." id="sec2.">2.</a><i>How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow or Fast in Heat Compared to Cold.</i></h5> + +<p>If a watch rates slow in heat compared to cold +it is necessary to shift screws in opposite pairs out +toward the cut or free end of the rims; because +when the metals expand the hairspring becomes +weaker and produces a loss in time. During this +period the free ends of the balance rims, carrying +the transferred weight are forced toward the center +and produce a gaining rate which compensates for +the loss caused by the weakened spring.</p> + +<p>As the metals contract in cold the free ends of +the balance are drawn outward from their true +form and the concentrated weight of these screws +near the ends reduces the fast rate in cold and in +principle works both ways in its action on the rate.</p> + +<p>Should the circumstances be just opposite, or +the rate be fast in heat compared to the rate in cold, +it will be necessary to move the screws away from +the free end of the rims. In doing this, less weight +will be carried toward the center as the free ends +curl inward and as a result, the rate in heat will +become slower and the slow rate in cold will be reduced.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec3." id="sec3.">3.</a><i>Composition of and Distortions of Compensation Balances.</i></h5> + +<p>Compensation balances are generally made of +one layer of brass and one of steel, with the brass +on the outside consisting of about three-fifths of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span> +the total thickness and the steel on the inside consisting +of about two-fifths. These metals are +firmly soldered together and the distortions in +changes of temperature are as follows. In heat both +metals expand, which infers that the rims become +longer as well as wider and thicker. Brass expands +more than steel and because of its attachment to +the steel it cannot continue to lengthen in its true +circular form, due to the fact that the steel does +not become enough longer to maintain the true +curve, and the result is that the free ends of the +rims are forced inward.</p> + +<p>In cold the brass, contracting more than the +steel, pulls the rim outward at the free end which is +just in reverse of the operations in heat.</p> + +<p>The end of the rim which is attached to the balance +arm always moves in the opposite direction +from the free end, or outward from the center of +balance, when the free end moves in, and inward +when the free end moves out. In comparison, however, +this movement is negligible as will be noted +later in the results obtained in moving screws in +that direction.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec4." id="sec4.">4.</a><i>Tests and Experiments.</i></h5> + +<p>It is generally understood that the purpose of the +compensation balance is to act in opposition to +the error caused principally by the hairspring. The +steel hairspring having no compensating qualities, +either grows stronger or weaker with changes in +temperature. When it becomes longer, wider and +thicker in heat, experiments seem to prove that +the increased width and thickness are not in proportion +to the increased length, for if they were, +the spring would actually be stronger; while timing +proves that it is weaker because of the loss in time. +In cold the shortening factor seems to dominate +because of a gain in time.</p> + +<p>In a series of tests with steel springs on uncut +steel brass balances, the temperature error in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> +extremes of 40 degrees and 90 degrees Fahrenheit +was found to be from eighty to one hundred and +sixty seconds. With the same balances cut the +error was reduced from seventy to one hundred +and thirty seconds in each instance, without any +correction of the balance screws.</p> + +<p>A former test with palladium springs on the same +balances, previous to having been cut, showed a +considerably reduced error, indicating that the +steel springs were mainly responsible for the temperature +variations.</p> + +<p>The above tests were in actual practice and results +are given as noted, regardless of scientific or +established formula relating to the cubic measurement +of metals in changes of temperature.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec5." id="sec5.">5.</a><i>Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations.</i></h5> + +<p>As a rule compensation balances generally have +five or six pairs of balance screws in addition to two +pairs of mean time screws. High grade Swiss and +some American models do not have mean time +screws and are therefore generally supplied with +seven or eight pairs of balance screws. The mean +time screws are never disturbed in making alterations +for temperature, such alterations being confined +to the balance screws only and the mean time +screws are reserved for timing.</p> + +<p>For appearance sake the balance screws should +be evenly distributed, although it is necessary at +times to closely assemble them to obtain temperature +results and they should not be disturbed in +making ordinary repairs, as the adjustment may be +destroyed in so doing. With the larger balances the +moving of one pair of screws for a distance of one +hole, generally makes a difference of four or five +seconds in the temperature rate. In the case of +smaller balances this alteration does not make as +much difference, although the weight and location +of the screws has considerable influence on the result.</p> + +<p>A pair of screws shifted from the second holes from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> +the cuts, to the holes adjoining the cuts, will generally +make a correction four or five times as great +as would be obtained by shifting a pair of screws +from the third to the fourth holes from the arms. +The same proportional difference is obtained in +moving a pair of screws from the center of the rims +out to the cut, compared to moving a pair of screws +from the holes nearest the arms out to the center of +the rims. This principle also obtains in moving +the screws in the opposite direction and is due to +the fact that while the metals composing the balance +follow the common laws of expansion and +contraction, the balance actually becomes smaller +in area during expansion and larger during contraction. +This condition is made possible entirely +through joining the metals in proper proportion +and then cutting the rims.</p> + +<p>In the factories where large quantities of a particular +model having a standard style balance are +handled, tests are usually made to determine as +to just what degree of correction will be obtained +by shifting various pairs of screws certain distances. +This information is then used in making alterations +with considerable certainty. The expert temperature +adjuster becomes fully informed as to the +peculiarities of various models and is capable of +getting larger percentages of watches within the +limits of allowance, after making alterations, than +he could obtain otherwise.</p> + +<p>Through understanding the various models individually, +he is also enabled to furnish information +that will cause intelligent arrangement of the balance +screws, for each model, when they are originally +fitted. The production thereby showing a +greater yield of good watches that do not require +alterations after the first test.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec6." id="sec6.">6.</a><i>Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment.</i></h5> + +<p>When the original temperature adjustment has +been carefully executed it is quite permanent and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span> +unless the screws have been mutilated or changed +in location there will seldom be an occasion for +readjusting. The balance may be retrued and repoised +many times and the spring may be retrued, +altered, or even changed, without seriously interfering +with the temperature rating, as long as the +screws are not shifted. In changing the spring, +however, it is necessary that the same number of +coils and the same size of spring be used, as otherwise +readjusting would be required.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPERATURE +ADJUSTING</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec7." id="sec7.">7.</a><i>Various Methods Available.</i></h5> + +<p>Two boxes are necessary for temperature testing. +One fitted up to maintain a temperature +of about 90° Fahr. and the other maintaining +a temperature of about 40° Fahr.</p> + +<p>The method employed in obtaining the high temperature +varies in different styles of boxes, while +the low temperature is always obtained through +the use of ice. When only an occasional test is +made, any simple method whereby approximately +close results in the two extremes can be obtained, +may be used. For instance, the watch may be enclosed +in a tin box and placed in sand that is kept +at a temperature of 90 or 95 degrees F. A thermometer +placed in the sand indicates when the +temperature rises too high or falls too low. The +ordinary household refrigerator may be used for +testing the cold. Tests by this method are advisable +only for short periods and for an approximate +idea as to the extent of error.</p> + +<p>If frequent tests are made and accurate results +are expected, it is quite important that the special +boxes be used. Such boxes are often constructed +with a capacity of four or five hundred watches, or +they may be constructed to receive only half a +dozen watches. Some are made with a zinc or +copper tank in which warm water is placed and +which surrounds the chamber in which the watches +are deposited. The water is kept at the desired +temperature by means of a small adjustable flame. +In other instances electrical arrangements are used, +in which case no water is required.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span></p> + +<p>In either instance a thermostat controls the +source of heat.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec8." id="sec8.">8.</a><i>Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions.</i></h5> + +<p>A very practical arrangement for testing a few +watches at a time in the higher temperature is +shown in Fig. 1. This is electrically equipped +and will maintain an even temperature at all times.</p> + +<p>The outside of the box is constructed of about +one-half inch lumber and the inside is lined with +asbestos. It is about fourteen inches high by ten +inches wide and eight inches deep.</p> + +<p>"A". Is an incandescent lamp set in a porcelain +base.</p> + +<p>"B". Is a porcelain plug through which the +wires "C" enter the box.</p> + +<p>"D" and "E". Are metal uprights with a thumbscrew +on the top, under each of which a wire terminates.</p> + +<p>"F". Is the compensating bar, one end of which +is fastened solidly to "D" with rivets.</p> + +<p>The opposite end is free and rests against the end +of a thumbscrew which passes through "E."</p> + +<p>The thumbscrew is to be adjusted so that the +free end of "F" will rest against it in a temperature +of 70° Fahr. or any lower temperature. As the +temperature rises the free end of the bar moves +away from the end of thumbscrew, breaking the +circuit and extinguishing the light, which cuts off +the source of heat. As the temperature decreases +the bar again comes into contact and creates the +circuit.</p> + +<p>This bar can be made of various compensating +metals, one combination of which is a strip of zinc +about six inches long by three eighths of an inch +wide and one thirty-second of an inch thick. On the +outside of this soft solder a strip of tin six inches +or a trifle less in length, by one fourth inch wide +and one thirty-second of an inch thick. Both<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> +metals should be bent to a curved form before they +are soldered together as shown in the cut.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 313px;"> +<img src="images/i023.png" width="313" height="400" alt="Fig. 1" title="Fig. 1" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 1</span> +</div> + +<p>It is generally preferable to have the bar taper to +a slightly narrower width at its free end, and near +this free end it is necessary +to solder a small +strip of platinum at the +point where the end of +thumbscrew comes in +contact.</p> + +<p>"G", "H", "I" and +"J" are ventilating holes +one inch in diameter and +covered by a swinging +slide so that the holes +can be opened or closed +as desired for regulating +the ventilation. +"K". Is a shelf of brass screen +located about five inches +from the top and on which the watches and a thermometer +are placed in testing.</p> + +<p>"L". Is a handle for the purpose of convenience +in carrying the box. The front is to be enclosed by +a door made in two parts, the upper section of +which is glass which will admit of observing the +thermometer. Proper adjustment of the thumbscrew +and bar makes the box ready for use.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec9." id="sec9.">9.</a><i>The Lower Temperature Box.</i></h5> + +<p>Fig. 2 shows a box specially made for testing +watches in cold. It is constructed of wood and +stands about twenty-four inches high without the +legs and about eighteen inches square.</p> + +<p>A double partition packed with about one inch +of sawdust will be most reliable.</p> + +<p>The upper half of the box should contain a watertight +zinc tank for holding cracked ice and about +an inch of space should be left above for circulation +of the air.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p> + +<p>The chamber for receiving the watches may be +about six inches square and supported by a crosspiece +and attachment to the front. It should be +covered above to prevent particles of ice from falling +on the watches which are to be placed on the +floor or on a shelf of the chamber, but the sides +may be left partly open to improve the circulation +of cold air. The door may also be filled with sawdust +but does not require glass as the moisture +would prevent observation of the thermometer +which should be inside +for checking up +the temperature +when the door is +opened.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 349px;"> +<img src="images/i024.png" width="349" height="400" alt="Fig. 2" title="Fig. 2" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 2</span> +</div> + +<p>The bottom of the +tank should be slightly +higher on one side +than on the other, +with a one-half inch +drain pipe fitted to +the low side. The +inlet end of the pipe +should be covered +with a fine screen to +prevent dirt from +accumulating in the pipe and the outlet may be +either at the extreme bottom or on one of the +sides as shown in the cut. The upper part or +cover of box should be made so that it can be easily +removed for filling and cleaning the tank.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>DIFFERENCE IN OBSERVATORY AND +COMMERCIAL SYSTEMS</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec10." id="sec10.">10.</a><i>Observatory System.</i></h5> + +<p>In the foreign observatories where watches +are generally tested for competition prize, or +certificate purposes, they are subjected to +either three or five day tests in each temperature, +preceded by one intermediate day at normal +temperature which is not considered in making the +deductions. The purpose of this is to allow the +metals to assume the natural condition before +being placed in, or changed from, one degree of +temperature to another. After the three or five +day test, according to the grade of the watch, the +average of the daily rates in each temperature is +considered in making the comparison and arriving +at the total variation. The total error is then considered +in the summary, as a fraction of a second +variation per each degree of temperature. As an +example we will consider that the total error between +the two averages is five seconds and that the +difference in the two extremes of temperature was +fifty degrees F. The variation would be given as +one-tenth of a second per each degree of temperature.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec11." id="sec11.">11.</a><i>Commercial System.</i></h5> + +<p>In manufacturing watches for commercial purposes, +both foreign and domestic, the tests are +generally made for twenty-four hours in each temperature +and the difference in the rates is considered +as the total error.</p> + +<p>Sometimes preliminary tests of four or six hours +in each temperature are made to obtain an estimate<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> +as to the extent of error, then alterations are made, +after which the watch is subjected to the regular +twenty-four hour test. There is nothing to be +gained by this in regular work, although for a special +rush job a day's time may be saved. Watches are +always expected to be in first-class condition and +such features as close fitting pivots or dirty oil will +prevent any dependable timing. It is also advisable +to time them closely before the test is made, as +too great mean time variation may confuse in estimating +the error, especially if the time is not taken +in each temperature exactly at the end of twenty-four +hours.</p> + +<p>The testing should preferably be done in the dial +up position to eliminate poise errors as much as +possible. The first test is made in heat at 90° +Fahr., then in normal temperature of sixty-five or +seventy degrees and finally in the lower extreme of +40° Fahr.</p> + +<p>When the watch is removed from the cold box it +will be covered with moisture which will immediately +begin to condense. The time should therefore +be quickly noted and the watch replaced in the +higher temperature box for four or five hours to +become thoroughly dry and prevent against rusting +of the steel parts.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec12." id="sec12.">12.</a><i>Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>A card ruled similar to the cut shown in Fig. 3, +may be used for entering the rates and the watch +need only be set at the beginning of each test, as +deductions can be made from the entries on the +card and the variation accurately ascertained without +resetting or disturbing the time.</p> + +<p>Details as to the methods to be followed would be +about as follows: Wind and set the watch to correct +time, place it in the heat box and at the end of +twenty-four hours enter the variation from correct +time in the upper left hand square of the card.</p> + +<p>Assuming that the time is four seconds fast, enter<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> +this as shown in the first column Fig. 3, then wind +but do not set the watch and place it in normal +temperature and at the end of twenty-four hours +enter the total variation noted in the second square +of first column. Assuming the time to be just correct, +place a zero as shown. Next wind the watch +and place it in the cold box, and assuming that the +variation is sixteen seconds fast at the end of twenty-four +hours, enter this in the lower square of the +first column as shown in Fig. 3. The watch is next +placed in the heat box to dry and the variation +shown in the three sets of figures in first column are +carried out as follows.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 3"><caption><b>Fig. 3</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="5"> No. .................... Make...................</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> HEAT</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> NORMAL</td><td align="left">0</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">+ 6</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> COLD</td><td align="left">+16</td><td align="left">+16</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 2</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"></td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">12</td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">0</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>In the upper square we find +4, enter this in +upper square of second column at its full value as +shown.</p> + +<p>Next we find a "0" in the second square of first +column, and as this is a loss of four seconds from +the entry shown in the square above we carry it +out in second column as -4. In the lower square of +first column we find +16 and as this is a gain of +sixteen seconds over the square above, it is necessary +to carry this to second column at its full value +as per illustration.</p> + +<p>To determine the extent of variation between +heat and cold, simply ignore the normal rate of -4 +in the second column and subtract +4, from +16, +which indicates an error of twelve seconds slow in +heat compared to cold.</p> + +<p>Or it may be determined as twelve seconds fast +in cold compared to heat. For convenience sake +it is advisable to form the habit of using one of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> +temperatures as a unit for comparison and wherever +large quantities of watches are adjusted, it is +generally the custom to use the higher temperature +for this purpose and the rate is stated as either slow +or fast in heat. In this instance the rate is slow in +heat and it will be necessary to shift one or more +pairs of screws toward the cut as explained in +Chapter 1, No. 2.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec13." id="sec13.">13.</a><i>Value of the Normal Period Rate.</i></h5> + +<p>The rate in the normal period cannot be considered +as of any value, its importance consisting +only of allowing the metals to return to the natural +form and tension before being placed in the cold box.</p> + +<p>This is quite important in obtaining a true estimate +of the error, because of the fact that in transferring +the watch immediately from the extreme of +heat to the extreme of cold, there will be a period of +time during which the metals are readjusting +themselves to the natural form, and the variation +in time during this period will not be accounted for, +as the real comparative rate will not begin to develop +until after the natural form and tension is reached.</p> + +<p>If the limit of time devoted to testing is no object +and if a very fine rate is desired the observatory +method is of course to be preferred. However, by +allowing an intermediate day at normal temperature +we have the assurance that the hairspring is +at the same tension and that the balance has the +same form concentrically when the test begins in +cold that it had when the test began in heat.</p> + +<p>As the object is to find the variation between the +two temperature extremes the estimate will be +quite close enough and allows the saving of many +days' time. Some authorities advocate in addition +to the five days required for observatory testing in +each temperature that the watch be subjected to +an intermediate day in each, instead of in normal, +before considering the daily rate. This seems very +logical, as the time noted each day would be taken<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> +at the actual extremes in both instances and any +outside factor in the timing would be eliminated.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec14." id="sec14.">14.</a><i>Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards for Gain or Loss in Time.</i></h5> + +<p>In making entries on the rate cards and in figuring +the variations the sign + is used as denoting +that the watch is running faster than the standard +time and the sign - is used as denoting that it is +running slower than standard time.</p> + +<p>This is stated for the reason that in some instances, +generally foreign, the signs are used in reverse, +or as indicating that the watch requires a +correction of + or - the number of seconds indicated, +to attain the correct standard of time. +When the signs are identical in a column it is necessary +to subtract the lesser from the greater and the +result is the variation. There are often instances +however, when one rate will be + and the other - as +shown in second column of Fig. 4, and in these +instances it is necessary to add the figures to obtain +the variation.</p> + +<p>The first column is always the progressive rate +and the second column shows the variation carried +out. This example shows +8 in heat, the normal +rate in the second square is not considered, for +the reason previously explained and the rate in +cold is shown as -1. The total variation between +the extremes is therefore arrived at by adding ++8 and -1, which in this instance gives us a total +of nine seconds fast in heat.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 4"><caption><b>Fig. 4</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="4"> No. .................... Make...................</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> HEAT</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 8</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> NORMAL</td><td align="left">+20</td><td align="left">+12</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> COLD</td><td align="left">+19</td><td align="left">- 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"></td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">12</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span></p> + + +<h5><a name="sec15." id="sec15.">15.</a><i>Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature.</i></h5> + +<p>The extremes of 40° and 90° Fahr. have been +used for the reason that they are best suited for +general purposes. When it is known, however, +that a watch is to be used in a warm climate the +extremes may be raised five or ten degrees to advantage. +If the watch is to be used in a cold climate, +the extremes may be lowered this amount. The +metals, however, can only stand the strain of expansion +and contraction to a certain degree, and still +maintain the positive qualities. Therefore it is +quite important that the extremes be not raised or +lowered very much beyond these figures.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>SOME PRACTICAL METHODS OF +CORRECTION</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec16." id="sec16.">16.</a><i>Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of the Balance.</i></h5> + +<p>In altering the location of screws during +the temperature adjustment it is often possible +to either mar or improve the appearance of +the balance. As a demonstration of this point +the correction made in regard to Fig. 3 is analyzed. +The balance had twelve screw holes in each rim, +with the space between the first and second holes +from the arms equal to double the space between +any other two holes. There were seven screws in +each rim, equally divided as per cut Fig. 5, which +indicates screws in the first, second, fourth, sixth, +eighth, tenth and twelfth holes.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 367px;"> +<img src="images/i031.png" width="367" height="345" alt="Fig. 5" title="Fig. 5" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 5</span> +</div> + +<p>A correction of the +rate could have been +obtained by shifting +the screws in either the +sixth or eighth holes +forward three holes. +Or those in either the +first or second holes +could have been shifted +to the ninth holes and +those in the fourth holes +might have been shifted +to the ninth holes with +good results possible in either instance.</p> + +<p>Moving one pair of screws under any circumstances +however would have caused a massing of +three pairs of screws at some point and a vacant +space of three holes at another point which would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> +not present a very good appearance for high grade +work. Therefore the alteration made was to move +the screws from the second to the third holes, +fourth to seventh, and +from the eighth to the +ninth holes as indicated +by the positions shown +in Fig. 6.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 369px;"> +<img src="images/i032.png" width="369" height="342" alt="Fig. 6" title="Fig. 6" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 6</span> +</div> + +<p>Examination of the +fourth column Fig. 3, +which gives the result +of the second test will +show that the desired +correction was obtained +with a better appearance +of the balance +than would have been possible if only one pair of +screws had been shifted.</p> + +<p>In following the logic of the alterations made we +must consider that the screws moved from the +second to third holes made no correction, due to +the fact that the balance rims remain almost stationary +at this point, the alteration being for appearance +only, those moved from the fourth to the +seventh holes were estimated for a correction of +seven or eight seconds only, for the reason that the +alteration did not carry them beyond the center of +the rims where the greatest curvature takes place. +The screws moved from the eighth to the ninth +holes however were estimated for the full correction +of four or five seconds which is to be expected +through shifting a normal pair of screws from one +hole to another beyond the center of the rim on +sixteen or eighteen size balances. In moving a +pair of screws one hole between the first quarter +and the center of the rims, a correction of from two +to three seconds can be expected and from the +center to the cut the difference for one hole is +generally four or five seconds, while an alteration +between the arm and the first quarter seldom yields +any correction.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span></p> + +<p>The matter of appearance should at all times be +respected, for it is just as easy to obtain results in +most instances and also have a well-appearing +balance. There is also less disturbance of the poise +usually in moving several pairs of screws a short +distance than there is in moving one pair a longer +distance.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec17." id="sec17.">17.</a><i>Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below Normal Size and Weight.</i></h5> + +<p>Normal corrections can only be realized when +normal screws are shifted. Some balances have +one half, or quarter head screws which of course +will not produce a correction as great as will be +obtained by shifting regular screws. Sometimes +platinum, or other extra heavy screws will be +found in balances and these will produce a correction +almost double that of ordinary screws of the same +size.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec18." id="sec18.">18.</a><i>Over or Under Compensation.</i></h5> + +<p>On some occasions it will be found impossible to +maintain a pleasing arrangement of the screws because +the temperature variation will make it necessary +to mass all of the screws either in the holes +nearest the cuts or in those nearest the arms.</p> + +<p>This is due to either over or under compensation +of the balance. Over compensation is caused by +too large a proportion of brass in the rims, which +causes them to curve inward too far at the free +ends in heat and outward too far in cold. When +the extent of this error is so great that the rate is +still fast in heat, with the screws massed in the +holes nearest the arm, a correction can be obtained +by fitting heavier screws in the holes adjacent to +the arms and lighter screws in the holes nearer the +free ends.</p> + +<p>When the rate in heat is slow with the screws +massed at the free ends of rims the balance is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> +under compensated, which is caused by too large a +proportion of steel compared to the proportion of +brass in the rims. This prevents the free ends of +rims from curving inward far enough to carry the +weight the proper distance toward the center of +balance. A correction for this can be obtained by +fitting heavier screws in the holes adjacent to the +cuts and lighter screws in the holes toward the +center of rims.</p> + +<p>In changing the weight of screws as stated above +it should be remembered that the gross weight of +all screws must remain the same or the timing will +be seriously affected. It is also important that the +poise be tested whenever a considerable degree of +alteration is made, as this will assist in obtaining +an accurate rate.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec19." id="sec19.">19.</a><i>Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation.</i></h5> + +<p>Balances having the extreme degree of over or +under compensation will seldom be found in high +grade watches. In any instance, however, it is possible +to obtain a better distribution of the screws +by fitting either a larger or a smaller hairspring. +For instance, we will assume a case of under compensation +in which the screws have all been massed at +the holes nearest the cuts. If the spring has +seventeen coils, a correction of from five to ten seconds +can be obtained by selecting and fitting a +spring of the same make that will have eighteen coils, +and the correction obtained will permit of shifting +one or two pairs of screws back toward the arms.</p> + +<p>In case of over compensation a spring of the +same make, one coil smaller, will permit of shifting +one or two pairs of screws toward the free ends of +rims.</p> + +<p>In a series of tests it was demonstrated that by +duplicating or changing springs of the same make +and size, on balances that had previously been +compensated, there was very slight difference in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> +the temperature variation of the watch. Also by +changing pinning points or breaking out one-fourth +to one-half of the coil around collet and adding +weight to the balances to correct the mean time the +difference in the variation was almost negligible.</p> + +<p>On the other hand it was found that by replacing +the springs with others of larger or smaller size, +variations of from three to ten seconds were noted +in all instances.</p> + +<p>In selecting and fitting a spring that will be one +coil larger or smaller, it should be noted that the +inner coil of the original spring and that of the new +spring are approximately the same distance from +the collet. For if there was considerable space between +the collet and inner coil of the original spring, +and the new spring was colleted quite close, there +might be the addition of an extra coil in the inside +only. This was found to produce only a very +slight correction, compared to that obtained by +the addition of a complete outer coil. These tests +indicate that the proportion of strength of the +spring in the temperatures varies with any appreciable +change in length while slight changes make +practically no difference.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec20." id="sec20.">20.</a><i>Example Demonstrating that Temperature Variation is not Always Due to the Balance and Spring.</i></h5> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 7"><caption><b>Fig. 7</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8"> No. .................... Make...................</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> HEAT</td><td align="left">-10</td><td align="left">-10</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> NORMAL</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 5</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> COLD</td><td align="left">+12</td><td align="left">+18</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"></td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">28</td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">8</td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">2</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>The following example is submitted to show that +temperature variation is not always due to the +balance and spring, and that the general condition +of the watch may be responsible. The second +column of Fig. 7, indicates an error of twenty-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span>eight +seconds slow in heat with all screws assembled +in the holes nearest the free ends of the rims.</p> + +<p>Examination proved that the motion of the balance +in cold was reduced to about one-fourth of a +turn. In heat the arc of motion was at least one +full turn. This difference in motion was sufficient +to prove that there was some binding in the train.</p> + +<p>A very close fitting of the escape pivots was +found and this undoubtedly caused binding of the +pivots in heat due to slight expansion. Expansion +of the stone would also tend to close the hole, and +while the degree of temperature would hardly have +any bearing on this point it is sufficient to show in +what direction the tendency would be. The +fourth wheel end shake was very close and probably +caused binding of the wheel in cold, due to +greater contraction of the bridge than of the fourth +pinion. Furthermore the mainspring was only +0.02 of a millimeter narrower than the space in +the barrel box. This no doubt also caused binding +through greater contraction of the barrel than occurred +in the mainspring.</p> + +<p>The above defects were remedied and the rate +was found to be eight seconds plus in heat as per +third and fourth columns Fig. 7.</p> + +<p>This made it necessary to shift several of the +screws away from the cut, in almost the same position +in which they were before the alteration which +caused the close assembling of the screws was made. +The final rate was two seconds slow in heat as +shown in fifth and sixth columns.</p> + +<p>The variation of thirty-six seconds between the +second and fourth columns was entirely erroneous, +and was due to condition of the watch irrespective +of the balance and hairspring. Should the variation +with the screws assembled have been by +chance within the limits of allowance the watch +would undoubtedly have been a very unreliable +timepiece. The errors in the watch would no doubt +have been corrected during the position adjustment +later, but the large error in temperature<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> +which would have been introduced by wrongly +moving the screws, would have prevented reliable +timing until possibly at some future period a test in +temperature would have been made and the screws +replaced in the proper positions.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>THE MIDDLE TEMPERATURE ERROR</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec21." id="sec21.">21.</a><i>Why This Error Exists and What it Consists Of.</i></h5> + +<p>In adjusting watches to temperature it is +not always possible nor expected to obtain a +perfect rate between the two extremes, manufacturers +generally allowing from two to ten seconds +variation according to the grade.</p> + +<p>Even when the rate obtained is perfect it will +only be so at the two extremes and there will always +be a few seconds variation in the middle or +normal temperature.</p> + +<p>This variation will always be a gain of from two +to four seconds in the higher grades of steel brass +balances and usually more in cheaper balances.</p> + +<p>As there is no possible correction for this irregularity +in ordinary balances it has long been known +as the middle temperature error and for many years +was one of the most perplexing problems that the +manufacturer of specially fine timepieces had to +deal with.</p> + +<p>Various devices were originated from time to +time for the purpose of counteracting the error but +they were always too infinitely complicated to be +of commercial or scientific value, and none of them +were ever adopted as a solution of the problem.</p> + +<p>In chapter I, No. 3, will be found a description +of the distortions of compensation balances in the +extremes of temperature and the cause of the middle +error is due entirely to the fact that these distortions +are not exactly equal in both directions. +The free ends of the rims are drawn outward from +the concentric form to a slightly greater proportional +degree as the temperature decreases from normal +and they are not forced inward at an even proportional +degree with increase of temperature.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span></p> + + +<h5><a name="sec22." id="sec22.">22.</a><i>How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome the Middle Temperature Error.</i></h5> + +<p>Through extensive experiment in the foreign +laboratories balances containing nickel steel have +been found to almost eliminate the middle error, +which is reduced to one second or less, making it +possible to obtain perfect adjustment in various +temperatures.</p> + +<p>All highest prize watches passing through the +Geneva Observatory are equipped with these balances +and they have been adopted for commercial +use to a large extent by the manufacturers of the +finer grades of watches.</p> + +<p>From the same source success has recently been +attained in applying this metal to hairsprings and +using them in connection with uncut balances, +but owing to the necessary high cost of production, +their general use may be delayed for some years to +come. Their general use however would revolutionize +the present-day methods of adjusting to +temperature as there would be practically no expansion +or contraction to deal with.</p> + +<p>Nickel steel balances will always be found to +have the cuts about one eighth of the circle distant +from the arms instead of close to the arms. This +is made necessary by the fact that the coefficient +of nickel steel is about ten times less than that of +ordinary steel, and if the cuts were made close to +the arms the brass in expansion would force the +free end of the rims to curve inward to such an +extent that it would cause an abnormally fast rate +in heat.</p> + +<p>By making the cuts more central the length of +the segments are reduced, thereby causing less +curvature of the extreme ends and more nearly +equalizing the extent of curvature both ways from +the concentric form. This equalization is what +causes the reduction in the middle error and its +absence in ordinary balances is what causes the +larger error.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span></p> + +<p>Non-magnetic or palladium balances are also +credited with a smaller middle temperature error +than the ordinary steel brass balance, but owing to +the unstable nature of the metal they have not +proved to be as reliable in other respects and are +not used to any large extent.</p> + +<p>The middle temperature error is of course a small +factor in the larger sense of obtaining time from +commercial watches but its influence is apparent in +timing and it will therefore be considered further in +the section devoted to Final Regulation, Chapter +XV, No. 77.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span></p> + + + + + +<h3>PART II<br /> +<br /> +THE ADJUSTMENT TO ISOCHRONISM +AND POSITIONS</h3> +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>GENERAL CONSIDERATION</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec23." id="sec23.">23.</a><i>Optional Allowances for Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>The phrase "Adjusted to Isochronism and +Positions" does not always indicate the same +high quality or the expense assumed in obtaining +close rating in different kinds of watches.</p> + +<p>One particular model may be stamped "Adjusted +to Five Positions" and this may indicate that the +manufacturer of this model has tested all watches +of this grade for twenty-four hours in each of five +positions and that the extreme extent of variation +from one position to any other, among any of these +watches, did not exceed six seconds. Another +model may be stamped in exactly the same way and +it may indicate that all watches of that particular +grade have been tested in exactly the same way and +that the extreme extent of variation from one +position to any other, did not exceed twenty-five +seconds.</p> + +<p>The statement regarding the number of positions +to which the watch has been adjusted is just as +legitimate in the latter instance as it is in the former, +for the watches are really tested in five positions +and required to perform within specified allowances.</p> + +<p>The important difference is in the established +limits of requirement, one demanding an extreme of +only six seconds variation and the other allowing +twenty-five seconds. Both watches may have the +same number of jewels and there is no way to discern +the actual variation except through a test in +positions.</p> + +<p>Technically it would be just as legitimate to +stamp and advertise watches as above and have an +allowance of fifty or more seconds, providing that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> +they were actually tested and not allowed to pass +with a variation greater than this limit.</p> + +<p>Close limits of allowance require adjusters of +greater skill and material of a finer degree of accuracy, +however, than do greater allowances, but +the dealer and consumer are generally not informed +in regard to this particular point. Some watchmakers +also do not understand this feature clearly +and the limits of variation to which watches have +been adjusted are seldom considered.</p> + +<p>Should the difference in allowances and identical +advertising be interpreted as an injustice to the +manufacturer who maintains close limits for his +various grades of watches, it must be remembered +that they speak for themselves after passing over +the counter and into the hands of satisfied customers. +His reputation after a period of years will be more +firmly established than will that of his less particular +competitor in the high grade field. A similar +situation prevails in the repair shop, and the fact +that many of the leading dealers and railroad watch +inspectors require at least a three position adjustment +in the repairing of high grade watches, is +convincing evidence that position rating demonstrates +its importance in actual service when applied +to repair work, as surely as it does when +applied to new watches.</p> + +<p>In placing limits of allowance for variation in +various grades it is not intended that all watches +of a particular grade will have the extreme variation. +It is possible that an individual watch in the +twenty-five seconds allowance class may have an +even better rate than another watch that is in the +six seconds class. It is also possible for a watch in +either class to have a perfect rate, although these +would be rather exceptional instances.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec24." id="sec24.">24.</a><i>Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting.</i></h5> + +<p>The adjustments to isochronism and positions +are not permanent to the same extent that the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> +temperature adjustment is, and they can be damaged +or destroyed entirely by the average workman +in making ordinary repairs unless he is familiar +with the common principles governing their production +and maintenance.</p> + +<p>Experienced workmen who are familiar with +these principles avoid unconsciously doing any +damage and make practical repairs in a manner +that will maintain or improve the original adjustment +and time-keeping qualities of the watch.</p> + +<p>To know and to make use of these principles does +not make a "putterer" of the workman, in fact +the consequence is just the reverse, because the +training acquired tends to eliminate guess work +and enables him to determine more readily as to +just what the trouble may be, how to correct it, +and as to just what degree of perfection is required +in a particular instance.</p> + +<p>Certain practical requirements are necessary in +reaching this standard of workmanship and it +would not be profitable to attempt to do adjusting +unless one has first had a reasonable degree of +training as a watchmaker or repairer, especially in +such branches of the work as truing and poising +balances; truing, leveling and centering hairsprings; +matching the escapement; finishing pivots, and +properly cleaning and assembling watches.</p> + +<p>These mechanical requirements and experiences +alone are not sufficient, however, and a certain +amount of study must be consolidated with them in +order to become proficient. This study should not +deal so much with the problems of manufacture of +the watch, or its various parts, as it does with the +problems pertaining to the finished results that are +to be obtained through refinement and intelligent +assembly of these parts. The workman's willingness +to indulge in such study is a very large asset +among the requirements, and it only remains for +him to obtain the proper class of instruction and +then to conscientiously follow correct methods in +his practice and to make personal experiments,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> +conforming to the instruction, so that his confidence +will become more enduring.</p> + +<p>It is further required that he be capable of realizing +the difference between genuine and imitation +materials, especially such essentials as balance +staffs, hole jewels, mainsprings and roller jewels, +which are the most frequently changed and most +frequently substituted parts of watches. Imitation +materials may be less expensive as a matter of +first cost but staffs may have pivots and shoulders +out of line, or out of true; hole jewels may be +rough, out of round or extremely thick; mainsprings +soft, or of improper proportion, and roller +jewels may have sharp edges which cause rubbing +in the fork and "hanging up" when the second hand +is reversed. It is most satisfactory to depend upon +the materials supplied by the manufacturer of the +watch, as imitation goods are seldom any better.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec25." id="sec25.">25.</a><i>Train and Escapement Freedom.</i></h5> + +<p>Beyond a general insight of high class watch-work +this book is not intended to meet the requirements +of beginners. It is designed principally for +watchmakers of some experience, and cannot presume +to cover details that would be essential for +those in early apprenticeship. It is thought essential, +however, to consider some matters in a general +way and among these are the subjects of side shakes +and end shakes, and the escapement, as far as +they pertain to general inspection of the watch +without consideration of details that refer to correction +of irregularities which are presumed to have +been acquired in earlier training.</p> + +<p>Thoroughness of mechanical ability always demands +a system of inspection and of making corrections +and it is quite necessary to follow some +method that will reveal any point or points that +may not be up to standard.</p> + +<p>As a rule it is best to begin at either end of the +watch, and if it is to be taken down the best place<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> +to begin is usually with the balance and examine +each part as it is removed until the barrel has been +reached. If it is not to be taken down, just as good +results will be obtained by beginning the examination +at the barrel and finishing with the balance. +Sometimes watchmakers of considerable ability +will demand as a basic consideration that pivots be +fitted with very little side shake and that end shakes +also be quite close if close time is to be expected.</p> + +<p>These presumed to be, wide side shakes and long +end shakes, very often have nothing whatever to +do with the absence of a close position rate and +frequently are absolutely necessary for good performance +of the watch and proper space for oil.</p> + +<p>The importance of reasonable limits is of course +granted, but it is very detrimental to have pivots +too close fitting and more stoppage and irregular +time keeping can be traced to lack of freedom than +can be traced to excessive shakes.</p> + +<p>If the repairer is not familiar with accepted +standards of side and end shakes, he can improve +his judgment by examining watches of the higher +grades and comparing the results with those found +in cheaper makes of watches.</p> + +<p>Such examination will invariably disclose the +fact that fine watches receive very careful consideration +in this respect. The center, third and fourth +wheels generally having from 0.03 mm. to 0.05 mm. +freedom for end shake and 0.015 mm. to 0.02 mm. +for side shake. The escape wheel, pallet and +balance will be found to run quite uniform at from +0.02 mm. to 0.03 mm. freedom for end shake and +from 0.0075 mm. to 0.0125 mm. for side shake. +The smaller and thinner watches generally favoring +the lesser figures and the larger and thicker watches +favoring the higher.</p> + +<p>This uniformity of freedom will be found absent +in cheaper watches; for instance, a center wheel may +have 0.02 mm. end shake and 0.01 mm. side shake +which would be very close fitting for large pivots. +The fourth wheel may have as much as 0.08 mm.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> +end shake and 0.03 mm. side shake which would +be too great. The pallet may have 0.05 mm. end +shake and the balance 0.01 mm. and in this instance +the short end shake of the balance would be +more detrimental in most instances than would the +longer end shake of the pallet. The variation will +even be found to exceed these figures and when +they are found in connection with thick, straight +hole jewels they often interfere with a close position +rate and with regularity of time in service. The interference +in timekeeping is considerably aggravated +in cases where one pivot has excessive side shake +and the opposite pivot is close fitting, as this tends +to cause almost certain binding of the close fitting +pivot as soon as the power of the mainspring is +applied.</p> + +<p>The end shake and side shake allowance for the +barrel depends considerably upon its style of +construction. Safety barrels constructed so that +the arbor revolves with the main wheel, when the +watch is running, may have about the same end +shake and side shake as applied to the center, third +and fourth wheels, and if the pivots of the arbor are +quite large they may have a trifle more side shake.</p> + +<p>As a rule larger pivots will stand more side shake +than smaller pivots; this, however, does not apply +in the case of large bearings, such as safety main +wheels that revolve around a stationary arbor, or +going barrels where the entire barrel revolves around +the stationary arbor when the watch is running.</p> + +<p>In such instances the main wheel or barrel should +have from 0.03 mm. to 0.05 mm. end shake on the +arbor and should be just free for side shake.</p> + +<p>The arbor which turns only when the watch is +wound requires merely freedom for end shake between +the plates, as well as for side shake where +the pivots pass through the plates.</p> + +<p>With reference to the escapement, good watchmakers +often have different methods of examining +the various points and of making corrections and it +is not of so much importance as to just how correct<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> +conditions are obtained, as it is that they actually be +obtained.</p> + +<p>Whatever the method may be it is certain that +each escape wheel tooth must have positive locking +on each pallet stone and that there must be positive +space for drop between the back of each stone and +the pointed end of each escape wheel tooth. There +must also be sufficient draw when each tooth and +stone are locked to hold the fork against the bankings.</p> + +<p>When the lock, drop and draw are correct it is +next necessary to see that the fork length and guard +pin freedom are correct.</p> + +<p>There is only one positive method of determining +as to when the fork length is correct, and this is +through closing the bankings to drop.</p> + +<p>This can be done either before or after placing +the balance in the watch and merely requires +turning the banking screws so that the excentric +pins will close in on the fork until the fork arrives +at the pins, at the same instant that the tooth +drops on the pallet stone. This eliminates any +slide of the stone on the tooth beyond the actual +locking and in this condition it is required that the +roller jewel pass through the fork slot and out of +the fork horn entirely on both sides with perfect +freedom.</p> + +<p>Should it touch on both sides of the fork, then +the fork is either too long or the roller jewel is too +far forward, and if it touches on one side only it +may require simply equalization of the freedom. +The guard pin length also must be obtained with +the bankings closed to drop and should be just free +from the safety roller on both sides.</p> + +<p>When the inspection proves that these conditions +have been properly provided for, it is necessary to +slightly open the bankings so that there will be just +a trifle of slide of each stone, on each tooth, after +the locking takes place.</p> + +<p>Extremely wide side shakes of the escape, pallet +or balance pivots will sometimes cause striking of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> +the roller jewel when conditions are otherwise correct, +and these side shakes should not be very +much beyond the extreme limits mentioned in this +number. The fact of this feature, however, should +not be construed as a recommendation that these +pivots be closely fitted, for reasonable freedom is +to be desired because it is positively necessary.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>THEORY AND PRACTICE</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec26." id="sec26.">26.</a><i>Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal Hairspring.</i></h5> + +<p>Theory teaches us in brief, that the position +adjustment is made necessary principally because +of frictional errors. It would therefore +seem that if the watch was mechanically correct +there would be little or no requirement for position +alterations.</p> + +<p>We are also advised that an isochronal hairspring +is one which will cause the long and short +arcs of the balance to be made in equal time and +that to attain this, the center of gravity of the spring +must coincide with the center of gravity of the balance +and that a certain pinning point is necessary +in producing this result.</p> + +<p>Now if we have a watch of correct mechanical +construction and fitted with an isochronal spring +it would seem that a close rating timepiece would +be assured.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec27." id="sec27.">27.</a><i>How Theory Works Out in Practice and What Isochronism Consists of.</i></h5> + +<p>Practical adjusting, however, proves that such is +not the case, for even when the construction and +alterations produce watches as nearly correct as +scientific methods can determine, there is often +considerable variation in the position rates. A +twenty-four hour test in any position may prove +that the long and short arcs are made in equal +time showing the spring to be isochronous and +yet the position variations have not been accounted +for. In this connection experience proves that a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> +spring showing a perfect isochronal rate may have +its collet pinning point changed, in relation to the +pinning point at the stud and that through such an +alteration, a correction in positions can be obtained, +without in the least disturbing the perfect isochronal +rate.</p> + +<p>This indicates that the separation of the two adjustments +which is possible in theory, does not +hold good in practice, because a spring showing a +perfect isochronal rate has been altered for the +purpose of counteracting some position error and +thereby producing a practical center of gravity of +the balance and spring combined, instead of +separately.</p> + +<p>This may be further explained as creating an +error in a spring which is supposed to be theoretically +isochronous, with the idea of making it act in opposition +to the position error and the combination +thus obtained produces practical isochronism as +well as a corrected position rate.</p> + +<p>It is not suggested that these relative pinning +points be altered for the purpose of overcoming +position variation such as may be caused by dirt +and gummy oil, damaged pivots, or balances that +are out of poise. The watch should be in first-class +condition and have a good motion in every position +and then the alterations may be safely undertaken +in accordance with the principles.</p> + +<p>Adjusted to isochronism indicates that the watch +functions uniformly during the entire twenty-four +hours running. It is immaterial as to whether the +rate be perfect or whether it be a gain or a loss, so +long as it is uniform.</p> + +<p>The watch is not isochronous if there is both a +gain and a loss in the rate, even though the time +be perfect at the expiration of twenty-four hours.</p> + +<p>Experiment will demonstrate that watches carefully +adjusted to positions will also have a very +close isochronal rate. These isochronal experiments +can be made by timing watches for twenty-four +hours in any one of the vertical positions and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> +noting the variation in periods of from four to +twelve hours and by comparing the variation in the +first period, during which time the arc of motion +is long, with the variation in the latter period when +the mainspring power is weaker and the arc of +motion is short.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec28." id="sec28.">28.</a><i>Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>The most common causes of isochronal variation +with which the repairer has to deal and which are +often very destructive to position rates, as well as +to general time keeping, may be found in the factor +of, out of poise and uneven motive force, which is +one of the elementary principles of adjusting. This +feature should be thoroughly understood by all +watchmakers, so that as good results as possible +may be obtained from all watches above low grade, +even though no test for adjustment is to be made.</p> + +<p>When the balance is slightly out of poise and the +motion is exactly one and one-fourth turn during +the twenty-four hours, this out of poise will not +affect the isochronism. When the motion varies +and reaches approximately one and one-half turn +during the first few hours after winding and then +drops to one and one-quarter turn and finally to one +turn or less during the latter part of the twenty-four +hours, the poise error will have considerable effect. +This factor is not perceptible in the flat positions, +but shows up to the full extent in the vertical positions +and the variation differs according to the location +of the point that is heavy. For example, if +the balance is heavy on the lower side when at rest, +the watch will lose during the hours that the arc of +motion is over one and one-fourth turn and will +gain when the motion drops to one turn or less.</p> + +<p>Should the heavy point be on the top side of +balance the result will be reversed and the watch +will gain when the motion is over one and one-fourth +turn and will lose when it drops to one turn +or less.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span></p> + +<p>The total variation may be either seconds or +minutes, depending upon the extent of the poise +error and experiments will prove that serious isochronal +variations can be traced to the simple +cause of lack of poise and irregular motion in more +instances than to any other cause.</p> + +<p>The arc of one and one-fourth turn is the ideal +motion, as slight poise errors are neutralized at this +point, but very few watches will maintain this motion +for twenty-four hours, therefore the poise +must be as nearly perfect as possible. The nearest +approach to even motion of modern watches is +found in the fine Swiss grades equipped with stop +work, which causes only the best part of the mainspring +to be utilized.</p> + +<p>Such watches also receive the most expert attention +as to gearings of wheels and pinions and the +train wheels are specially rounded up on their respective +staffs. This latter feature has been adopted +by at least two of the American manufacturers of +fine watches during the past few years with considerable +benefit in producing even motion and the use +of lighter mainsprings. It should be definitely +understood that these tests refer to the vertical +positions of the watch only and that the horizontal +positions are not affected in the same way by lack +of poise.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>RELATIVE PINNING POINTS OF THE +HAIRSPRING</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec29." id="sec29.">29.</a><i>Original Springing of Watches.</i></h5> + +<p>Theory and practice agree that different +models of watches have important relative +points of attachment of the spring to collet +and stud. In the original springing and adjusting of +high grade watches, these points receive careful +consideration, and only a very small percentage +ever require future alterations.</p> + +<p>There are instances, however, where the original +allowance of position variation has been considerable, +also medium grades where no attention has +been directed to pinning points and in which an +occasional alteration may be required before a close +position rate can be obtained.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec30." id="sec30.">30.</a><i>How Pinning Point Alterations are Made.</i></h5> + +<p>These alterations are generally made by breaking +off or letting out a small section of the inner coil at +the collet. In making such alterations a quarter +of a coil broken away at the collet will have the +same effect as will a quarter of a coil broken off at +the outer end and will require less weighting of the +balance to correct the mean time. It will also avoid +breaking and remaking the over coil and the possible +necessity of readjustment to temperature. Letting +out the spring can be accomplished by unpinning +and repinning the spring at collet with less of the +coil entered in the pinhole. This is not a positive +alteration, however, because very often the segment +in the pinhole is as short as it can be with safety.</p> + +<p>A more substantial correction is that of reforming<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> +the over coil in a manner that will cause the end +holding the stud to be shifted further forward.</p> + +<p>The method of obtaining this correction is illustrated +in Fig. 8. The broken line shows the original +formation of the over coil with the stud on the +line "B". The solid lines show the corrections with +the stud shifted to the line A.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 347px;"> +<img src="images/i056.png" width="347" height="272" alt="Fig. 8" title="Fig. 8" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 8</span> +</div> + +<p>When the collet is +turned to replace the +spring in beat, the stud +will be in its original location +on the line "B."</p> + +<p>This will cause the pinning +point at collet to be +shifted from "A" to "B" +and bring it that much +nearer to the horizontal +line "C."</p> + +<p>This alteration has the same effect as that of +letting out the spring at the collet or of moving the +stud forward on the over coil, with the advantage +of eliminating any change in the mean time.</p> + +<p>It should be definitely understood that the objective +in making the above alterations and as illustrated +with the aid of the following cuts, is the relation +of the pinning point at collet to the pinning +point at stud, and that the change in length of the +spring has no bearing on the matter whatever as +far as the position rate is concerned.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec31." id="sec31.">31.</a><i>Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Models.</i></h5> + +<p>It is often supposed that hairsprings having +exactly even coils are correct for close position and +isochronal rating. Such springs do approximate the +nearest correct relation in more instances than any +other relation. They are precisely correct for very +few models, however, and are very incorrect for many +models, as will be seen through study of the follow<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span>ing +cuts showing the various points of attachment +and the different results obtainable in each.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec32." id="sec32.">32.</a><i>How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch.</i></h5> + +<p>A very simple method of locating the proper +point of attachment of the spring to collet is to +face the train side of the movement and hold the +balance stationary with a small twig, and with the +pallet fork just +midway between +the two +bankings.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 400px;"> +<img src="images/i057a.png" width="400" height="390" alt="Fig. 9" title="Fig. 9" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 9</span> +</div> + +<p>Presume the +existence of a +vertical line +through the +center of hairspring +and collet +as shown +at "A B" Fig. +9. Then presume +a horizontal +line as +shown at "C +D" on the same +cut.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 368px;"> +<img src="images/i057b.png" width="368" height="368" alt="Fig. 10" title="Fig. 10" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 10</span> +</div> + +<p>The proper +pinning point +is at the intersection +of the +collet and horizontal +line; the +spring may be +either over or +under even +coils, depending +entirely up<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span>on +the location of the stud hole in the balance bridge +as demonstrated by Figures 9, 10, 14, 15.</p> + +<p>When the spring develops to the right from collet +as shown in Fig. 9, for example, the proper point of +attachment is on the right side of collet as shown +at "E" Fig. 9, and also at "J" Fig. 14.</p> + +<p>If it develops to the left as the springs of all +fine Swiss watches do, the proper point of attachment +is on the left side of collet as shown at "F" +Fig. 10.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec33." id="sec33.">33.</a><i>Results in Vertical Position Rates Due to Changing the Pinning Point.</i></h5> + +<p>In either of the above instances the spring will +develop upward as it leaves the collet. These +points of attachment always produce a fast pendant +up rate when compared to the opposite, or pendant +down rate, and all high grade watches are originally +fitted with springs conforming to this principle.</p> + +<p>If these points of attachment were changed to the +opposite side of collet so that the spring would +develop downward as shown at "G" Fig. 11, and +"H" Fig. 12, the results would be reversed and the +pendant up rate would be slow in comparison to the +pendant down rate.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 379px;"> +<img src="images/i058.png" width="379" height="400" alt="Fig. 11" title="Fig. 11" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 11</span> +</div> + +<p>This point of attachment +in which +the spring develops +downward from the +collet is generally +known as the slow +point among adjusters, +and when a +spring is pinned at +either the slow or +fast point the pendant +right and left +positions generally +compare quite closely +to each other in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> +timing, provided that the poise and other conditions +of the watch are correct.</p> + +<p>If the pinning point was changed to the intersection +of the collet and vertical line as shown in "I" +Fig. 13, the pendant up and down rates would +compare nearly equal to each other and the pendant +right position would be slow compared to the +pendant left position.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 380px;"> +<img src="images/i059a.png" width="380" height="400" alt="Fig. 12" title="Fig. 12" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 12</span> +</div> + +<p>If it were pinned +at the intersection +of the collet +and vertical +line just opposite +to that shown in +Fig. 13, the pendant +left position +would be slow +compared to the +pendant right position.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 384px;"> +<img src="images/i059b.png" width="384" height="400" alt="Fig. 13" title="Fig. 13" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 13</span> +</div> + +<p>The vertical +points of attachment +are seldom +used, for the reason +that the variation +between +the pendant right +and left positions +would be very +difficult to control +within close limits, +due to the existence +of the natural +error. As +these positions, +together with the +pendant up position +are the most +important of the four vertical positions, they are +given preference, and the natural error is placed in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> +the pendant down position where it will be the least +detrimental to the performance of the watch.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec34." id="sec34.">34.</a><i>The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated.</i></h5> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 334px;"> +<img src="images/i060.png" width="334" height="400" alt="Fig. 14" title="Fig. 14" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 14</span> +</div> + +<p>The natural error +generally consists +of from +twelve to fifteen +seconds in finely +constructed +watches, and exists +because of the +fact that it is impossible +to perfectly +poise a spiral +spring. The +location of the heavy point, however, may be shifted +by changing the point of attachment at collet as +described in No. 33, this Chapter. The nearest +approximation of a poised spiral spring is probably +attained through L. Lossier's inner terminal curve. +Results are not positive, however, and any deviation +from the required precision makes the curve valueless. +It is possible to obtain perfect adjustment +between three vertical quarter positions and the +two horizontal positions, but all four quarter positions +cannot be perfectly adjusted because the +natural error will show up in one of them. Manufacturers +of fine watches do not of course presume to +supply perfect adjustment in the five positions. +Some however, have considerably closer limits of +allowance for variation than do others and it is +logical to presume that a line of high grade watches +having a five position allowance of six seconds from +one position to any other would show better results +than another line which had even a six position ad<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span>justment +and an allowance of fifteen seconds from +one position to any other.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec35." id="sec35.">35.</a><i>Principle of Pinning Point Alterations.</i></h5> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 313px;"> +<img src="images/i061.png" width="313" height="400" alt="Fig. 15" title="Fig. 15" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 15</span> +</div> + +<p>When an alteration +of any pinning +point is necessary, +the extent and direction +of the alteration +are determined +by the rate of the +watch. For instance, +if a spring is pinned +at the fast point and +if a slightly slower +pendant up rate is +desired, the spring +can be broken off at the collet and pinned one-eighth +above the horizontal line.</p> + +<p>If the rate is to be made slightly faster, the +spring can be let out a trifle at the collet, the over +coil reformed or the stud moved forward on the +over coil so that the collet point of attachment will +come slightly below the horizontal line when the +spring is placed in beat. The former alteration +causes an approach toward the slow point and in +making the latter alteration we assume that the +fast point is a trifle below the horizontal line on that +particular watch. When altering springs from the +extreme fast point to the extreme slow point, it is +advisable to remove a trifle less of the inner coil than +the extreme calculation. This will cause the point +of attachment to be slightly above the horizontal +line on the slow side and will most always produce +the result desired and if it does not, there is still a +possibility of further alteration. The same principle +applies in making an alteration from the extreme +slow to the extreme fast point and in this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> +case the point of attachment to collet may be just +a trifle below the horizontal line.</p> + +<p>The theory of this is that all shortening of the +coil from the fast to the slow point produces a slower +rate pendant up, until the extreme slow point is +reached. After passing this extreme slow point the +pendant up rate begins to grow faster until the extreme +fast point is reached. +<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a>The +designations "right" and "left" in regard to +pinning points are used with the explicit understanding +that the individual is facing the train side +of the movement. The same designations used as +referring to position rates, or results to be expected +in positions should be interpreted to mean with +the individual facing the dial side of the watch.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec36." id="sec36.">36.</a><i>Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models.</i></h5> + +<p>The points shown in Figures 14 and 15 refer +generally to American hunting models. In all +other high grade watches the location of the balance +and spring will be found either to the right or left +of the center of the watch.</p> + +<p>In American hunting models the balance and +spring are located in the lower center of the watch.</p> + +<p>This is due to the fact that American manufacturers +do not construct separate models for hunting +watches as is done by foreign manufacturers.</p> + +<p>Instead of producing an entirely separate model, +the method simply calls for a change in the construction +of the barrel bridge by reversing the position +of the barrel and winding wheels. This places +the winding sleeve at figure three on the dial, +which is customary on hunting watches and causes +the entire movement to be shifted by ninety degrees +with the balance just about opposite the pendant.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1"><span class="label">[A]</span></a> Important Note.</p></div> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>MANIPULATION OF THE REGULATOR PINS</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec37." id="sec37.">37.</a><i>Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins.</i></h5> + +<p>On some occasions when the pinning points +seem to be comparatively close and the watch +is in good condition with the balance in +poise, it is possible to obtain corrections by closing +or opening the regulator pins.</p> + +<p>This, however, can only be resorted to, to a limited +extent, as otherwise the value of the regulator may +be impaired.</p> + +<p>The pins should not be closed tight enough to +cause "kinking" of the over coil and they should +not be spread apart any more than enough to make +the mean rate about 2 seconds per hour slower.</p> + +<p>Some models of watches consistently require that +the pins be closed, while other models require that +they be slightly spread, and it is therefore advisable +not to disturb the pins when cleaning watches unless +they have been bent by incompetent hands.</p> + +<p>It is better to reserve the majority of pin alterations +for such time as the position rate determines +the necessity of an alteration. When the pins are +open, however, it is necessary to adjust the coil so +that its vibration will be equal.</p> + +<p>Correct execution in spreading or closing the pins +will very often make it possible to obtain a correction +of six or eight seconds between the vertical and +horizontal positions.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec38." id="sec38.">38.</a><i>Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil Between the Pins.</i></h5> + +<p>The proper method of examining this vibration +is to stop the balance and observe the movement of +the coil between the pins.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span></p> + +<p>The vibration should be equal at the slightest +oscillation of the balance as well as during the +longer arcs. The coil should not rest against one +or the other of the pins at any time unless they are +both closed. Emphasis is placed upon equal +vibration of the coil when the pins are open because +of its importance, and if results are not obtained (as +expected) the examination should be repeated to see +if correct conditions have been attained. Examination +of this vibration should be made from both +sides of the pins and usually the best estimate can +be obtained by looking between the pins from the +stud side.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec39." id="sec39.">39.</a><i>Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing the Regulator Pins.</i></h5> + +<p>When the regulator pins are tightly closed and +the watch has a fast pendant up position rate, it +will be possible to obtain a slower rate by slightly +spreading the pins.</p> + +<p>When the pins are spread and vibration of the +coil between them can be discerned, and the pendant +up rate is slow, a faster rate can be obtained by +closing them.</p> + +<p>In spreading the pins they should be drawn away +from the coil equally, as otherwise the coil will strike +one pin with more force than the other, which will +not produce results as expected and will cause +uncertain regulation. In closing the pins they +should be drawn together one at a time until both +are in equal contact. They should not be merely +squeezed together, as this causes distortion of the +coil at the point of contact.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>FACTORY AND REPAIR SHOP ADJUSTING</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec40." id="sec40.">40.</a><i>Routine Varies According to Circumstances.</i></h5> + +<p>The principles covering the adjustment of +watches are the same in the repair shop as +they are in the factory and they are equally +the same in the various lines of high grade watches +regardless as to whether they are of American or +foreign extraction.</p> + +<p>The routine covering the work to be done, however, +may vary, depending upon the quantity of +watches that are turned out. In the factories +where large numbers of watches are adjusted the +adjuster is trained in the various branches of watch +work and eventually devotes his entire time to +adjusting. The watches are generally turned over +to him after they are all assembled and ready for +the final balance and spring work, or after they +have been finished and rated, in which instance he +receives only those that are not within the requirements +and he then makes the necessary alterations, +after which they are again tested for results.</p> + +<p>In some repair shops where large numbers of fine +watches are handled, a similar system is used and +one competent adjuster devotes his time principally +to the work of timing and adjusting.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec41." id="sec41.">41.</a><i>Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop One or Two Workmen.</i></h5> + +<p>By far the greater number of watchmakers are +employed in stores having only one or two workmen +who are required to do the cleaning and to make all +repairs. For this reason an adjuster of equal skill +could not do as much actual adjusting as could be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> +done in either of the two previous instances, but +for the same reason he would not be expected to do +as much.</p> + +<p>He can, however, adjust the high grade watches +that he repairs just as closely, and he should not permit +himself to feel that time and the nature of his +position prohibits him from doing so. Whether it +does, or does not prevent him from obtaining close +rates depends entirely upon his training and understanding +of the necessary details. If he is skilful and +accurate, his output of work in the long run will not +be reduced, his work will give better satisfaction +and he will have less "comebacks" to take up his +valuable time.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec42." id="sec42.">42.</a><i>Advantage of Understanding Adjusting Even Though Watches are Not Tested in Positions or Isochronism.</i></h5> + +<p>To understand position adjusting thoroughly is +of the greatest advantage in obtaining satisfactory +time from any medium or high grade watches even +though they are not to be tested in positions because +vital points will receive intelligent observation +where they would otherwise be overlooked.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec43." id="sec43.">43.</a><i>Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience.</i></h5> + +<p>The previous notes and rules covering pinning +points of the hairspring as detailed by the cuts and +descriptions, together with the concrete adjusting +examples to follow would no doubt be of sufficient +note for watchmakers of considerable experience.</p> + +<p>There are, however, many ambitious workmen who +have not devoted any time whatever to the study +or practice of adjusting and to whom some elementary +study and practice may be quite indispensable.</p> + +<p>To be of service to this class of workmen chapters +XI and XII are devoted to preliminary notes and +practice lessons.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span></p> + +<p>The contents of these chapters can be worked out +in practice by almost any workman who is capable +of holding a position as watchmaker and it is substantially +necessary that they be mastered before +finished results are to be expected.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE +FOR BEGINNERS</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec44." id="sec44.">44.</a><i>Practical Suggestions.</i></h5> + +<p>Experience will eventually prove that most +of the variations in positions are caused by +apparently insignificant details. The mistake +made by the average repairer is generally that of +failing to detect these details and to make slight corrections +where necessary, as he proceeds with the +ordinary cleaning and repairing of the watch.</p> + +<p>This oversight often prevents what would otherwise +be excellent results in timekeeping and makes +it necessary to utilize extra time and labor in the +effort to obtain more consistent timekeeping.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec45." id="sec45.">45.</a><i>The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust.</i></h5> + +<p>The first consideration in position adjusting +should be directed toward equalizing the time in +the two horizontal positions. This equalization +should be accomplished entirely by attention to +details that can be plainly seen before arriving at +the point of actual timing of the watch. The principal +requirement for equal time between dial up +and dial down is equal arc of motion of the balance +in each of the two positions, and the adjuster should +become capable of obtaining this equal arc of motion +before attempting to obtain close rating in the +other positions.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec46." id="sec46.">46.</a><i>Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down.</i></h5> + +<p>Variations between dial up and dial down may +be due to one or more of the following causes which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> +have been arranged in two groups, the first group +consisting of the most frequent and common causes, +while the second group consists of causes equally +detrimental but less common.</p> + + +<p>Group No. 1</p> + +<p> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">1. Dirt or thick oil in one or both balance jewels.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">2. Burred or marred balance pivots.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">3. End of one balance pivot flat or rough and opposite pivot polished.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">4. Ends of both balance pivots polished but not same form.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">5. Balance pivot bent.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">6. Hairspring rubbing balance arm or stud.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">7. Hairspring concave or convex in form instead of perfectly level.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">8. Over coil rubbing under balance cock.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">9. Over coil rubbing center wheel. (Some watches).</span> +</p> + + +<p>Group No. 2</p> + +<p> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">10. Balance pivots fitted too close in jewels.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">11. One pivot having excessive side shake and the opposite close fitting.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">12. Escape or pallet pivots bent or damaged.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">13. Balance end stone pitted or badly out of flat.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">14. Over coil rubbing outside coil, at point where it curves over spring.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">15. Balance arm or screw touching pallet bridge.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">16. Balance screw out too far, touching bridge or train wheel.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">17. Safety roller rubbing dial plate or jewel setting.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">18. Fork rubbing impulse roller.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">19. Guard pin rubbing edge of safety roller.</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 2em;">20. Roller jewel long and rubs guard pin.</span> +</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec47." id="sec47.">47.</a><i>Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble.</i></h5> + +<p>Any of the above irregularities will cause a variation +in motion between dial up and dial down and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> +invariably the trouble will be found on the side +which has the shorter motion. For instance, a pivot +that is flat or rough on the end will cause a shorter +motion, when it is down, than will the opposite +pivot when it is down, provided that its end +is slightly rounded and highly polished. The same +is true when the oil is gummy or dirty in one jewel +and the opposite jewel is clean and freshly oiled.</p> + +<p>Capped escape or pallet pivots when flat or +rough on one end have the same effect to a lesser +degree.</p> + +<p>It is never proper to make the end of a pivot flat +or rough and thereby shorten and equalize the +motion. Neither should the ends of both balance +pivots be flattened at any time. On the contrary, +the ends of pivots should always be slightly rounded +and highly polished: there is no logical reason for +having them otherwise.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec48." id="sec48.">48.</a><i>Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot.</i></h5> + +<p>There are occasionally instances where a poor +motion on one pivot is caused by a slight burr on +the opposite pivot. This is usually due to the fact +that while the burred pivot is running on its own +end stone, there is space enough between the end +stone and jewel to give the burr clearance, but when +the position of the watch is reversed, the balance +end shake allowance causes the burr to rub on the +top of jewel hole and prevents perfect freedom of +motion when the good pivot is downward.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec49." id="sec49.">49.</a><i>Examining the Hairspring.</i></h5> + +<p>The hairspring may be true and level but it +should be carefully examined to see that there is no +possibility of touching at any point. The observation +should take place during the full arc of motion +of the balance, for there are some instances in which +no rubbing takes place until the motion accelerates. +The watch should be held at different angles and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> +the space between the balance arm and spring, and +the stud and spring, closely scrutinized for possible +contact. The space between the spring and over +coil at the point where the over coil rises and curves +over the spring should be at least equal to the width +of the coils and care should be taken to see that the +over coil just before the point of rising has the usual +space between it and the next coil. Either position +in which the hairspring may rub will have a shorter +motion and a gain in time compared to the opposite +position in which there is no interference.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec50." id="sec50.">50.</a><i>Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion.</i></h5> + +<p>Invariably the arc of motion which is the shortest +will gain time compared to the opposite position +which has a longer motion. There are, however, +some few instances in which there are exceptions to +this rule, and knowledge of these exceptions is +quite valuable in preventing confusion and doubtfulness +in the certainty of making specific alterations. +As an example in the horizontal positions; if both +end stones are perfect and the freedom of one pivot +in the jewel is correct while the opposite pivot has +entirely too much freedom, the motion may be +somewhat shorter with the proper fitting pivot +downward while the rate may be slower compared to +the opposite position. This is caused by the balance +describing a larger circle when the large hole +jewel is upward, as the pivot is allowed to travel a +greater distance from the center of the hole as it +wavers from side to side during the oscillations.</p> + +<p>When the watch is reversed the weight of the +balance prevents the pivot from wobbling in the +large hole and eliminates the possibility of compensating +for the larger circle described by the balance +in the opposite position.</p> + +<p>The same results are possible when the freedom +of both pivots is correct and when one end stone is +pitted, as the pit in the stone causes a short motion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> +when downward and prevents the pivot from having +any side play whatever, while the opposite pivot +enjoys full play to whatever freedom there may be +and through this causing a somewhat larger circle +to be described by the balance and a slower rate in +time.</p> + +<p>It should be understood that this does not refer +to instances where the end stone surface is merely +slightly worn, but to pittings in which the surface +of the stone has been actually pierced. In most +instances of slight wear the motion will be shorter +and the rate fast which conforms to the general rule +covering rate and motion.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec51." id="sec51.">51.</a><i>Detailed Practice.</i></h5> + +<p>For preliminary practice in position adjusting, +select a watch of about 17 jewels which has just been +cleaned and put in order to the best of one's ability.</p> + +<p>Regulate it so that it will time within ten seconds +in twenty-four hours. Then run it dial up for +twenty-four hours and make a notation as to the +number of seconds either fast or slow. Next run +it dial down for twenty-four hours and make note +of the number of seconds fast or slow in this +position. If there is a variation in time between the +two positions it will be found that the position +having the faster rate of the two will also have a +shorter arc of motion.<a name="FNanchor_B_2" id="FNanchor_B_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_B_2" class="fnanchor">[B]</a></p> + +<p>The exact arc of motion in each position can be +known by observing the arms of the balance and +comparing the extent of the arc with some point on +the pallet bridge.</p> + +<p>A variation of one-eighth of an inch in motion +will generally make a difference of four or five seconds +in the rate and greater variations will make +corresponding increases in the difference.</p> + +<p>When a watch is in good order a correct motion +for the horizontal positions is generally considered +to be that of one and one-half turn, which consists<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> +of three-quarters of a revolution of the balance in +each direction.</p> + +<p>Should the motion be very much below this, in +both positions, there may be something wrong with +the general condition of the watch or possibly there +may be a weak mainspring at fault, or an imitation +spring that is too long and thick may take up too +much room in the barrel and cause poor motion as +surely as will one that is two weak.</p> + +<p>Assuming, however, that the motion is good in +one position and drops off in the other, it is quite +probable that only an ordinary position correction +will be required and the immediate problem to be +considered is that of causing the short arc of motion +to accelerate enough to equal the longer arc. The +precise correction required will most probably be +found among the causes listed in No. 46, this +Chapter.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec52." id="sec52.">52.</a><i>Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison.</i></h5> + +<p>The horizontal position which has the slower rate +of the two should be considered as the unit which +is correct and it will always have the longer motion +of the two, barring the occasional exception as described +in No. 50.</p> + +<p>This longer arc of motion is universally due to a +better condition, while the shorter motion indicates +that something is wrong, and it should always be +the aim of the adjuster to improve some condition +that is below standard, rather than to make some +good condition a little worse in order to equalize +the rates.</p> + +<p>It may be possible to equalize horizontal rates by +flattening the ends of pivots, but it does not require +much more time to improve the motion in one position +than it does to make it a little worse in another. +The advantage is all one way and results either +good or bad depend entirely upon the viewpoint +of the worker and how he applies himself to the +situation.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p> + + +<h5><a name="sec53." id="sec53.">53.</a><i>Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction.</i></h5> + +<p>In the examination of pivots, end stones and +jewels, it is necessary to use a stronger glass than the +one used for ordinary work.</p> + +<p>Damaged pivots can often be detected by looking +through the end stone with a strong glass while the +balance is moving. If imperfect they will appear +dark or display a slight waver or flash and if they +are in good condition they will appear bright and +seem to stand still. They can also be examined in +the lathe and a good true enclosed balance chuck is +of immense value in detecting burrs, chipped edges, +rings on the sides, slight bends and poorly shaped +ends. The complete balance and spring can be inserted +and the pivots can be refinished without disturbing +the roller or hairspring. The chuck should +be revolving very slowly when making the examination +and moving the belt with the hand will enable +one to see more than can be seen when the lathe is +running at regular speed. Some watchmakers +use small bow lathes for examining and finishing +pivots, or the Jacot lathe, which is excellent for this +kind of work. An end stone that has been deeply +pitted should always be discarded and a new one +supplied. If the hole is very slight, however, it can +be removed entirely and the surface of the stone re-polished +on a lap charged with No. 5 diamond +powder, but the stone and setting should be +thoroughly cleansed by brushing and pithing before +replacement.</p> + +<p>Should a slight particle of diamond or any other +hard stone powder possibly remain on the stone or +in the bezel it might eventually enter the end of +pivot and again cause pitting. In case that the end +stone is of the type that is flat and highly polished +on both sides, such as is usually found on detachable +dome foreign watches, it can be punched out with a +piece of brass wire or peg wood and replaced in +reverse position, after which the bezel can be closed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> +and the stone will be just as serviceable as a new +one.</p> + +<p>Pivots that have been running on pitted end +stones are generally rough on the end which is +charged with some hard substance. They require +special treatment to remove the cause of the +pitting and the following method of refinishing is +very good. Place the balance in the lathe and +draw a soft Arkansas oil stone over the end of pivot +with pressure enough to remove a bit of the metal. +This will drag out any hard particles that may be +lodged in the end and after this has been done the +pivot should be pithed clean and polished with a +smooth hard steel burnisher covered with oil.</p> + +<p>A hard stone such as sapphire or jasper, or a steel +burnisher should not be used on the pivot until the +Arkansas stone has first done its work, because a +hard instrument of this description will force the +small particles that cause the pitting further into +the end of the pivot instead of removing them +entirely.</p> + +<p>A pivot that has been treated in this way will not +pit the end stone a second time unless carelessness +in the use of hard powder permits additional particles +to come in contact with the pivot or end stone.</p> + +<p>There are some instances in which the steel is +highly carbonized but manufacturers generally use +the best steel obtainable for balance staffs and excessive +carbon can generally be detected with a magnifying +glass. Free use of diamond powder and +emery wheel dust are more often responsible. The +holes of jewels should never be enlarged or polished +with diamond powder after the jewels have once +been placed in their permanent settings, as this +allows the powder to lodge between the jewel and +the setting where it cannot be removed by cleaning +but where it will be drawn out by the oil and charge +any pivot that may be run in the jewel. The grey +powder in such instances may be seen through the +top of jewel with a strong glass.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_B_2" id="Footnote_B_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_B_2"><span class="label">[B]</span></a> Note Exceptions in No. 50.</p></div> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE ON +VERTICAL CORRECTIONS</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec54." id="sec54.">54.</a><i>Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>The first of the vertical positions to be considered +is that of Pendant Up and to understand +the causes of and corrections for variations +in this position completes what is known as +three position adjusting.</p> + +<p>The usual causes of variation in the pendant up +position as compared to the horizontal positions are +as follows.</p> + +<p> +Poor Motion Pendant Up.<br /> +Regulator Pins not properly adjusted.<br /> +Balance not in poise.<br /> +Hairspring not in circle.<br /> +Hairspring not pinned at proper point.<br /> +</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec55." id="sec55.">55.</a><i>Poor Motion, Cause and Effect.</i></h5> + +<p>Among these causes that of Poor Motion covers a +number of troubles such as roller jewel rubbing +in fork, guard pin rubbing roller, strong lock on +the escapement, or no lock on some teeth.</p> + +<p>Such causes may not prevent close rating between +the horizontal positions because of non-interference +until the position of the watch is changed.</p> + +<p>The pendant up motion should therefore be the +first vertical point of investigation and if at fault +the cause should be eliminated. In this connection +it should not be expected that the arc of motion in +the pendant up or any other vertical position will +be as long as it will be in the horizontal positions,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> +for when a watch is in excellent condition in every +particular the vertical arcs are always approximately +one-fourth of a turn shorter than the horizontal.</p> + +<p>This is due to frictions and is impossible of correction +and therefore should not be confused with a +poor motion of greater extent which has removable +causes that are practical of execution.</p> + +<p>A good motion is to be considered as one of the +results to be expected in overhauling and putting +a watch in good order and it should not be understood +that it is particularly to be associated with adjusting +only, nor should any watch be slighted in +cleaning and assembling with the idea that adjusting +will correct it in a few minutes' time. On the +other hand it should be understood as fundamental +that no watch can be a close time keeper unless it +has a good motion and no good adjuster will attempt +to obtain close time in one position or a close rate +in different positions until the motion is first what +it should be. If it is what it should be, about +ninety per cent of the necessary work required for +obtaining close position rates will have been completed.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec56." id="sec56.">56.</a><i>Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>When the watch is in reasonably satisfactory +condition and a three position test proves that the +pendant up position has a variation of from ten to +twenty seconds either fast or slow compared to the +horizontal positions, the regulator pins may be the +first point of examination. If there is considerable +vibration of the coil between them, and the pendant +rate is slow, it will be necessary to close the pins and +if the rate is fast and the pins are found to be +closed so that there is no vibration of the coil, it +will be necessary to spread them slightly. Closing +the pins will of course make the general timing of +the watch faster and spreading them will make it +slower and therefore it will be necessary to regulate +the watch for one or two seconds per hour before<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> +again testing it in positions. The result of either +operation, however, will be to cause the rate in the +pendant up position to conform more closely to +the horizontal rates.</p> + +<p>Preliminary and profitable two position experiments +can be made between dial up and pendant +up, by having the pins closed on most any watch +that is in good order and timing it within five or ten +seconds in twenty-four hours, then rating it in these +two positions. Next spread the pins slightly, re-time +the watch and rate it in the same two positions +and compare the variations. A few experiments of +this description will soon demonstrate as to the extent +of correction that can be obtained in this way.<a name="FNanchor_C_3" id="FNanchor_C_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_C_3" class="fnanchor">[C]</a> +The rule of equal vibration of the coil between +the pins after they have been spread must be rigidly +enforced.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec57." id="sec57.">57.</a><i>Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance.</i></h5> + +<p>Assuming that the motion and regulator pins +seem to be satisfactory, the next point of investigation +should be the poise of balance. The hairspring +should be removed and the pivots known to +be straight and polished before testing. The rollers +are of course a part of the balance and are not to be +removed. A perfectly poised balance can be stopped +at any point on the tool and it should at least remain +stationary at each of the four quarters of its +circumference. No. 28, Chapter VII, should be +consulted for details on poise corrections.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec58." id="sec58.">58.</a><i>Concentricity of the Hairspring.</i></h5> + +<p>The next point of consideration may be the concentricity +of the hairspring, and it is quite important +that the spring be centered as nearly perfect as the +trained eye can determine. Any unusual pressure<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> +of the spring in one direction will cause undue friction +and a fast rate compared to the opposite direction.</p> + +<p>There are several easy tests for determining as to +how nearly the spring may be centered. One of +these is to look straight down upon the spring and +examine the space between the coils that extend +beyond the circumference of the dome. This test +may be made in three ways, one with the balance at +rest, one with the coils of the spring wound up and +the third with the coils unwound. With the balance +at rest and the spring centered there will be +the same space between the coils all around as +though the spring were out of the watch entirely +and laying on the bench.</p> + +<p>If it is not properly centered there will be more +space between the coils on one side than there will be +on the opposite. The same conditions will be apparent +when the spring is wound up, although the +coils will all be nearer to each other than they +were with the balance at rest, and when they are +unwound the coils will all be farther apart with the +same apparent difference on opposite sides when +the centering is not correct.</p> + +<p>The winding and unwinding of the spring is +alternating and almost instantaneous, as the balance +oscillates from one extreme to the other. For +observation of the spring when it is wound or unwound +it is necessary to stop the balance with the +finger or camel's hair brush as it reaches its extreme +arc of motion, then hold it stationary for a few +seconds while the space between the coils is being +examined. The balance should then be allowed to +swing to the opposite extreme, when it should again +be held for examination of the coils. In one of +these extremes the coils will be wound and in the +other they will be unwound and after a few experiments +in stopping and starting the balance it will +be found that the entire examination will not require +over ten seconds' time.</p> + +<p>When the spring is not properly centered the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> +reason is of course found in some curve of the over +coil and the most usual point at fault is the section +or curve on which the regulator pins act. If the +coils open too wide on the side where the regulator +pins are located this section of the coil will be too +near the center and should be moved outward, +possibly equal to one-half or one full space of the +coils. If the coils are too close on the side where +the pins are it will probably be found that the +section requires shifting toward the center slightly. +The balance should be removed from the watch in +either instance and the coil circled with the over-coiling +tweezer, although experienced workmen can +frequently make excellent corrections with a fine +pointed tweezer without removing the balance.</p> + +<p>Finely adjusted watches will always be found to +have springs as nearly perfectly centered as it is +possible for expert workmen to get them and it is +quite interesting and instructive to observe the vibration +of a perfect spring by any one interested in +the work.</p> + +<p>Some watchmakers center the spring on the balance +cock before it is staked on the balance and +very good results can be obtained in this way. The +balance cock is placed on the bench in the inverted +position which makes it easy to locate the point or +curve requiring alteration.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec59." id="sec59.">59.</a><i>Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning Point Alterations.</i></h5> + +<p>Should most careful investigation of the condition +of the watch indicate that the Motion, +Regulator Pins, Poise of Balance and Centering of +the Hairspring as well as the general condition of +the watch are satisfactory and the rating show that +there is still considerable variation between the +horizontal positions and the pendant up position +there is still one source through which positive +correction may be obtained.</p> + +<p>This refers to the relative positions of the collet<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> +and stud pinning points which is defined with explanatory +cuts and formula in Chapter VIII.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec60." id="sec60.">60.</a><i>Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of Position Rates.</i></h5> + +<p>In constructing this chapter and the preceding +one it has been preferred to go into detail for the +purpose of defining the possible corrections and +alterations, together with the results to be expected. +Not every watch demanding position correction +would require the extent of investigation and possible +alteration that is pointed out and in most +instances the direct cause will be disclosed with +very little investigation. In fact, the experienced +adjuster can tell almost immediately where to look +for trouble by merely observing the position rate as +entered on the card.</p> + +<p>It should also be clearly understood by the student +that when the repairing and cleaning of high grade +watches is done by one who understands the details +of adjusting, there will be only a very small proportion +of the watches requiring position corrections. +As a rule among experienced adjusters there will be +about seventy per cent of the watches that will +have very close rates. If, therefore, one hundred +watches are put in order and tested in positions +there should be seventy that do not require any +correction, while about thirty will require either +minor or major alteration. The time required for +making alterations on this thirty per cent of the +watches will be offset by a smaller percentage of +unsatisfactory returns and a better reputation for +doing good work.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_C_3" id="Footnote_C_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_C_3"><span class="label">[C]</span></a> See Chapter IX, on Regulator Pin Alterations.</p></div> +</div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE +THREE POSITION ALTERATIONS +AND LABOR UTILIZED</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec61." id="sec61.">61.</a><i>Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the Variation.</i></h5> + +<p>In submitting the previous chapters it is assumed +that the average ambitious watchmaker will +gain enough knowledge from the various details +to enable him to understand the meaning of the +adjustment of watches, the causes of variations and +the principal alterations for obtaining corrections.</p> + +<p>There are many features covered that will enable +him to develop in practice and to experiment +in individual points of importance, without running +up against mathematical deductions that halt and +discourage further interest in the subject.</p> + +<p>To understand the principles constitutes a large +percentage of the qualifications required and to be +able to execute the practical alterations and corrections +required in different kinds of variations +completes the general qualifications. It would +hardly be sufficient, however, to conclude the work +at this point without giving more definite examples +for comparison, together with some indication as to +the approximate time that may ordinarily be utilized +in doing the work and also showing some instances +of a possible choice of several alterations and why a +particular alteration is advisable. For this reason +the following examples will be found to have an +important part in fulfilling the mission of this book.</p> + +<p>In selecting these examples the fineness of results +has not been the principal consideration. The +deciding factor was the differences in variation and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> +alterations, and the fact that they cover the widest +field for general instruction that could be selected +from hundreds of equally good rates among various +models of watches which, with three exceptions, were +put in order for railroad service.</p> + +<p>The method of computing the variation from one +position to any other is similar to that used in +temperature adjusting as described in Chapter 3, +No. 13. The watch should first be timed closely +and then rated for twenty-four hours in each position. +It should be wound before being started in each position +but should be set only on the first day so that +the time is never disturbed.</p> + +<p>The first position to be rated is universally Dial +Up, then in succession Dial Down, Pendant Up, +Pendant Right and Pendant Left. The daily +total number of seconds fast or slow should be +entered in the first column of the rate card after +each twenty-four hours run. This column then +constitutes the progressive rate from which the +actual variation between the different positions is +ascertained.</p> + +<p>The figure in the upper square is first carried out +to the adjoining column at its full value and then +the difference between this figure and that of the +second square is entered in the second square of second +column, and so on until the difference between +each of the succeeding squares of first column is +registered in the second column.</p> + +<p>If the figure in a square of first column is greater +than that in the preceding square the carried out +figure would be entered in second column as + +If the figure is less than the preceding square it +would be carried out as-.</p> + +<p>The total variation in positions is obtained from +the figures entered in second column. If these +figures are all entered as either plus or minus it is +necessary to merely subtract the lesser figure from +the greater. If, however, some figures are entered +as plus and others as minus it will be necessary to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> +add the greater figure of each of the two denominations.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec62." id="sec62.">62.</a><i>Example No. 1, Three Positions.</i></h5> + +<p>Columbus, No. 358846, Open Face, 17 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs Made. New balance staff, two balance +screws changed, hairspring trued and cleaned.</p> + +<p>After timing the watch closely it was tested in +three positions and found to have a variation of +eleven seconds fast pendant up as per second +column, Fig. 16.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 16"><caption><b>Fig. 16</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="7"> No. 358846 Make: Columbus</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+10</td><td align="left">+10</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">+ 7</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"></td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">11</td><td align="left"></td><td align="left">4</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>Investigation showed the hairspring to be pinned +nearly correct, true level and in circle; balance true; +regulator pins closed and motion satisfactory. A +correction could have been made in one of several +ways; either by making a slight alteration of the +pinning point at the collet; correcting a possible +slight error in poise or by slightly spreading the +regulator pins.</p> + +<p>As the extent of variation did not indicate any +serious error at any particular point for a watch +of this description the possible poise error and the +slight variation in the pinning point were waived +and the regulator pins were spread just enough so +that slight equal vibration of the coil could be seen +with a double eyeglass. After this alteration the +mean time was found to be one second per hour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> +slow which was corrected on the mean time screws +and the next test showed that the variation had +been reduced to four second as per fourth column, +Fig. 16. The time consumed in making the alteration +aside from the repairing was less than ten +minutes.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec63." id="sec63.">63.</a><i>Example No. 2, Three Positions.</i></h5> + +<p>Ball No. B060816, Open Face, 17 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. Refinished balance pivots and +cleaned. The first test in positions disclosed a +variation of thirty-five seconds as per second +column Fig. 17.</p> + +<p>Investigation found the balance true; hairspring +true, level and circle; regulator pins very nearly +closed and the motion one and one-eighth turn. This +rate like example No. 1, was also fast in the pendant +up position, but the greater extent of the error indicated +that there must be some serious poise error, +and upon investigation this was found to be the case. +A screw on the roller jewel side or at the bottom when +the balance was at rest was found to be heavy. This +was corrected and the next test showed a much +improved rate although there was still a variation +of eight seconds fast pendant up as per fourth +column Fig. 17.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 17"><caption><b>Fig. 17</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...B060816.......... Make...Ball............</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td rowspan="3">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">+ 7</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+37</td><td align="left">+35</td><td align="left">+29</td><td align="left">+15</td><td align="left">+24</td><td align="left">+10</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 35</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 8</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 3</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>A better rate than this was desired and further +examination proved that the locking of the pallet<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> +stones and escape teeth was quite strong and caused +the pendant up motion to have a shorter arc than +would have been entirely desirable. An alteration +was made by pushing the receiving stone further +back into the slot and rebanking the escapement. +The third position test showed an improved motion +and a variation of three seconds as per sixth column. +The total time required for making the alterations +was about three quarters of an hour.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec64." id="sec64.">64.</a><i>Example No. 3, Three Positions.</i></h5> + +<p>Elgin No. 7457488. Open Face, 21 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. Cleaned; polished pivots and +new mainspring fitted. The first position test +showed a variation of nineteen seconds as per +second column, Fig. 18.</p> + +<p>It will be noted that this example differs from +Nos. 1 and 2, in that the rate is slow in the pendant +up position. Examination showed all points satisfactory +except that the regulator pins were spread +considerably and allowed too much freedom of +vibration for the coil.</p> + +<p>Had this vibration been slight it would have been +advisable to examine the poise. As it was considerable, +however, the alteration made was to close +the pins so that only slight vibration was visible +with a strong glass.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 18"><caption><b>Fig. 18</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...7457488.......... Make...Elgin...........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">- 9</td><td align="left">- 9</td><td align="left">+ 5</td><td align="left">+ 5</td><td rowspan="3">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">-18</td><td align="left">- 9</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">-46</td><td align="left">-28</td><td align="left">+ 9</td><td align="left">+ 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 19</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 4</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>This watch was not equipped with mean time +screws and it was therefore necessary to fit a pair<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> +of thin timing washers because closing the pins +caused a gaining rate of two seconds per hour in +the mean time. The next position test showed a +variation of four seconds as per fourth column Fig. 18.</p> + +<p>The time consumed in making the alteration and +fitting the washers was about ten minutes.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec65." id="sec65.">65.</a><i>Example No. 4, Three Positions.</i></h5> + +<p>Hampden No. 1438676, Open Face, 21 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. New balance staff and hole +jewel fitted and cleaned.</p> + +<p>The first position test showed a variation of +twelve seconds slow pendant up as per second +column Fig. 19.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 19"><caption><b>Fig. 19</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...1438676.......... Make...Hampden.........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td rowspan="3">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 6</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">-10</td><td align="left">+ 9</td><td align="left">+ 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 12</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 2</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>Investigation found all points such as balance +true, hairspring true, level and circle and the +regulator pins reasonably satisfactory. The motion, +however, was not as good as it should have +been when the spring was nearly wound up. It +was let down to where it would ordinarily be after +about twenty-hours run and found to have barely +one turn pendant up and a trifle over one turn in +the flat positions. This proved that the motion +was not satisfactory for a watch that had just been +put in order and all pivots were examined for close +end or side shake; they were found to be satisfactory +and the mainspring was removed for examination +and found to be somewhat set and about +0.01 mm. thinner than those generally used for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span> +this grade watch. A new mainspring was fitted +and the motion was improved by about one-fourth +of a turn and the next position test showed a variation +of two seconds as per fourth column Fig. 19. +The time consumed in examination and changing +the mainspring was about twenty-five minutes.</p> + +<p>The three position limit of variation allowed by +most manufacturers and railroad inspectors is +seven seconds from one position to any other. +Records of thousands of watches on which the +work has been carefully done in putting the watches +in order, show that about seventy per cent of the +watches will rate within five seconds in the three +positions without making alterations and that only +ten per cent will be close to the limit of seven seconds, +while about twenty per cent will require alterations +such as shown in the four examples above. +(See Chapter XII, No. 60.)</p> + +<p>One or two more examples might be introduced +to show variations and corrections between dial +up and dial down; this feature has been pretty +well covered however in Chapter XI, and five position +example No. 9 also shows a variation of the +horizontal rates with correction.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE +FIVE POSITION ALTERATIONS +AND LABOR UTILIZED</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec66." id="sec66.">66.</a><i>What Five Position Adjusting Consists of—Detailed Allowances.</i></h5> + +<p>Five position adjusting consists of a further +refinement of the condition of the watch. The +fact that a very close rate is shown in the first +three positions is not an indication that the watch +will be an excellent timepiece under all conditions.</p> + +<p>In fact there are instances where there may be +an excellent three position rate and a further test +in the pendant right and left positions may disclose +some error that would positively prevent close +timing in service. Even under the five position +test the limit of allowance must be reasonably close +or unfavorable conditions may exist and cause +irregularity in timing.</p> + +<p>A popular allowance for very fine watches among +Swiss and some American manufacturers is six +seconds variation for the five positions as an extreme +limit, and for medium high grades ten seconds extreme +variation is considered a fair allowance. +These allowances are graduated, however, and a six +seconds extreme allowance watch would have an +allowance not exceeding three seconds in the horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional in the +pendant up position and one second additional in +either the pendant right or pendant left positions.</p> + +<p>Watches having an extreme allowance of ten +seconds may be permitted to have not more than +five seconds variation between the two horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional for the pen<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span>dant +up position and still three seconds additional in +either the pendant right or left positions.</p> + +<p>It will be noted that there is considerable difference +between six or ten second allowances of this +description and straight limits of six or ten seconds.</p> + +<p>Some manufacturers have greater limits of allowance, +sometimes as great as twenty-five seconds for +the five positions, but as a rule the first three positions +are required to rate within seven seconds and +the difference of eighteen seconds is divided between +the right and left positions.</p> + +<p>Under limits of this description a watch that +would not be tolerated under the six or ten seconds +class would be considered as good. Watches +having such large allowances, however, and rating +close to the limit are hardly justified in being considered +as adjusted to five positions. The fact +that they are so considered however, is the reason +why watchmakers will sometimes fine wide variation +in new watches before they have been damaged or +mishandled. The following five position examples +were selected with the same care as were the three +position specimens and will be found to cover a +wide field of variation for comparison with rates +that the adjuster may desire to correct.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec67." id="sec67.">67.</a><i>Example No. 5.</i></h5> + +<p>Hamilton, No. 248027; Open Face, 21 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. New balance staff and cleaned. +The first test in five positions showed a variation +of twenty seconds as per second column Fig. 20. +It will be noted that in four of the positions the +rate was quite close and that the pendant right +position had an extremely fast rate.</p> + +<p>A casual investigation indicated that all points +relating to the spring, regulator pins and balance +were reasonably satisfactory but that there was a +slight falling off in motion in the pendant right position. +Further investigation of this feature disclosed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> +a slight striking sound when the watch was held to +the ear in this position. The dial was removed and +the bankings were closed to drop whereupon it was +discovered that the fork was long on the inside, or +when the receiving stone was locked on the escape +teeth. This prevented the roller jewel from passing +through the fork freely as it did on the opposite +side.</p> + +<p>The balance pivots had the limit of allowance +for side shake which aided the cause of the roller +jewel in striking.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 20"><caption><b>Fig. 20</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...248027........... Make...Hamilton........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 3</td><td align="left">+ 3</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left">+22</td><td align="left">+18</td><td align="left">+12</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">+20</td><td align="left">- 2</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">- 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 20</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 8</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>After correcting the roller jewel shake and readjusting +the slide and guard pin freedom the next +test showed a variation of eight seconds in the five +positions as per fourth column Fig. 20. The side +shake of the balance pivots was not detrimental +after the real cause of the variation had been removed +and therefore no correction was required +in this respect.</p> + +<p>If the error in the escapement had not existed +and if the watch had shown the same rate with all +points appearing to be satisfactory, the trouble +would most likely have been found in the poise of +balance with the upper side heavy in the pendant +right position.</p> + +<p>The time consumed in making the correction was +about one half hour.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p> + + +<h5><a name="sec68." id="sec68.">68.</a><i>Example No. 6.</i></h5> + +<p>Elgin. B. W. Raymond. No. 4,109,543, Open +Face, 15 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. New fourth pinion; new end +stone; mainspring; refinished balance pivots and +cleaned. Note that this was only a 15-Jewel watch.</p> + +<p>It belonged to a railroad engineer, however, who +wanted it placed in first class condition, as it had +not been satisfactory. The first five position test +showed an error of twenty-four seconds as per second +column Fig. 21.</p> + +<p>Examination of the motion, pivots, regulator +pins, escapement and poise proved them to be satisfactory.</p> + +<p>The hairspring however, was found to be pinned +at the slow pendant up point as per illustration in +Fig. 22.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 21"><caption><b>Fig. 21</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...248027........... Make...Hamilton........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">+16</td><td align="left">+ 8</td><td align="left">+ 3</td><td align="left">+ 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">-16</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">- 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">- 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">- 5</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 24</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 7</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>The alteration made was to break out one-half +of the inner coil at collet so that it was pinned at +the fast point as illustrated in Fig. 23.</p> + +<p>A pair of balance screws were removed and a +heavier pair fitted to correct the mean time, which +would have been about ten minutes fast in twenty-four +hours because of shortening the spring.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span></p> + +<p>The balance was repoised and the next test in +positions showed a variation of seven seconds as +per fourth column Fig. 21.</p> + +<p>The time required for making the alteration was +about one half hour.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 252px;"> +<img src="images/i093.png" width="252" height="600" alt="Fig. 22-23" title="Fig. 22-23" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 22-23</span> +</div> + +<p>This watch was a full plate model with the train +developing to the left from the center and illustra<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span>tions +No. 22 and 23 are given to show that, while +the train follows the Swiss development, the spring +follows the American method and develops to the +right from the collet even though it is located to the +left of the watch center. The principle remains +the same as that illustrated by Figs. 9 and 11 and +explained in Chapter VIII.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec69." id="sec69.">69.</a><i>Example No. 7.</i></h5> + +<p>Waltham. No. 10504112. Open Face, Vanguard +model, 23 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. Cleaned and new hole jewel.</p> + +<p>First five position test showed a very erratic rate +as per second column Fig. 24.</p> + +<p>Investigation proved that the motion dropped off +considerably after a few hours run and that the +mainspring was too weak for this grade of watch. +A proper mainspring was fitted which in turn corrected +the motion, but the next test in positions +proved that there was still a variation of eighteen +seconds as per fourth column Fig. 24.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 24"><caption><b>Fig. 24</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...10504112......... Make...Waltham.........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">- 2</td><td align="left">- 2</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">- 3</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left"> 0</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">-21</td><td align="left">-16</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">- 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">-10</td><td align="left">-19</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">- 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">+16</td><td align="left">+12</td><td align="left">-25</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">- 3</td><td align="left">+ 2</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 24</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 18</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 5</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>The balance and spring were removed and considerable +poise trouble was discovered. The trouble +was at different points of the balance and no one location +seemed to be heavy at all times. The balance +pivots were carefully gauged with a metric<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> +micrometer and found to be out of round, or to be +exact, more oval in form than cylindrical. A new +staff with round pivots was fitted, after which the +balance was easily poised and the next test showed a +variation of five seconds as per sixth column Fig. 24. +The total time required for making the examination +and alterations was about one hour.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec70." id="sec70.">70.</a><i>Example No. 8.</i></h5> + +<p>Vacheron and Constantin. No. 272,854, Open +Face, 21 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. New balance staff, hole jewel, +cap jewel, glass, and cleaned.</p> + +<p>The first test after making the repairs showed a +variation of twelve seconds as per second column +Fig. 25.</p> + +<p>It will be observed that the rates in the horizontal +positions are on the fast side and those in the vertical +positions are on the slow side. In this instance the +hairspring developed to the left from the collet +similar to the illustration shown in Fig. 10, page 45.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 25"><caption><b>Fig. 25</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...272854........... Make...V. & C. ........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">+ 5</td><td align="left">+ 3</td><td align="left">- 8</td><td align="left">- 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">-14</td><td align="left">- 6</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left">- 8</td><td align="left">- 7</td><td align="left">-21</td><td align="left">- 7</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">-17</td><td align="left">- 9</td><td align="left">-15</td><td align="left">- 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 12</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 3</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>Investigation found the escapement, regulator +pins and pinning point satisfactory; the motion was +one and one-fourth turn in the vertical positions +when fully wound and only a trifle less when partially +let down. In the flat positions, however, the motion +was very little better than in the vertical, which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> +indicated either pivot or end stone trouble as under +normal conditions the flat motion would be about +one-fourth turn greater than that of the vertical.</p> + +<p>Inspection of the end stones proved that they +were satisfactory but the ends of the balance pivots +were found to be somewhat flat and not perfectly +polished.</p> + +<p>The ends of the pivots were slightly rounded and +highly polished, the jewels and end stones cleaned +and reoiled and the balance replaced, after which +the motion in the flat positions was one and one-half +turn with the mainspring fully wound and only +slightly less when partially let down.</p> + +<p>The motion in the vertical positions was also +slightly improved and the next test in position +showed a variation of three seconds as per fourth +column Fig. 25.</p> + +<p>Time required for making the above alteration +was about one-half hour.</p> + +<p>In the study of this example it should be clearly +understood that when the ends of balance pivots +are flat, burred or not well polished, or when the +end stones are dry or dirty the motion in the horizontal +positions will be shorter than normal and +this will always cause the rate to be faster than it +should be. Acceleration of the motion in such instances +by means of refinishing the pivot ends or by +cleaning and reoiling the jewels and end stones will +always produce a slower rate through causing a +longer arc of motion.</p> + +<p>This point is covered in Chapter XI, No. 47.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec71." id="sec71.">71.</a><i>Example No. 9.</i></h5> + +<p>E. Howard. No. 1,116,735. Open Face, 23 +Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. New balance staff; hole jewel; +mainspring and cleaned.</p> + +<p>The first test in positions showed a variation of +eleven seconds. The rate in all positions was fast<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> +with the exception of the dial down rate, which was +slow. See Fig. 26.</p> + +<p>At first glance it might appear that by causing a +faster rate of six or seven seconds in the dial down +position the watch would have a very good rate. +This, however, would not be consistent unless the +rate was due to the exception referred to in Chapter +XI, No. 50.</p> + +<p>Examination of the motion in the horizontal +positions proved that it was about one fourth turn +better in the dial down position than it was in the +dial up position which rate compared very closely +with the vertical positions. It was therefore evident +that the dial up rate was not true and investigation +found the oil in the upper jewel had become +thickened by the entrance of dirt which caused +the short motion and fast rate when the balance was +running on this end stone.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 26"><caption><b>Fig. 26</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...1116735.......... Make...E. Howard.......</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">- 3</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">-10</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+ 1</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+ 9</td><td align="left">+ 5</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left">+ 7</td><td align="left">+ 6</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">+ 6</td><td align="left">+10</td><td align="left">+ 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">+ 9</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+ 2</td><td align="left">+14</td><td align="left">+ 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 11</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 11</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> 4</td></tr> +</table></div> + +<p>After thoroughly cleaning the jewel, end stone +and pivot, the motion in the dial up position was improved +and equaled that of the dial down position.</p> + +<p>The next position test showed the horizontal +rates to be equal but the variation of eleven seconds +in the five positions still existed as per fourth column +Fig. 26. The vertical rates were all fast compared +to the horizontal; the regulator pins were found to +be slightly open which prevented a correction at +this point. The locking of the escapement was ex<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span>amined +and found to be satisfactory, so the balance +was again removed and tested for poise which was +also found satisfactory.</p> + +<p>The hairspring was pinned at the usual fast +point as per illustration in Fig. 9, Chapter VIII. +The most positive alteration to be made under the +circumstances was to break off the spring at the +collet and repin it at about 45° above the horizontal +line. This would be slightly approaching the slow +point as explained in detail in Chapter VIII, No. 35.</p> + +<p>The mean rate of the watch would necessarily be +faster after shortening the spring; the mean time +screws were found to be turned in close to the rim +and were each turned out about one full turn to +compensate for the gain. The poise was tested and +found to remain correct and the next position test +showed a variation of four seconds as per sixth +column Fig. 26.</p> + +<p>The total time required for the alterations was +about one hour.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec72." id="sec72.">72.</a><i>Example No. 10.</i></h5> + +<p>Illinois. No. 1,483,023, Open Face, 21 Jewels.</p> + +<p>Repairs made. Trued and poised balance, new +balance jewel and cleaned.</p> + +<p>This example has been selected for the purpose of +illustrating a test in the sixth or pendant down position +and to give a practical demonstration showing +that the rates in the pendant down and pendant +up positions can be reversed, with positive results, +through reversing the collet pinning point of the +spring, as covered in "Relative Pinning Points" +Chapter VIII.</p> + +<p>This alteration can be undertaken with assurance +of results even though there may be serious errors +of construction in the watch.</p> + +<p>The first five position test proved that the rate +pendant up was extremely fast compared to all +other rates as per second column Fig. 27.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span></p> + +<p>Investigation proved that the hairspring was +properly centered and pinned at the fast pendant +point and that the regulator pins were slightly spread +with equal vibration of the coil between +them. The motion was about one and one-fourth +turn pendant up and over one and one-half turn in +the horizontal positions when the mainspring was +nearly full wound. The ends of balance pivots +were found to be perfectly flat, which was no doubt +due to an effort to produce a faster rate in the flat +positions to cause them to compare more favorably +with the pendant up rate. This, however, was unsuccessful +as indicated by the rate.</p> + +<p>It is quite possible that if the watch ever was +closely rated it was due to counterpoise of the balance +as with the present rate the poise, escapement +and regulator pins were satisfactory and did not +admit of further corrections that would be of advantage.</p> + +<p>By examining the P. U. rate in second column +Fig. 27, it will be found to be twelve seconds fast +and then by referring to the separate P. D. (Pendant +Down) rate at the bottom, it will be found to be four +seconds slow. Adding these figures gives a total variation +of sixteen seconds between these two positions.</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Fig. 27"><caption><b>Fig. 27</b></caption> +<tr><th colspan="8">No. ...1483023.......... Make...Illinois........</th></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D U</td><td align="left">- 3</td><td align="left">- 3</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td align="left">- 1</td><td rowspan="5">P</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> D D</td><td align="left">- 8</td><td align="left">- 5</td><td align="left">- 2</td><td align="left">- 1</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P U</td><td align="left">+ 4</td><td align="left">+12</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">- 4</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P R</td><td align="left"> 0</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left">+ 2</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> P L</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">- 6</td><td align="left">- 7</td><td align="left">- 3</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"> </td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left">- 4</td><td align="left"> </td><td align="left">+11</td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<p>Now if these rates were reversed and the P. D. +rate was in the place of the P. U. rate the watch<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> +would have shown a very good position rate in the +first five positions and the greater part of the sixteen +seconds variation would have been in the pendant +down position where it would be of the least disadvantage. +In order to obtain this condition the +collet pinning point was changed from the fast to +the slow point, or from "E", Fig. 9, to "G", Fig. 11, +Chapter VIII.</p> + +<p>A pair of heavier screws were fitted to the balance +to compensate for the difference in time caused by +shortening the spring and the next five position test +showed a variation of six seconds. A separate pendant +down test proved that the pendant up and +pendant down rates had been practically reversed +as shown in the fourth column.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec73." id="sec73.">73.</a><i>Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates.</i></h5> + +<p>Extremely fast pendant up rates are not particularly +unusual, although the causes and corrections +may be widely different.</p> + +<p>For instance, the poise and motion feature, No. +28, Chapter VII, may be responsible, or the balance +may be in poise and the collet having a wide slot +may cause out of poise and be responsible if the +slot is located at the proper point. A defective +escapement or regulator pins tightly closed may +also be responsible. Should these points be found +satisfactory, however, the rate is generally due to +one of three causes.</p> + +<p>1. Excessive side friction of pivots because of +being too large in diameter.</p> + +<p>2. Train wheels and pinions being of incorrect +proportion and causing irregular motion and affecting +the vertical positions mostly.</p> + +<p>3. Centrifugal force, which would cause the +balance rims to spring outward in the longer arcs +of vibration and thereby produce an abnormal +slow rate in the horizontal positions where the arc<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> +of motion is always longest. This is due to the +balance rims being too heavy in proportion to the +arms or center bar.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>When either of these three conditions are found +there will be others among the same lot of watches, +but as a rule they are only found on older watches +made before correct proportions were firmly established.</p> + +<p>Train depthings can often be improved if the +workman is equipped with a rounding up machine +and knows how to use it. Otherwise the watch +can be sent to the factory for correction and the +only alternative of the repairer is to cut the spring +to the slow point, or counterpoise, with the intention +of eliminating expense and getting as good results +as can be expected for the financial returns +that are to be received.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec74." id="sec74.">74.</a><i>How to Locate Defective Gearings.</i></h5> + +<p>Defective gear or depthing of wheels can be detected +in two ways, one by observing the engaging +surfaces of the wheel teeth and another by testing +the engagement of wheel and pinion.</p> + +<p>If the gearing is correct, observation will show that +the engaging surfaces of the wheel teeth are smooth +and either dark or possibly polished from wearing +away of the plating. If the gearings are not correct +the engaging surfaces will have cuts or ridges +crosswise which have been produced by the pinion +leaves.</p> + +<p>The cause of this cutting is due to either a faulty +construction of the teeth or to the fact that the +pitch circle of the wheel is too small while that of +the pinion is too large.</p> + +<p>Testing the gearing in the watch is accomplished +by placing the engaging wheel and pinion in the +watch so that they are free to turn without engaging +with any other wheel. A piece of ivory or celluloid +several inches long and about the diameter of a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> +piece of peg wood should be pointed at one end +and this end should be held between the upper +pivot and oil cup of the jewel, with enough pressure +of the left hand to cause friction in turning the +pinion. The larger wheel should then be turned in +the direction in which it revolves when running; +this is accomplished with a piece of peg wood held +in the right hand.</p> + +<p>If the gearing is perfect there will be smoothness +as the wheel and pinion turn and if it is imperfect +there will be a butting effect in the action. Should +there be a slight intermittent stepping action due to +drop of the wheel teeth on the pinion leaves it +should not be mistaken for butting as this is not +detrimental and will not cause cutting of the teeth.</p> + +<p>Watches that have below standard train gearings +require considerably stronger mainsprings than +do those which have correct gearing and they will +seldom take a reasonably good motion without a +strong spring.</p> + +<p>A safe way to judge gearings if in doubt is by +the motion and the engaging surfaces of the wheel +teeth. If the motion is steady and the teeth are +not cut by the pinion leaves they may be considered +as satisfactory. If the motion is steady for a time +and then suddenly drops off there is generally something +wrong in the gearing. The wheel and pinion +in error can be determined by noting at what particular +intervals the motion decreases. In nearly +all instances this condition will cause a gaining rate +in the vertical positions because of the fact that the +vertical arcs are shorter and comparatively more +easily affected than the horizontal arcs.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>TIMING AND FINAL REGULATION</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec75." id="sec75.">75.</a><i>Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers.</i></h5> + +<p>In the general overhauling of watches, changing +staffs, retruing and repoising of balances it +is often necessary to make corrections of several +minutes per day in the mean time.</p> + +<p>For this reason and for the convenience of the +future some manufacturers have provided from two +to four mean time screws in the balances. A complete +revolution of these screws either in or out, +generally corrects any variation that may be required +and frequently considerably less is all that +is required in bringing the watch to time.</p> + +<p>It is of course necessary that these screws be +turned in opposite pairs as well as equal distances +and that they be fitted with enough friction to +prevent looseness and not too tight to cause bending +of the pivots when they are turned.</p> + +<p>If properly used for the purpose for which they +were intended they are of inestimable value to the +repairing fraternity in producing results.</p> + +<p>The manufacturers of some watches do not supply +mean time screws with the balances and the repairer +is obliged to depend entirely upon timing +washers for fast corrections, for it is, of course, not to +be expected that repair shops will carry an assortment +of all different kinds of screws such as the +factories are able to maintain.</p> + +<p>Occasionally a jeweler or watchmaker will be +found who has strenuous objections to the use of +timing washers in any sense, but unless they are +supplied with a large assortment of the various +makes and weights of screws and are willing to use<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span> +the extra time required for properly changing the +screws it is difficult to see just what legitimate +alternative they can adopt. Investigation of this +point disclosed the fact that the method employed +by some watchmakers was to spread the regulator +pins, which would of course make the mean time +slower but would certainly destroy the adjustment +to positions and make it practically impossible to +obtain results from the regulator.</p> + +<p>It is admittedly poor workmanship to use ill-fitting +washers and poor taste to use brass washers +on high grade gold screw balances, but the fact +should not be overlooked that the manufacturers of +many fine watches use washers to a limited extent, +even when an abundance of balance screws are available +and very fine Swiss models are often supplied +with a pair of thin platinum washers which are not +easily detected. The regulator should not be moved +from the center of the index in correcting the mean +time but should be used for minor final regulation +only. The length of the hairspring should also +not be disturbed in correcting the mean time of an +adjusted watch and while a slow rate can be corrected +by reducing the weight of a pair of balance +screws it is necessary to use either heavier screws +or washers for correcting a fast rate.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec76." id="sec76.">76.</a><i>Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator.</i></h5> + +<p>Final regulation of watches is necessary after +making repairs regardless as to whether they have +been adjusted to positions or not. Position rating +does not necessarily suggest that the timing has been +completed as the object is only to limit the variations +from one position to any other and a test of +three or four days should always be made in one +position after the position rating has been completed. +This additional timing has for its purpose the close +regulation of the watch either in the pendant up +position or in the position it is carried. The last +column on the rate card is reserved for this purpose.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> +In this respect the repairer who comes in contact +with the customer may gain considerable advantage +by noting in which pocket the watch is usually +carried and then being guided in the final regulation +by this knowledge. The method of doing this +regulating consists generally of moving the regulator +which requires certain attention to be effective +when it is moved.</p> + +<p>The regulator should be carefully fitted around +the dome and all attachments in connection should +be tightly fitted to the plate or bridge so that they +will remain rigid when regulation takes place.</p> + +<p>The tension around the dome should be even and +if a tension spring is used in connection it should +be strong enough to keep the regulator against the +screw constantly without sticking at any point as +the screw is moved forward and backward.</p> + +<p>It should also be closely examined to see that +there is no shake. This can be determined by +lightly taking hold of the segment holding the +regulator pins and moving it up and down and side +ways before the tension spring is fitted. This should +be examined with a glass and a correction made if +any looseness is noted.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec77." id="sec77.">77.</a><i>Effect of the Middle Temperature Error.</i></h5> + +<p>In the final regulation of watches it is important +that the middle temperature error receive due consideration. +This error is always a few seconds fast +as explained in temperature adjusting Chapter V, +No. 21, and is of some consequence in the larger +number of complaints regarding losing rates in the +pocket, compared to complaints of gaining rates.</p> + +<p>The position rating as well as the final regulation +is generally done in normal temperature which +produces a rate from two to four seconds faster than +the heat extreme and it is to be expected that the +pocket rate will be slower because the temperature +will be higher than normal. This loss may not be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> +the full amount of the middle error as it would depend +upon the actual temperature encountered for +the entire twenty-four hours and the watch may +only be subjected to the pocket temperature for a +part of this period. This works in exactly the same +way in a lower temperature, as the variation is a +loss in either direction from the middle or normal +temperature and in case that the watch should be +subjected to a freezing temperature at night the +result will be a loss during that period.</p> + +<p>As an example we will assume the regulation of a +watch in which the temperature rate at the extremes +of 40° and 90° Fahr. is perfect, while at the temperature +of 70° it will time four seconds fast.</p> + +<p>Now if this watch is regulated to no variation in +the normal temperature it will be plainly seen that +there will be a loss of four seconds per day if the +watch is placed in service at either of the temperature +extremes. If it had been regulated to run four +seconds fast in the middle or normal temperature +it would time more nearly correct in the pocket.</p> + +<p>It is safe to assume that the watch will lose its +proportional rate with a lesser change in temperature +and for this reason it is of advantage to finally +regulate all watches from two to four seconds fast +in the rack rather than to time them just correct.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec78." id="sec78.">78.</a><i>Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates.</i></h5> + +<p>There are additional reasons for the suggestion of +timing watches a few seconds fast rather than just +correct. Among them may be mentioned the fact +that many watches are carried in the left vest pocket, +and that in this instance they very often assume +the pendant right position which is generally a +trifle slow compared to pendant up in most watches +of close adjustment. Magnetism to any extent whatever +always causes a slow rate and this will have its +effect whenever the balance, hairspring, regulator, +regulator spring or pallet are slightly effected or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> +when the mainspring, large winding wheels or case +springs are considerably charged and experiments +have shown that in no instance has a fast rate been +produced from this cause.</p> + +<p>The gradual weakening or loss of elastic force +of the hairspring is also a factor to be considered.</p> + +<p>There are some influences which cause a gaining +rate that to some extent may offset these losses, although +in the absence of necessity for cleaning or +other repairs these influences are slight in comparison +to the natural and possible causes for a slow rate.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span></p> + + + + + +<h3>PART III<br /> +<br /> +SPECIAL NOTES</h3> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>SPECIAL NOTES</h3> + + +<h5><a name="sec79." id="sec79.">79.</a><i>Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples).</i></h5> + +<p>In performance of the various alterations and +corrections that have been touched upon in +the chapters devoted to position adjusting there +are some points that deserve special note. This +refers to positive execution of the correction which +the watchmaker sets out to make.</p> + +<p>As an example we may analyze the simple feature +of polishing a pivot and cleaning and reoiling a jewel +to improve the motion in one of the horizontal +positions. Ordinarily this would seem to be a very +simple proceeding requiring no additional remarks.</p> + +<p>It is, however, quite possible to go through all of +the operations of removing, cleaning and reoiling +the jewel and polishing the pivot and then find that +no improvement has been made in the motion.</p> + +<p>Invariably the workman of moderate experience +will say that he has just cleaned and reoiled the +jewel and polished the pivot and that it must be +all right.</p> + +<p>Investigation, however, will sometimes show that +the pivot has again been marred or that a particle +of dirt has found its way into the jewel hole during +replacement either through dust in the oil or through +clinging to the end of the pivot when the balance was +laying on the bench.</p> + +<p>This experience is one that comes occasionally to +the best and most careful adjusters and if it is +found that results have not been obtained the first +time it will be necessary to go over the operations a +second time.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p> + +<p>It is possible to almost entirely eliminate this +duplication of work if proper care is exercised in +examining the pivot and jewel with a good glass +before replacing and in using oil from a closed receptacle +in which it has not been possible for dust +to collect.</p> + +<p>The point raised in this instance is that the improvement +desired is not assured because of merely +going through the operations of doing the work.</p> + +<p>It is necessary to actually remove the cause and +then keep it removed. The proof is found in the +improved motion and it would hardly be worth +while to retest in positions until this improvement +was obtained.</p> + +<p>Proper curvature of the over coil within the range +of the regulator pins is another feature that may be +corrected and the correction unconsciously destroyed +in replacing the balance or in centering the +spring.</p> + +<p>A slight kink in the coil close to the regulator pins +may cause the spring to be forced out of center +when the regulator is moved, or it may cause the +coil to lay against one pin and cease vibrating between +the pins. This would cause a gain of some +seconds per day when the regulator had actually +been moved to cause a slower rate.</p> + +<p>These two examples are introduced to convey +the idea that it is necessary to actually produce the +corrections or alterations in any instance and that +close timing and close position rates depend more +upon this practical execution and understanding as +displayed by the watch repairer than they do upon +a high degree of technical knowledge.</p> + +<p>Personal instruction of watchmakers in adjusting +has demonstrated in most instances that the refinements +are not considered seriously enough at +first, but that consistent practice and reference to +the rules soon make the proper impression, after +which results are attained in less time than was at +first required for faulty execution.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p> + + +<h5><a name="sec80." id="sec80.">80.</a><i>Truing the Balance.</i></h5> + +<p>The balance should invariably be true in the +round and flat and always in poise before it is placed +in the watch.</p> + +<p>It is at times pardonable to pass a balance that is +not perfectly true in the round, especially when the +watch has been repaired on several occasions and it +is noted that the rims have a tendency to become +set slightly inward or outward after having been +perfectly trued. This shows a natural tendency +of the metals to find a permanent position which +may be slightly away from the true concentric +form. A balance of this description may be poised +as it is and often will produce better timing results +than would be gained by perfect truing and +subsequent regulation during readjustment of the +metals.</p> + +<p>It is advisable to always have the flat true as by +doing so any slightly bent pivots will be detected +through wavering of the balance and the flat is not +very frequently affected by setting of the metals.</p> + +<p>Balances should generally be trued and poised in +normal or slightly above normal temperature. If +they are trued in a low temperature they will be +out of true and possibly out of poise in the temperature +to which they are mostly subjected. +Compensation balances are not presumed to be +true in the round under variations of temperature +and therefore inspection for true is necessary in +somewhere near the same temperature in which +they are trued.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec81." id="sec81.">81.</a><i>Poising the Balance.</i></h5> + +<p>In poising balances it is necessary to consider +the mean rate of the watch and several details in +connection therewith.</p> + +<p>If the rate is known to be fast, weight should be +added to the light side, and if it is known to be slow +weight may be removed from the heavy side.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p> + +<p>If the rims of the balance have been trued outward +it is a safe rule to remove weight from the +heavy side in poising and if they have been bent +inward to get the balance true, weight should be +added to the light side in poising.</p> + +<p>A balance that is in perfect poise can be brought +to a perfect stop on a fine jeweled poising tool at +any point of its circumference. For ordinary work +it is generally considered as satisfactory if it can be +brought to a perfect stop at each of the four quarters. +When the heavy point seems to be first at one place +and then just opposite it is proof that either a pivot +is bent or oval in form instead of round.</p> + +<p>In some instances balances will be found to +swing slightly and stop at several different places. +This is usually an indication that there are several +flat places on one or both pivots and if the watch +is a fine one the staff will require changing or the +pivots may be rounded up on a Jacot Lathe. A +fine edge jeweled poising tool is best for fine work +as defects in pivots and variations in poise can be +more easily discovered than with calipers.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec82." id="sec82.">82.</a><i>Truing Hairsprings.</i></h5> + +<p>Original truing of the hairspring is made necessary +by the fact of attaching the collet to its center. +When springs are turned out by the manufacturer +they are perfectly true, that is, the coils are level +and perfectly spiral in form and the deviation from +this spiral form, made necessary in attaching the +collet, is what demands certain forming of the inner +terminal so that it will blend with the other coils of +the spring which have not been disturbed.</p> + +<p>In attaching the collet it is first necessary to have +the spring level before the pin is forced tightly in +place. This can be fairly well determined by +sighting across the flat of the spring and focusing +upon the inner coil to see that it is level for at least +one half of its length from the point of exit. After<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> +this operation has been completed and the pin has +been set up tight, with the surplus ends cut off +flush with the collet it will be necessary to slightly +pull the coil up or down, providing it is not perfectly +level. The next operation will be that of truing +the round and all work and bending of the spring +for this operation is concentrated within the first +quarter of the coil from its point of attachment and +it is seldom ever necessary to make any bends +beyond the first eighth of the coil from the attached +point.</p> + +<p>Figure 28 may be of some value in gaining an +idea as to just how this inner coil should appear +when it has been trued.</p> + +<p>The broken lines illustrate a condition after colleting +and before truing. The heavy lines illustrate +two positions into either of which the coil may be +formed in getting the spring true.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 400px;"> +<img src="images/i115.png" width="400" height="376" alt="Fig. 28" title="Fig. 28" /> +<span class="caption">Fig. 28</span> +</div> + +<p>The outer black line shows the most adaptable +form for most instances. The inner black line +shows the most practical form for use in instances +where there is unusual space between the collet +and the inner coil. It will be noted that these two +forms blend into the true spiral form of the spring +at about one-eighth of the coil distant from the +collet. These forms may be used as a basis for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> +truing the spring in any instance in which it has +been bent or mishandled around the collet after +its original truing.</p> + +<p>Experts always true springs after they have been +staked to the balance and a light weight calipers +tapered on one end to a smaller diameter than the +collet is used for spinning the balance, making +observations, and corrections.</p> + +<p>Considerable progress can be made by some watchmakers +in removing the spring from the balance +and placing it on a colleting tool or tapered broach +and then truing the flat and round as good as possible, +after which it should be perfected in the +calipers. When the balance is spinning in the +calipers and the spring is true in the flat there +will be no jumping or quivering of the coils as +observation is made across the top of the inner four +or five coils.</p> + +<p>When it is perfectly true in the round and the +balance is spinning in one direction the coils will +seem to be whirling into a hole of which the collet +is the center. When spinning the balance in the +opposite direction the effect of the coils will be +similar to the waves produced by dropping a small +stone in still water and they will appear to be +whirling away from the center. This effect in both +instances is caused by the eye following the spiral +form of the coils as the spring revolves.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec83." id="sec83.">83.</a><i>Treating a Rusty Hairspring.</i></h5> + +<p>When rust begins its attack upon any point of a +hairspring there will be a constant loss in time until +its advance is stopped.</p> + +<p>Should considerable headway have been made by +the rust before the watchmaker's attention is enlisted +for an examination it may be necessary to +change the spring entirely before good results can +again be obtained.</p> + +<p>There are many instances, however, in which +proper care at the right time will produce as good +results as will a new spring.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p> + +<p>The first appearance of rust is generally indicated +by one or more spots of a light brown shade and in +such instances it has hardly attacked the metal to +any serious extent, although usually enough to cause +a slightly losing rate. At this stage the spots may +be scraped with a piece of peg wood after which the +spring can be placed in a small copper pan containing +lard oil to a depth of about one-fourth inch.</p> + +<p>This pan should then be held over an alcohol lamp +until the oil becomes hot enough to smoke, after +which the spring should be removed, immersed in +benzine for about thirty seconds and then dried in +sawdust. This treatment will stop further rust +and the only indication of previous rust may be a +removal of the color from the spot which had been +affected.</p> + +<p>In case that the rust has reached a stage far +enough advanced to seriously pit the metal, good +results cannot be expected from the spring even +though further rusting may be prevented.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec84." id="sec84.">84.</a><i>Stopping by Escapement Locking When Hands +are Set Backward, or When Watch Receives a Jar.</i></h5> + +<p>This is sometimes a very annoying trouble and +while it should not occur on high grade watches at +all, it does show up just often enough to cause a +certain degree of unpleasantness for the owner of +the watch as well as for the watchmaker.</p> + +<p>There are two principal causes for the difficulty. +One is due to the back of discharging pallet stone +having a very sharp corner combined with a +slightly rough edge on the back of the escape wheel +teeth and when the two factors meet with some +slight force, such as is caused by reversal of the train +wheels the sharp corner of the stone wedges itself +into the rough surface of the tooth and holds until +pulled away by some small instrument. This can +be remedied by removing the sharp edge of the +stone on a diamond charged polishing lap and a +very slight correction is sufficient.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p> + +<p>The second principal cause is due to sharp edges +on the roller jewel. First quality roller jewels +always have these edges rounded, as otherwise they +may wedge into the horn of the fork and often will +not release through ordinary shaking of the watch.</p> + +<p>A short guard pin can also cause the trouble by +allowing the roller jewel to catch on the end of the +fork horn before it enters, or the guard pin may +catch on the edge of the crescent on the safety roller, +but the two causes mentioned above will allow +"hanging up" even when the guard pin, roller jewel +and all other shakes are correct.</p> + +<p>When the above conditions are correct and all +setting connections are properly fitted, the hands +may be set either forward or backward without in +any way disturbing the time. There are instances, +however, where the watch will stop when the hands +are reversed and at times the second hand will actually +turn backward although the watch will immediately +begin to run as soon as the backward +pressure on the hands is discontinued.</p> + +<p>This is caused by the cannon pinion being so +tightly fitted that turning it backward will require +more force than that which is supplied by the +mainspring. A condition of this description is +more pronounced when the mainspring is nearly +run down and sometimes it will happen at such +times and will not occur when the spring is fully +wound.</p> + + +<h5><a name="sec85." id="sec85.">85.</a><i>Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches.</i></h5> + +<p>It would be difficult to suggest a best method for +general cleaning of watches. Different watchmakers +have different methods and good results are attained +in more than one way. Whatever the method, however, +there are certain definite requirements that are +fundamental.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p> + +<p>Among these are the thorough cleansing of pivots, +jewels, pinion leaves, wheel teeth, mainspring and +winding parts.</p> + +<p>It is not sufficient to depend upon routine and +simply dip the parts in various solutions, brush and +reassemble the watch. There are many instances +in which the oil becomes gummy and sticks to the +jewels and pivots to such an extent that peg wood +and pith must be applied with considerable energy +to obtain perfectly clean surfaces and holes.</p> + +<p>The essential feature is that of actually +removing every particle of dirt from the contact +surface.</p> + +<p>It is not essential that the plate and bridges +should have a high lustre, as this does not facilitate +the running. If it is desired and if facilities are +available, the plates and bridges may be dipped in +benzine and dried in sawdust, then washed and +brushed in a solution of hot water, borax and castile +soap, then rinsed in fresh water, dipped in alcohol +and dried in sawdust. This produces a lustre to +the plate bridges and wheels. When it is not convenient +to use hot water the parts may be dipped and +brushed in benzine for at least one minute and dried +in sawdust, then dipped in alcohol and again dried in +sawdust. In either event thorough pegging and +pithing of the jewels, pivot holes and pivots is +necessary as well as brushing and examining all +wheel teeth and pinion leaves. The steel parts +should be examined and gummy oil eliminated. +Fresh oil should be applied in proper quantities +in the proper places. This requires some study, as +either too much or too little oil is detrimental.</p> + +<p>When a watch is cleaned annually by the same +workman it is not necessary that the mainspring +be removed and reoiled each time, for a mainspring +properly oiled will last for two or three years before +requiring cleaning and reoiling.</p> + +<p>It is well known that mainsprings frequently +break shortly after being removed and cleaned and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> +this annoyance may be avoided in many instances +by intelligent use of this rule.</p> + +<p>Balances should not be dipped in acid solutions, as +the liquid gathers under the screws and will often +cause them to discolor in a short time. It is better +to polish them with fine rouge and cotton thread +arranged on a wire bow as the lustre will be more +lasting.</p> + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting +Watches, by Walter J. Kleinlein + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + +***** This file should be named 38340-h.htm or 38340-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/3/4/38340/ + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/38340-h/images/i023.png b/38340-h/images/i023.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5327f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i023.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i024.png b/38340-h/images/i024.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a179349 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i024.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i031.png b/38340-h/images/i031.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb90bcb --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i031.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i032.png b/38340-h/images/i032.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bb1beca --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i032.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i056.png b/38340-h/images/i056.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1366605 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i056.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i057a.png b/38340-h/images/i057a.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..573165e --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i057a.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i057b.png b/38340-h/images/i057b.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0a0168 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i057b.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i058.png b/38340-h/images/i058.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e37440 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i058.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i059a.png b/38340-h/images/i059a.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e6f691 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i059a.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i059b.png b/38340-h/images/i059b.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d984b55 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i059b.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i060.png b/38340-h/images/i060.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d89a6ff --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i060.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i061.png b/38340-h/images/i061.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7d4589 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i061.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i093.png b/38340-h/images/i093.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..02ad5d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i093.png diff --git a/38340-h/images/i115.png b/38340-h/images/i115.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ccc305 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340-h/images/i115.png diff --git a/38340.txt b/38340.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9347962 --- /dev/null +++ b/38340.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4112 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches, by +Walter J. Kleinlein + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Rules and Practice for Adjusting Watches + +Author: Walter J. Kleinlein + +Release Date: December 19, 2011 [EBook #38340] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + + + + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + + + + + + + RULES AND PRACTICE + FOR + Adjusting Watches + + BY + + WALTER J. KLEINLEIN + +AUTHOR OF "THE WATCH ADJUSTER AND HIS WORK" + + + Copyright, 1920, by Walter J. Kleinlein + + _All rights reserved_ + + + + +PREFACE + + +In the early days of horology the apprentice was taught the art of +making a complete watch. Production was slow, very few duplicate +watches were constructed, and it was necessary that extra material be +made individually by hand in the same way that the original part was +produced. As time passed the value of the repairer was indicated by +his ability to make new parts and to replace them so that the watch +would again be in running condition. This was the prevailing situation +for many years and the repairer was judged according to his skill in +making and finishing the various parts. + +A similar method of judging ability is still in force among some +employers, although the development of the industry into machine and +specialized work has made many changes in regard to the most important +duties of the repairer. + +It is no longer necessary for him to know how to make a complete watch +and only on occasional instances is it necessary for him to make a +part. Genuine material for modern watches is supplied by the +manufacturer at less expense than it can be produced by the individual +and in this particular branch of the work the repairer's requirements +have been very considerably curtailed. + +A more exacting and a higher standard of timekeeping has developed, +however, and in this field the requirements of the watchmaker have +increased to the extent that it is no longer sufficient to merely +restore a good watch to running condition. It must keep time. This +development has grown gradually and surely and the past twenty-five +years may be assumed as the period of greatest advance. + +It has been made possible by scientific and practical refinements +which permit the adjustment of watches so that they will keep time +within closely defined allowances under varying conditions. + +The larger problem of the successful repairer of today, therefore, is +that of understanding the principles governing close time and of +knowing how and where to look for the causes of variation, so that the +higher standard of timekeeping may be restored in case of damage since +the original adjustment. + +It is naturally essential to know when material is correct, how to +make it fit in its proper place, and how to make and finish some of +the individual parts. It is also commendable to be skilful in all +classes of lathe work, as this at times gains prestige for the workman +through restoring old model watches to running condition. + +It is, however, a disadvantage to develop one's ability in making +parts for watches of a bygone age and neglecting the training that +happens to be most essential and of daily advantage in repairing +modern watches so that they will keep time as consistently after +repairs have been made as they did when new. + +The object of this book is to present the essential points of watch +adjusting in an elementary and non-technical way that will interest +the average watchmaker and to enable him to have a convenient source +of information, covering the necessary refinements that are +fundamental in repairing, regulating and adjusting the better class of +watches. + +The author trusts that the experienced successful watchmaker will read +the book with interest and also with profit and that the novice will +be enabled to foresee that there is something more to the art of +watchmaking and repairing than that of merely assembling a watch and +making it "tick." + +It so happens that the author has had many years of experience in both +factories and repair shops and that a considerable part of his duties +have been devoted to instruction. + +He has for a long time felt the need of a book that would, above all +else, be practical in its description of the rules that an adjuster +follows and which would prove its value in actual experience by being +personal as far as permissible in the same sense that detailed shop +instruction would be. + +Since writing the article entitled "The Watch Adjuster and His Work" +several years ago numerous inquiries have been received, for this +class of information and the present book is an effort to meet this +demand in a manner that can be followed without highly technical or +theoretical education. + +To promote advancement and interest in everyday practical results is +the foremost consideration, and to this end definite means are +presented for personal development and for obtaining better results +from high grade watches than can possibly be obtained without a fair +knowledge of the final details which go so far toward assuring close +time. + + WALTER J. KLEINLEIN, + July 21, 1920 Waltham, Mass. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +PART I.--THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE + +CHAPTER I + Page +The Compensation Balance, Controlling Factor 3 + + 1. General Method of Obtaining Results + 2. How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow + or Fast in Heat Compared to Cold. + 3. Composition of and Distortions of Compensation + Balances. + 4. Tests and Experiments. + 5. Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations. + 6. Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment. + +CHAPTER II + +Equipment for Temperature Adjusting 9 + + 7. Various Methods Available. + 8. Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions. + 9. The Lower Temperature Box. + +CHAPTER III + +Difference in Observatory and Commercial Systems 13 + + 10. Observatory System. + 11. Commercial System. + 12. Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation + 13. Value of the Normal Period Rate. + 14. Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards + for Gain or Loss in Time. + 15. Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature. + +CHAPTER IV + +Some Practical Methods of Correction 19 + + 16. Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of + the Balance. + 17. Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below + Normal Size and Weight + 18. Over or Under Compensation. + 19. Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation. + 20. Example Illustrating that Temperature Variation + is Not Always Due to the Balance and Spring. + +CHAPTER V + +The Middle Temperature Error 26 + + 21. Why this Error Exists and What it Consists of. + 22. How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome this Error. + + +PART II.--THE ADJUSTMENTS TO ISOCHRONISM AND POSITIONS + +CHAPTER VI + +General Consideration 31 + + 23. Optional Allowances for Variation. + 24. Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting. + 25. Train and Escapement Freedom. + +CHAPTER VII + +Theory and Practice 39 + + 26. Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal + Hairspring. + 27. How Theory Works Out in Practice and what + Isochronism Consists of. + 28. Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation. + +CHAPTER VIII + +Relative Pinning Points of the Hairspring 43 + + 29. Original Springing of Watches. + 30. How Pinning Point Alterations are Made. + 31. Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Watches. + 32. How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch. + 33. Results in Vertical Position Rates due to Changing + the Pinning Point. + 34. The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated. + 35. Principle of Pinning Point Alterations. + 36. Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models. + +CHAPTER IX + +Manipulation of the Regulator Pins 51 + + 37. Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins + 38. Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil + Between the Pins. + 39. Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing + the Regulator Pins. + +CHAPTER X + +Factory and Repair Shop Adjusting 53 + + 40. Routine Varies According to Circumstances. + 41. Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop of + One or Two Workmen. + 42. Advantages of Understanding Adjusting Even + Though Watches are Not Tested in Positions or + Isochronism. + 43. Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience. + +CHAPTER XI + +Preliminary Notes and Practice for Beginners 56 + + 44. Practical Suggestions. + 45. The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust. + 46. Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down. + 47. Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble. + 48. Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot. + 49. Examining the Hairspring. + 50. Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion. + 51. Detailed Practice. + 52. Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison. + 53. Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction. + +CHAPTER XII + +Preliminary Notes and Practice on Vertical Corrections 64 + + 54. Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation. + 55. Poor Motion, Cause and Effect. + 56. Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation. + 57. Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance + 58. Concentricity of the Hairspring. + 59. Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning + Point Alterations. + 60. Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of + Position Rates + +CHAPTER XIII + +Concrete Examples Showing Definite Three Position Alterations +and Labor Utilized 70 + + 61. Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the Variation. + 62. Example No. 1, Three Positions, Columbus. + 63. Example No. 2, Three Positions, Ball. + 64. Example No. 3, Three Positions, Elgin. + 65. Example No. 4, Three Positions, Hampden. + +CHAPTER XIV + +Concrete Examples Showing Definite Five Position Alterations +and Labor Utilized 77 + + 66. What Five Position Adjusting Consists of--Detailed Allowances. + 67. Example No. 5, Five Positions, Hamilton. + 68. Example No. 6, Five Positions, Elgin, B. W. R. + 69. Example No. 7, Five Positions, Waltham, Vang. + 70. Example No. 8, Five Positions, Vacheron and Constantin. + 71. Example No. 9, Five Positions, E. Howard + 72. Example No. 10, Five Positions, Illinois, B. S. + 73. Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates. + 74. How to Locate Defective Gearings. + +CHAPTER XV + +Timing and Final Regulation 91 + + 75. Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers. + 76. Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator. + 77. Effect of the Middle Temperature Error. + 78. Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates. + + +PART III.--SPECIAL NOTES + +CHAPTER XVI + +Special Notes 99 + + 79. Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples) + 80. Truing the Balance. + 81. Poising the Balance. + 82. Truing Hairsprings. + 83. Treating a Rusty Hairspring. + 84. Stopping by Escapement Locking when Hands are + set Backward or When Watch Receives a Jar. + 85. Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches. + + + + +RULES AND PRACTICE FOR ADJUSTING WATCHES + + +PART I + +THE ADJUSTMENT TO TEMPERATURE + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE COMPENSATION BALANCE CONTROLLING FACTOR + + +1. _General Method of Obtaining Results._ + +Only since the introduction of the compensation balance which received +its most substantial early experiments as recently as the year 1859, +has it been possible to control the variation in pocket timepieces +which is caused by changes in temperature. Previous to this +introduction it was not uncommon for the best watches to vary as much +as two or three minutes with changes of forty or fifty degrees Fahr. +Through experiment and improvement in the quality and application of +balance materials, such advancement has been made, that this variation +has been reduced to seconds and temperature adjusting is now quite +universal in the production of medium and high grade watches. + +In the large factories, girls and young men of very little previous +experience are frequently taught to make the alterations and to do the +testing, while men of experience in watchmaking handle only the more +intricate cases such as "stoppers" and radical rates that may require +investigation of the inner workings of the movement. The simplicity of +the adjustment naturally becomes more apparent with experience and the +general alterations consist merely of transferring the balance screws +in opposite pairs, either forward or backward one or more holes, +according to the extent of the correction desired. + +As these alterations are quite positive the adjustment can be +undertaken with considerable certainty of obtaining results in every +instance. + +The repairer will not find as much daily necessity for understanding +temperature adjusting as he will for being thorough in Position +adjusting. The subject is covered, however, for the benefit of those +who may desire practical experience in this branch of adjusting and +also for those who desire a general knowledge of the details. + + +2. _How to Place Screws When the Rate is Either Slow or Fast in Heat +Compared to Cold._ + +If a watch rates slow in heat compared to cold it is necessary to +shift screws in opposite pairs out toward the cut or free end of the +rims; because when the metals expand the hairspring becomes weaker and +produces a loss in time. During this period the free ends of the +balance rims, carrying the transferred weight are forced toward the +center and produce a gaining rate which compensates for the loss +caused by the weakened spring. + +As the metals contract in cold the free ends of the balance are drawn +outward from their true form and the concentrated weight of these +screws near the ends reduces the fast rate in cold and in principle +works both ways in its action on the rate. + +Should the circumstances be just opposite, or the rate be fast in heat +compared to the rate in cold, it will be necessary to move the screws +away from the free end of the rims. In doing this, less weight will be +carried toward the center as the free ends curl inward and as a +result, the rate in heat will become slower and the slow rate in cold +will be reduced. + + +3. _Composition of and Distortions of Compensation Balances._ + +Compensation balances are generally made of one layer of brass and one +of steel, with the brass on the outside consisting of about +three-fifths of the total thickness and the steel on the inside +consisting of about two-fifths. These metals are firmly soldered +together and the distortions in changes of temperature are as follows. +In heat both metals expand, which infers that the rims become longer +as well as wider and thicker. Brass expands more than steel and +because of its attachment to the steel it cannot continue to lengthen +in its true circular form, due to the fact that the steel does not +become enough longer to maintain the true curve, and the result is +that the free ends of the rims are forced inward. + +In cold the brass, contracting more than the steel, pulls the rim +outward at the free end which is just in reverse of the operations in +heat. + +The end of the rim which is attached to the balance arm always moves +in the opposite direction from the free end, or outward from the +center of balance, when the free end moves in, and inward when the +free end moves out. In comparison, however, this movement is +negligible as will be noted later in the results obtained in moving +screws in that direction. + + +4. _Tests and Experiments._ + +It is generally understood that the purpose of the compensation +balance is to act in opposition to the error caused principally by the +hairspring. The steel hairspring having no compensating qualities, +either grows stronger or weaker with changes in temperature. When it +becomes longer, wider and thicker in heat, experiments seem to prove +that the increased width and thickness are not in proportion to the +increased length, for if they were, the spring would actually be +stronger; while timing proves that it is weaker because of the loss in +time. In cold the shortening factor seems to dominate because of a +gain in time. + +In a series of tests with steel springs on uncut steel brass balances, +the temperature error in the extremes of 40 degrees and 90 degrees +Fahrenheit was found to be from eighty to one hundred and sixty +seconds. With the same balances cut the error was reduced from seventy +to one hundred and thirty seconds in each instance, without any +correction of the balance screws. + +A former test with palladium springs on the same balances, previous to +having been cut, showed a considerably reduced error, indicating that +the steel springs were mainly responsible for the temperature +variations. + +The above tests were in actual practice and results are given as +noted, regardless of scientific or established formula relating to the +cubic measurement of metals in changes of temperature. + + +5. _Effect of Shifting Screws to Different Locations._ + +As a rule compensation balances generally have five or six pairs of +balance screws in addition to two pairs of mean time screws. High +grade Swiss and some American models do not have mean time screws and +are therefore generally supplied with seven or eight pairs of balance +screws. The mean time screws are never disturbed in making alterations +for temperature, such alterations being confined to the balance screws +only and the mean time screws are reserved for timing. + +For appearance sake the balance screws should be evenly distributed, +although it is necessary at times to closely assemble them to obtain +temperature results and they should not be disturbed in making +ordinary repairs, as the adjustment may be destroyed in so doing. With +the larger balances the moving of one pair of screws for a distance of +one hole, generally makes a difference of four or five seconds in the +temperature rate. In the case of smaller balances this alteration does +not make as much difference, although the weight and location of the +screws has considerable influence on the result. + +A pair of screws shifted from the second holes from the cuts, to the +holes adjoining the cuts, will generally make a correction four or +five times as great as would be obtained by shifting a pair of screws +from the third to the fourth holes from the arms. The same +proportional difference is obtained in moving a pair of screws from +the center of the rims out to the cut, compared to moving a pair of +screws from the holes nearest the arms out to the center of the rims. +This principle also obtains in moving the screws in the opposite +direction and is due to the fact that while the metals composing the +balance follow the common laws of expansion and contraction, the +balance actually becomes smaller in area during expansion and larger +during contraction. This condition is made possible entirely through +joining the metals in proper proportion and then cutting the rims. + +In the factories where large quantities of a particular model having a +standard style balance are handled, tests are usually made to +determine as to just what degree of correction will be obtained by +shifting various pairs of screws certain distances. This information +is then used in making alterations with considerable certainty. The +expert temperature adjuster becomes fully informed as to the +peculiarities of various models and is capable of getting larger +percentages of watches within the limits of allowance, after making +alterations, than he could obtain otherwise. + +Through understanding the various models individually, he is also +enabled to furnish information that will cause intelligent arrangement +of the balance screws, for each model, when they are originally +fitted. The production thereby showing a greater yield of good watches +that do not require alterations after the first test. + + +6. _Permanency of the Temperature Adjustment._ + +When the original temperature adjustment has been carefully executed +it is quite permanent and unless the screws have been mutilated or +changed in location there will seldom be an occasion for readjusting. +The balance may be retrued and repoised many times and the spring may +be retrued, altered, or even changed, without seriously interfering +with the temperature rating, as long as the screws are not shifted. In +changing the spring, however, it is necessary that the same number of +coils and the same size of spring be used, as otherwise readjusting +would be required. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPERATURE ADJUSTING + + +7. _Various Methods Available._ + +Two boxes are necessary for temperature testing. One fitted up to +maintain a temperature of about 90 deg. Fahr. and the other maintaining +a temperature of about 40 deg. Fahr. + +The method employed in obtaining the high temperature varies in +different styles of boxes, while the low temperature is always +obtained through the use of ice. When only an occasional test is made, +any simple method whereby approximately close results in the two +extremes can be obtained, may be used. For instance, the watch may be +enclosed in a tin box and placed in sand that is kept at a temperature +of 90 or 95 degrees F. A thermometer placed in the sand indicates when +the temperature rises too high or falls too low. The ordinary +household refrigerator may be used for testing the cold. Tests by this +method are advisable only for short periods and for an approximate +idea as to the extent of error. + +If frequent tests are made and accurate results are expected, it is +quite important that the special boxes be used. Such boxes are often +constructed with a capacity of four or five hundred watches, or they +may be constructed to receive only half a dozen watches. Some are made +with a zinc or copper tank in which warm water is placed and which +surrounds the chamber in which the watches are deposited. The water is +kept at the desired temperature by means of a small adjustable flame. +In other instances electrical arrangements are used, in which case no +water is required. + +In either instance a thermostat controls the source of heat. + + +8. _Electrically Equipped Oven, Description and Dimensions._ + +A very practical arrangement for testing a few watches at a time in +the higher temperature is shown in Fig. 1. This is electrically +equipped and will maintain an even temperature at all times. + +The outside of the box is constructed of about one-half inch lumber +and the inside is lined with asbestos. It is about fourteen inches +high by ten inches wide and eight inches deep. + +"A". Is an incandescent lamp set in a porcelain base. + +"B". Is a porcelain plug through which the wires "C" enter the box. + +"D" and "E". Are metal uprights with a thumbscrew on the top, under +each of which a wire terminates. + +"F". Is the compensating bar, one end of which is fastened solidly to +"D" with rivets. + +The opposite end is free and rests against the end of a thumbscrew +which passes through "E." + +The thumbscrew is to be adjusted so that the free end of "F" will rest +against it in a temperature of 70 deg. Fahr. or any lower temperature. +As the temperature rises the free end of the bar moves away from the +end of thumbscrew, breaking the circuit and extinguishing the light, +which cuts off the source of heat. As the temperature decreases the +bar again comes into contact and creates the circuit. + +This bar can be made of various compensating metals, one combination +of which is a strip of zinc about six inches long by three eighths of +an inch wide and one thirty-second of an inch thick. On the outside of +this soft solder a strip of tin six inches or a trifle less in length, +by one fourth inch wide and one thirty-second of an inch thick. Both +metals should be bent to a curved form before they are soldered +together as shown in the cut. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1] + +It is generally preferable to have the bar taper to a slightly +narrower width at its free end, and near this free end it is necessary +to solder a small strip of platinum at the point where the end of +thumbscrew comes in contact. + +"G", "H", "I" and "J" are ventilating holes one inch in diameter and +covered by a swinging slide so that the holes can be opened or closed +as desired for regulating the ventilation. "K". Is a shelf of brass +screen located about five inches from the top and on which the watches +and a thermometer are placed in testing. + +"L". Is a handle for the purpose of convenience in carrying the box. +The front is to be enclosed by a door made in two parts, the upper +section of which is glass which will admit of observing the +thermometer. Proper adjustment of the thumbscrew and bar makes the box +ready for use. + + +9. _The Lower Temperature Box._ + +Fig. 2 shows a box specially made for testing watches in cold. It is +constructed of wood and stands about twenty-four inches high without +the legs and about eighteen inches square. + +A double partition packed with about one inch of sawdust will be most +reliable. + +The upper half of the box should contain a watertight zinc tank for +holding cracked ice and about an inch of space should be left above +for circulation of the air. + +The chamber for receiving the watches may be about six inches square +and supported by a crosspiece and attachment to the front. It should +be covered above to prevent particles of ice from falling on the +watches which are to be placed on the floor or on a shelf of the +chamber, but the sides may be left partly open to improve the +circulation of cold air. The door may also be filled with sawdust but +does not require glass as the moisture would prevent observation of +the thermometer which should be inside for checking up the temperature +when the door is opened. + +[Illustration: Fig. 2] + +The bottom of the tank should be slightly higher on one side than on +the other, with a one-half inch drain pipe fitted to the low side. The +inlet end of the pipe should be covered with a fine screen to prevent +dirt from accumulating in the pipe and the outlet may be either at the +extreme bottom or on one of the sides as shown in the cut. The upper +part or cover of box should be made so that it can be easily removed +for filling and cleaning the tank. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +DIFFERENCE IN OBSERVATORY AND COMMERCIAL SYSTEMS + + +10. _Observatory System._ + +In the foreign observatories where watches are generally tested for +competition prize, or certificate purposes, they are subjected to +either three or five day tests in each temperature, preceded by one +intermediate day at normal temperature which is not considered in +making the deductions. The purpose of this is to allow the metals to +assume the natural condition before being placed in, or changed from, +one degree of temperature to another. After the three or five day +test, according to the grade of the watch, the average of the daily +rates in each temperature is considered in making the comparison and +arriving at the total variation. The total error is then considered in +the summary, as a fraction of a second variation per each degree of +temperature. As an example we will consider that the total error +between the two averages is five seconds and that the difference in +the two extremes of temperature was fifty degrees F. The variation +would be given as one-tenth of a second per each degree of +temperature. + + +11. _Commercial System._ + +In manufacturing watches for commercial purposes, both foreign and +domestic, the tests are generally made for twenty-four hours in each +temperature and the difference in the rates is considered as the total +error. + +Sometimes preliminary tests of four or six hours in each temperature +are made to obtain an estimate as to the extent of error, then +alterations are made, after which the watch is subjected to the +regular twenty-four hour test. There is nothing to be gained by this +in regular work, although for a special rush job a day's time may be +saved. Watches are always expected to be in first-class condition and +such features as close fitting pivots or dirty oil will prevent any +dependable timing. It is also advisable to time them closely before +the test is made, as too great mean time variation may confuse in +estimating the error, especially if the time is not taken in each +temperature exactly at the end of twenty-four hours. + +The testing should preferably be done in the dial up position to +eliminate poise errors as much as possible. The first test is made +in heat at 90 deg. Fahr., then in normal temperature of sixty-five +or seventy degrees and finally in the lower extreme of 40 deg. Fahr. + +When the watch is removed from the cold box it will be covered with +moisture which will immediately begin to condense. The time should +therefore be quickly noted and the watch replaced in the higher +temperature box for four or five hours to become thoroughly dry and +prevent against rusting of the steel parts. + + +12. _Rating Card and Method of Calculating Variation._ + +A card ruled similar to the cut shown in Fig. 3, may be used for +entering the rates and the watch need only be set at the beginning of +each test, as deductions can be made from the entries on the card and +the variation accurately ascertained without resetting or disturbing +the time. + +Details as to the methods to be followed would be about as follows: +Wind and set the watch to correct time, place it in the heat box and +at the end of twenty-four hours enter the variation from correct time +in the upper left hand square of the card. + +Assuming that the time is four seconds fast, enter this as shown in +the first column Fig. 3, then wind but do not set the watch and place +it in normal temperature and at the end of twenty-four hours enter the +total variation noted in the second square of first column. Assuming +the time to be just correct, place a zero as shown. Next wind the +watch and place it in the cold box, and assuming that the variation is +sixteen seconds fast at the end of twenty-four hours, enter this in +the lower square of the first column as shown in Fig. 3. The watch is +next placed in the heat box to dry and the variation shown in the +three sets of figures in first column are carried out as follows. + +Fig. 3 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | + 4 | + 4 | + 2 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | 0 | - 4 | + 6 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +16 | +16 | + 8 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 0 + +In the upper square we find +4, enter this in upper square of second +column at its full value as shown. + +Next we find a "0" in the second square of first column, and as this +is a loss of four seconds from the entry shown in the square above we +carry it out in second column as -4. In the lower square of first +column we find +16 and as this is a gain of sixteen seconds over the +square above, it is necessary to carry this to second column at its +full value as per illustration. + +To determine the extent of variation between heat and cold, simply +ignore the normal rate of -4 in the second column and subtract +4, +from +16, which indicates an error of twelve seconds slow in heat +compared to cold. + +Or it may be determined as twelve seconds fast in cold compared to +heat. For convenience sake it is advisable to form the habit of using +one of the temperatures as a unit for comparison and wherever large +quantities of watches are adjusted, it is generally the custom to use +the higher temperature for this purpose and the rate is stated as +either slow or fast in heat. In this instance the rate is slow in heat +and it will be necessary to shift one or more pairs of screws toward +the cut as explained in Chapter 1, No. 2. + + +13. _Value of the Normal Period Rate._ + +The rate in the normal period cannot be considered as of any value, +its importance consisting only of allowing the metals to return to the +natural form and tension before being placed in the cold box. + +This is quite important in obtaining a true estimate of the error, +because of the fact that in transferring the watch immediately from +the extreme of heat to the extreme of cold, there will be a period of +time during which the metals are readjusting themselves to the natural +form, and the variation in time during this period will not be +accounted for, as the real comparative rate will not begin to develop +until after the natural form and tension is reached. + +If the limit of time devoted to testing is no object and if a very +fine rate is desired the observatory method is of course to be +preferred. However, by allowing an intermediate day at normal +temperature we have the assurance that the hairspring is at the same +tension and that the balance has the same form concentrically when the +test begins in cold that it had when the test began in heat. + +As the object is to find the variation between the two temperature +extremes the estimate will be quite close enough and allows the saving +of many days' time. Some authorities advocate in addition to the five +days required for observatory testing in each temperature that the +watch be subjected to an intermediate day in each, instead of in +normal, before considering the daily rate. This seems very logical, as +the time noted each day would be taken at the actual extremes in both +instances and any outside factor in the timing would be eliminated. + + +14. _Definition of the Characters Used on Rate Cards for Gain or Loss +in Time._ + +In making entries on the rate cards and in figuring the variations the +sign + is used as denoting that the watch is running faster than the +standard time and the sign - is used as denoting that it is running +slower than standard time. + +This is stated for the reason that in some instances, generally +foreign, the signs are used in reverse, or as indicating that the +watch requires a correction of + or - the number of seconds indicated, +to attain the correct standard of time. When the signs are identical +in a column it is necessary to subtract the lesser from the greater +and the result is the variation. There are often instances however, +when one rate will be + and the other - as shown in second column of +Fig. 4, and in these instances it is necessary to add the figures to +obtain the variation. + +The first column is always the progressive rate and the second column +shows the variation carried out. This example shows +8 in heat, the +normal rate in the second square is not considered, for the reason +previously explained and the rate in cold is shown as -1. The total +variation between the extremes is therefore arrived at by adding +8 +and -1, which in this instance gives us a total of nine seconds fast +in heat. + +Fig. 4 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | + 8 | + 8 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | +20 | +12 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +19 | - 1 | | | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 9 + + +15. _Increasing or Decreasing the Extremes of Temperature._ + +The extremes of 40 deg. and 90 deg. Fahr. have been used for the reason +that they are best suited for general purposes. When it is known, +however, that a watch is to be used in a warm climate the extremes may +be raised five or ten degrees to advantage. If the watch is to be used +in a cold climate, the extremes may be lowered this amount. The metals, +however, can only stand the strain of expansion and contraction to a +certain degree, and still maintain the positive qualities. Therefore it +is quite important that the extremes be not raised or lowered very much +beyond these figures. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +SOME PRACTICAL METHODS OF CORRECTION + + +16. _Example of Maintaining a Pleasing Appearance of the Balance._ + +In altering the location of screws during the temperature adjustment +it is often possible to either mar or improve the appearance of the +balance. As a demonstration of this point the correction made in +regard to Fig. 3 is analyzed. The balance had twelve screw holes in +each rim, with the space between the first and second holes from the +arms equal to double the space between any other two holes. There were +seven screws in each rim, equally divided as per cut Fig. 5, which +indicates screws in the first, second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth +and twelfth holes. + +[Illustration: Fig. 5] + +A correction of the rate could have been obtained by shifting the +screws in either the sixth or eighth holes forward three holes. Or +those in either the first or second holes could have been shifted to +the ninth holes and those in the fourth holes might have been shifted +to the ninth holes with good results possible in either instance. + +Moving one pair of screws under any circumstances however would have +caused a massing of three pairs of screws at some point and a vacant +space of three holes at another point which would not present a very +good appearance for high grade work. Therefore the alteration made was +to move the screws from the second to the third holes, fourth to +seventh, and from the eighth to the ninth holes as indicated by the +positions shown in Fig. 6. + +[Illustration: Fig. 6] + +Examination of the fourth column Fig. 3, which gives the result of the +second test will show that the desired correction was obtained with a +better appearance of the balance than would have been possible if only +one pair of screws had been shifted. + +In following the logic of the alterations made we must consider that +the screws moved from the second to third holes made no correction, +due to the fact that the balance rims remain almost stationary at this +point, the alteration being for appearance only, those moved from the +fourth to the seventh holes were estimated for a correction of seven +or eight seconds only, for the reason that the alteration did not +carry them beyond the center of the rims where the greatest curvature +takes place. The screws moved from the eighth to the ninth holes +however were estimated for the full correction of four or five seconds +which is to be expected through shifting a normal pair of screws from +one hole to another beyond the center of the rim on sixteen or +eighteen size balances. In moving a pair of screws one hole between +the first quarter and the center of the rims, a correction of from two +to three seconds can be expected and from the center to the cut the +difference for one hole is generally four or five seconds, while an +alteration between the arm and the first quarter seldom yields any +correction. + +The matter of appearance should at all times be respected, for it is +just as easy to obtain results in most instances and also have a +well-appearing balance. There is also less disturbance of the poise +usually in moving several pairs of screws a short distance than there +is in moving one pair a longer distance. + + +17. _Correction Varies When Screws are Above or Below Normal Size and +Weight._ + +Normal corrections can only be realized when normal screws are +shifted. Some balances have one half, or quarter head screws which of +course will not produce a correction as great as will be obtained by +shifting regular screws. Sometimes platinum, or other extra heavy +screws will be found in balances and these will produce a correction +almost double that of ordinary screws of the same size. + + +18. _Over or Under Compensation._ + +On some occasions it will be found impossible to maintain a pleasing +arrangement of the screws because the temperature variation will make +it necessary to mass all of the screws either in the holes nearest the +cuts or in those nearest the arms. + +This is due to either over or under compensation of the balance. Over +compensation is caused by too large a proportion of brass in the rims, +which causes them to curve inward too far at the free ends in heat and +outward too far in cold. When the extent of this error is so great +that the rate is still fast in heat, with the screws massed in the +holes nearest the arm, a correction can be obtained by fitting heavier +screws in the holes adjacent to the arms and lighter screws in the +holes nearer the free ends. + +When the rate in heat is slow with the screws massed at the free ends +of rims the balance is under compensated, which is caused by too +large a proportion of steel compared to the proportion of brass in the +rims. This prevents the free ends of rims from curving inward far +enough to carry the weight the proper distance toward the center of +balance. A correction for this can be obtained by fitting heavier +screws in the holes adjacent to the cuts and lighter screws in the +holes toward the center of rims. + +In changing the weight of screws as stated above it should be +remembered that the gross weight of all screws must remain the same or +the timing will be seriously affected. It is also important that the +poise be tested whenever a considerable degree of alteration is made, +as this will assist in obtaining an accurate rate. + + +19. _Special Corrections for Over or Under Compensation._ + +Balances having the extreme degree of over or under compensation will +seldom be found in high grade watches. In any instance, however, it is +possible to obtain a better distribution of the screws by fitting +either a larger or a smaller hairspring. For instance, we will assume +a case of under compensation in which the screws have all been massed +at the holes nearest the cuts. If the spring has seventeen coils, a +correction of from five to ten seconds can be obtained by selecting +and fitting a spring of the same make that will have eighteen coils, +and the correction obtained will permit of shifting one or two pairs +of screws back toward the arms. + +In case of over compensation a spring of the same make, one coil +smaller, will permit of shifting one or two pairs of screws toward the +free ends of rims. + +In a series of tests it was demonstrated that by duplicating or +changing springs of the same make and size, on balances that had +previously been compensated, there was very slight difference in the +temperature variation of the watch. Also by changing pinning points or +breaking out one-fourth to one-half of the coil around collet and +adding weight to the balances to correct the mean time the difference +in the variation was almost negligible. + +On the other hand it was found that by replacing the springs with +others of larger or smaller size, variations of from three to ten +seconds were noted in all instances. + +In selecting and fitting a spring that will be one coil larger or +smaller, it should be noted that the inner coil of the original spring +and that of the new spring are approximately the same distance from +the collet. For if there was considerable space between the collet and +inner coil of the original spring, and the new spring was colleted +quite close, there might be the addition of an extra coil in the +inside only. This was found to produce only a very slight correction, +compared to that obtained by the addition of a complete outer coil. +These tests indicate that the proportion of strength of the spring in +the temperatures varies with any appreciable change in length while +slight changes make practically no difference. + + +20. _Example Demonstrating that Temperature Variation is not Always +Due to the Balance and Spring._ + +Fig. 7 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. .................... Make................... | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | HEAT | -10 | -10 | + 4 | + 4 | + 1 | + 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | NORMAL | - 6 | + 4 | + 5 | + 1 | + 4 | + 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | COLD | +12 | +18 | + 1 | - 4 | + 7 | + 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 28 8 2 + +The following example is submitted to show that temperature variation +is not always due to the balance and spring, and that the general +condition of the watch may be responsible. The second column of Fig. +7, indicates an error of twenty-eight seconds slow in heat with all +screws assembled in the holes nearest the free ends of the rims. + +Examination proved that the motion of the balance in cold was reduced +to about one-fourth of a turn. In heat the arc of motion was at least +one full turn. This difference in motion was sufficient to prove that +there was some binding in the train. + +A very close fitting of the escape pivots was found and this +undoubtedly caused binding of the pivots in heat due to slight +expansion. Expansion of the stone would also tend to close the hole, +and while the degree of temperature would hardly have any bearing on +this point it is sufficient to show in what direction the tendency +would be. The fourth wheel end shake was very close and probably +caused binding of the wheel in cold, due to greater contraction of the +bridge than of the fourth pinion. Furthermore the mainspring was only +0.02 of a millimeter narrower than the space in the barrel box. This +no doubt also caused binding through greater contraction of the barrel +than occurred in the mainspring. + +The above defects were remedied and the rate was found to be eight +seconds plus in heat as per third and fourth columns Fig. 7. + +This made it necessary to shift several of the screws away from the +cut, in almost the same position in which they were before the +alteration which caused the close assembling of the screws was made. +The final rate was two seconds slow in heat as shown in fifth and +sixth columns. + +The variation of thirty-six seconds between the second and fourth +columns was entirely erroneous, and was due to condition of the watch +irrespective of the balance and hairspring. Should the variation with +the screws assembled have been by chance within the limits of +allowance the watch would undoubtedly have been a very unreliable +timepiece. The errors in the watch would no doubt have been corrected +during the position adjustment later, but the large error in +temperature which would have been introduced by wrongly moving the +screws, would have prevented reliable timing until possibly at some +future period a test in temperature would have been made and the +screws replaced in the proper positions. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE MIDDLE TEMPERATURE ERROR + + +21. _Why This Error Exists and What it Consists Of._ + +In adjusting watches to temperature it is not always possible nor +expected to obtain a perfect rate between the two extremes, +manufacturers generally allowing from two to ten seconds variation +according to the grade. + +Even when the rate obtained is perfect it will only be so at the two +extremes and there will always be a few seconds variation in the +middle or normal temperature. + +This variation will always be a gain of from two to four seconds in +the higher grades of steel brass balances and usually more in cheaper +balances. + +As there is no possible correction for this irregularity in ordinary +balances it has long been known as the middle temperature error and +for many years was one of the most perplexing problems that the +manufacturer of specially fine timepieces had to deal with. + +Various devices were originated from time to time for the purpose of +counteracting the error but they were always too infinitely +complicated to be of commercial or scientific value, and none of them +were ever adopted as a solution of the problem. + +In chapter I, No. 3, will be found a description of the distortions of +compensation balances in the extremes of temperature and the cause of +the middle error is due entirely to the fact that these distortions +are not exactly equal in both directions. The free ends of the rims +are drawn outward from the concentric form to a slightly greater +proportional degree as the temperature decreases from normal and they +are not forced inward at an even proportional degree with increase of +temperature. + + +22. _How Nickel Steel Balances Overcome the Middle Temperature Error._ + +Through extensive experiment in the foreign laboratories balances +containing nickel steel have been found to almost eliminate the middle +error, which is reduced to one second or less, making it possible to +obtain perfect adjustment in various temperatures. + +All highest prize watches passing through the Geneva Observatory are +equipped with these balances and they have been adopted for commercial +use to a large extent by the manufacturers of the finer grades of +watches. + +From the same source success has recently been attained in applying +this metal to hairsprings and using them in connection with uncut +balances, but owing to the necessary high cost of production, their +general use may be delayed for some years to come. Their general use +however would revolutionize the present-day methods of adjusting to +temperature as there would be practically no expansion or contraction +to deal with. + +Nickel steel balances will always be found to have the cuts about one +eighth of the circle distant from the arms instead of close to the +arms. This is made necessary by the fact that the coefficient of +nickel steel is about ten times less than that of ordinary steel, and +if the cuts were made close to the arms the brass in expansion would +force the free end of the rims to curve inward to such an extent that +it would cause an abnormally fast rate in heat. + +By making the cuts more central the length of the segments are +reduced, thereby causing less curvature of the extreme ends and more +nearly equalizing the extent of curvature both ways from the +concentric form. This equalization is what causes the reduction in the +middle error and its absence in ordinary balances is what causes the +larger error. + +Non-magnetic or palladium balances are also credited with a smaller +middle temperature error than the ordinary steel brass balance, but +owing to the unstable nature of the metal they have not proved to be +as reliable in other respects and are not used to any large extent. + +The middle temperature error is of course a small factor in the larger +sense of obtaining time from commercial watches but its influence is +apparent in timing and it will therefore be considered further in the +section devoted to Final Regulation, Chapter XV, No. 77. + + + + +PART II + +THE ADJUSTMENT TO ISOCHRONISM AND POSITIONS + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +GENERAL CONSIDERATION + + +23. _Optional Allowances for Variation._ + +The phrase "Adjusted to Isochronism and Positions" does not always +indicate the same high quality or the expense assumed in obtaining +close rating in different kinds of watches. + +One particular model may be stamped "Adjusted to Five Positions" and +this may indicate that the manufacturer of this model has tested all +watches of this grade for twenty-four hours in each of five positions +and that the extreme extent of variation from one position to any +other, among any of these watches, did not exceed six seconds. Another +model may be stamped in exactly the same way and it may indicate that +all watches of that particular grade have been tested in exactly the +same way and that the extreme extent of variation from one position to +any other, did not exceed twenty-five seconds. + +The statement regarding the number of positions to which the watch has +been adjusted is just as legitimate in the latter instance as it is in +the former, for the watches are really tested in five positions and +required to perform within specified allowances. + +The important difference is in the established limits of requirement, +one demanding an extreme of only six seconds variation and the other +allowing twenty-five seconds. Both watches may have the same number of +jewels and there is no way to discern the actual variation except +through a test in positions. + +Technically it would be just as legitimate to stamp and advertise +watches as above and have an allowance of fifty or more seconds, +providing that they were actually tested and not allowed to pass with +a variation greater than this limit. + +Close limits of allowance require adjusters of greater skill and +material of a finer degree of accuracy, however, than do greater +allowances, but the dealer and consumer are generally not informed in +regard to this particular point. Some watchmakers also do not +understand this feature clearly and the limits of variation to which +watches have been adjusted are seldom considered. + +Should the difference in allowances and identical advertising be +interpreted as an injustice to the manufacturer who maintains close +limits for his various grades of watches, it must be remembered that +they speak for themselves after passing over the counter and into the +hands of satisfied customers. His reputation after a period of years +will be more firmly established than will that of his less particular +competitor in the high grade field. A similar situation prevails in +the repair shop, and the fact that many of the leading dealers and +railroad watch inspectors require at least a three position adjustment +in the repairing of high grade watches, is convincing evidence that +position rating demonstrates its importance in actual service when +applied to repair work, as surely as it does when applied to new +watches. + +In placing limits of allowance for variation in various grades it is +not intended that all watches of a particular grade will have the +extreme variation. It is possible that an individual watch in the +twenty-five seconds allowance class may have an even better rate than +another watch that is in the six seconds class. It is also possible +for a watch in either class to have a perfect rate, although these +would be rather exceptional instances. + + +24. _Some Necessary Requirements for Learning Adjusting._ + +The adjustments to isochronism and positions are not permanent to the +same extent that the temperature adjustment is, and they can be +damaged or destroyed entirely by the average workman in making +ordinary repairs unless he is familiar with the common principles +governing their production and maintenance. + +Experienced workmen who are familiar with these principles avoid +unconsciously doing any damage and make practical repairs in a manner +that will maintain or improve the original adjustment and time-keeping +qualities of the watch. + +To know and to make use of these principles does not make a "putterer" +of the workman, in fact the consequence is just the reverse, because +the training acquired tends to eliminate guess work and enables him to +determine more readily as to just what the trouble may be, how to +correct it, and as to just what degree of perfection is required in a +particular instance. + +Certain practical requirements are necessary in reaching this standard +of workmanship and it would not be profitable to attempt to do +adjusting unless one has first had a reasonable degree of training as +a watchmaker or repairer, especially in such branches of the work as +truing and poising balances; truing, leveling and centering +hairsprings; matching the escapement; finishing pivots, and properly +cleaning and assembling watches. + +These mechanical requirements and experiences alone are not +sufficient, however, and a certain amount of study must be +consolidated with them in order to become proficient. This study +should not deal so much with the problems of manufacture of the watch, +or its various parts, as it does with the problems pertaining to the +finished results that are to be obtained through refinement and +intelligent assembly of these parts. The workman's willingness to +indulge in such study is a very large asset among the requirements, +and it only remains for him to obtain the proper class of instruction +and then to conscientiously follow correct methods in his practice and +to make personal experiments, conforming to the instruction, so that +his confidence will become more enduring. + +It is further required that he be capable of realizing the difference +between genuine and imitation materials, especially such essentials as +balance staffs, hole jewels, mainsprings and roller jewels, which are +the most frequently changed and most frequently substituted parts of +watches. Imitation materials may be less expensive as a matter of +first cost but staffs may have pivots and shoulders out of line, or +out of true; hole jewels may be rough, out of round or extremely +thick; mainsprings soft, or of improper proportion, and roller jewels +may have sharp edges which cause rubbing in the fork and "hanging up" +when the second hand is reversed. It is most satisfactory to depend +upon the materials supplied by the manufacturer of the watch, as +imitation goods are seldom any better. + + +25. _Train and Escapement Freedom._ + +Beyond a general insight of high class watch-work this book is not +intended to meet the requirements of beginners. It is designed +principally for watchmakers of some experience, and cannot presume to +cover details that would be essential for those in early +apprenticeship. It is thought essential, however, to consider some +matters in a general way and among these are the subjects of side +shakes and end shakes, and the escapement, as far as they pertain to +general inspection of the watch without consideration of details that +refer to correction of irregularities which are presumed to have been +acquired in earlier training. + +Thoroughness of mechanical ability always demands a system of +inspection and of making corrections and it is quite necessary to +follow some method that will reveal any point or points that may not +be up to standard. + +As a rule it is best to begin at either end of the watch, and if it is +to be taken down the best place to begin is usually with the balance +and examine each part as it is removed until the barrel has been +reached. If it is not to be taken down, just as good results will be +obtained by beginning the examination at the barrel and finishing with +the balance. Sometimes watchmakers of considerable ability will demand +as a basic consideration that pivots be fitted with very little side +shake and that end shakes also be quite close if close time is to be +expected. + +These presumed to be, wide side shakes and long end shakes, very often +have nothing whatever to do with the absence of a close position rate +and frequently are absolutely necessary for good performance of the +watch and proper space for oil. + +The importance of reasonable limits is of course granted, but it is +very detrimental to have pivots too close fitting and more stoppage +and irregular time keeping can be traced to lack of freedom than can +be traced to excessive shakes. + +If the repairer is not familiar with accepted standards of side and +end shakes, he can improve his judgment by examining watches of the +higher grades and comparing the results with those found in cheaper +makes of watches. + +Such examination will invariably disclose the fact that fine watches +receive very careful consideration in this respect. The center, third +and fourth wheels generally having from 0.03 mm. to 0.05 mm. freedom +for end shake and 0.015 mm. to 0.02 mm. for side shake. The escape +wheel, pallet and balance will be found to run quite uniform at from +0.02 mm. to 0.03 mm. freedom for end shake and from 0.0075 mm. to +0.0125 mm. for side shake. The smaller and thinner watches generally +favoring the lesser figures and the larger and thicker watches +favoring the higher. + +This uniformity of freedom will be found absent in cheaper watches; +for instance, a center wheel may have 0.02 mm. end shake and 0.01 mm. +side shake which would be very close fitting for large pivots. The +fourth wheel may have as much as 0.08 mm. end shake and 0.03 mm. side +shake which would be too great. The pallet may have 0.05 mm. end shake +and the balance 0.01 mm. and in this instance the short end shake of +the balance would be more detrimental in most instances than would the +longer end shake of the pallet. The variation will even be found to +exceed these figures and when they are found in connection with thick, +straight hole jewels they often interfere with a close position rate +and with regularity of time in service. The interference in +timekeeping is considerably aggravated in cases where one pivot has +excessive side shake and the opposite pivot is close fitting, as this +tends to cause almost certain binding of the close fitting pivot as +soon as the power of the mainspring is applied. + +The end shake and side shake allowance for the barrel depends +considerably upon its style of construction. Safety barrels +constructed so that the arbor revolves with the main wheel, when the +watch is running, may have about the same end shake and side shake as +applied to the center, third and fourth wheels, and if the pivots of +the arbor are quite large they may have a trifle more side shake. + +As a rule larger pivots will stand more side shake than smaller +pivots; this, however, does not apply in the case of large bearings, +such as safety main wheels that revolve around a stationary arbor, or +going barrels where the entire barrel revolves around the stationary +arbor when the watch is running. + +In such instances the main wheel or barrel should have from 0.03 mm. +to 0.05 mm. end shake on the arbor and should be just free for side +shake. + +The arbor which turns only when the watch is wound requires merely +freedom for end shake between the plates, as well as for side shake +where the pivots pass through the plates. + +With reference to the escapement, good watchmakers often have +different methods of examining the various points and of making +corrections and it is not of so much importance as to just how +correct conditions are obtained, as it is that they actually be +obtained. + +Whatever the method may be it is certain that each escape wheel tooth +must have positive locking on each pallet stone and that there must be +positive space for drop between the back of each stone and the pointed +end of each escape wheel tooth. There must also be sufficient draw +when each tooth and stone are locked to hold the fork against the +bankings. + +When the lock, drop and draw are correct it is next necessary to see +that the fork length and guard pin freedom are correct. + +There is only one positive method of determining as to when the fork +length is correct, and this is through closing the bankings to drop. + +This can be done either before or after placing the balance in the +watch and merely requires turning the banking screws so that the +excentric pins will close in on the fork until the fork arrives at the +pins, at the same instant that the tooth drops on the pallet stone. +This eliminates any slide of the stone on the tooth beyond the actual +locking and in this condition it is required that the roller jewel +pass through the fork slot and out of the fork horn entirely on both +sides with perfect freedom. + +Should it touch on both sides of the fork, then the fork is either too +long or the roller jewel is too far forward, and if it touches on one +side only it may require simply equalization of the freedom. The guard +pin length also must be obtained with the bankings closed to drop and +should be just free from the safety roller on both sides. + +When the inspection proves that these conditions have been properly +provided for, it is necessary to slightly open the bankings so that +there will be just a trifle of slide of each stone, on each tooth, +after the locking takes place. + +Extremely wide side shakes of the escape, pallet or balance pivots +will sometimes cause striking of the roller jewel when conditions are +otherwise correct, and these side shakes should not be very much +beyond the extreme limits mentioned in this number. The fact of this +feature, however, should not be construed as a recommendation that +these pivots be closely fitted, for reasonable freedom is to be +desired because it is positively necessary. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THEORY AND PRACTICE + + +26. _Theory of Frictional Errors and the Isochronal Hairspring._ + +Theory teaches us in brief, that the position adjustment is made +necessary principally because of frictional errors. It would therefore +seem that if the watch was mechanically correct there would be little +or no requirement for position alterations. + +We are also advised that an isochronal hairspring is one which will +cause the long and short arcs of the balance to be made in equal time +and that to attain this, the center of gravity of the spring must +coincide with the center of gravity of the balance and that a certain +pinning point is necessary in producing this result. + +Now if we have a watch of correct mechanical construction and fitted +with an isochronal spring it would seem that a close rating timepiece +would be assured. + + +27. _How Theory Works Out in Practice and What Isochronism Consists +of._ + +Practical adjusting, however, proves that such is not the case, for +even when the construction and alterations produce watches as nearly +correct as scientific methods can determine, there is often +considerable variation in the position rates. A twenty-four hour test +in any position may prove that the long and short arcs are made in +equal time showing the spring to be isochronous and yet the position +variations have not been accounted for. In this connection experience +proves that a spring showing a perfect isochronal rate may have its +collet pinning point changed, in relation to the pinning point at the +stud and that through such an alteration, a correction in positions +can be obtained, without in the least disturbing the perfect +isochronal rate. + +This indicates that the separation of the two adjustments which is +possible in theory, does not hold good in practice, because a spring +showing a perfect isochronal rate has been altered for the purpose of +counteracting some position error and thereby producing a practical +center of gravity of the balance and spring combined, instead of +separately. + +This may be further explained as creating an error in a spring which +is supposed to be theoretically isochronous, with the idea of making +it act in opposition to the position error and the combination thus +obtained produces practical isochronism as well as a corrected +position rate. + +It is not suggested that these relative pinning points be altered for +the purpose of overcoming position variation such as may be caused by +dirt and gummy oil, damaged pivots, or balances that are out of poise. +The watch should be in first-class condition and have a good motion in +every position and then the alterations may be safely undertaken in +accordance with the principles. + +Adjusted to isochronism indicates that the watch functions uniformly +during the entire twenty-four hours running. It is immaterial as to +whether the rate be perfect or whether it be a gain or a loss, so long +as it is uniform. + +The watch is not isochronous if there is both a gain and a loss in the +rate, even though the time be perfect at the expiration of twenty-four +hours. + +Experiment will demonstrate that watches carefully adjusted to +positions will also have a very close isochronal rate. These +isochronal experiments can be made by timing watches for twenty-four +hours in any one of the vertical positions and noting the variation +in periods of from four to twelve hours and by comparing the variation +in the first period, during which time the arc of motion is long, with +the variation in the latter period when the mainspring power is weaker +and the arc of motion is short. + + +28. _Common Causes of Extreme Isochronal Variation._ + +The most common causes of isochronal variation with which the repairer +has to deal and which are often very destructive to position rates, as +well as to general time keeping, may be found in the factor of, out of +poise and uneven motive force, which is one of the elementary +principles of adjusting. This feature should be thoroughly understood +by all watchmakers, so that as good results as possible may be +obtained from all watches above low grade, even though no test for +adjustment is to be made. + +When the balance is slightly out of poise and the motion is exactly +one and one-fourth turn during the twenty-four hours, this out of +poise will not affect the isochronism. When the motion varies and +reaches approximately one and one-half turn during the first few hours +after winding and then drops to one and one-quarter turn and finally +to one turn or less during the latter part of the twenty-four hours, +the poise error will have considerable effect. This factor is not +perceptible in the flat positions, but shows up to the full extent in +the vertical positions and the variation differs according to the +location of the point that is heavy. For example, if the balance is +heavy on the lower side when at rest, the watch will lose during the +hours that the arc of motion is over one and one-fourth turn and will +gain when the motion drops to one turn or less. + +Should the heavy point be on the top side of balance the result will +be reversed and the watch will gain when the motion is over one and +one-fourth turn and will lose when it drops to one turn or less. + +The total variation may be either seconds or minutes, depending upon +the extent of the poise error and experiments will prove that serious +isochronal variations can be traced to the simple cause of lack of +poise and irregular motion in more instances than to any other cause. + +The arc of one and one-fourth turn is the ideal motion, as slight +poise errors are neutralized at this point, but very few watches will +maintain this motion for twenty-four hours, therefore the poise must +be as nearly perfect as possible. The nearest approach to even motion +of modern watches is found in the fine Swiss grades equipped with stop +work, which causes only the best part of the mainspring to be +utilized. + +Such watches also receive the most expert attention as to gearings of +wheels and pinions and the train wheels are specially rounded up on +their respective staffs. This latter feature has been adopted by at +least two of the American manufacturers of fine watches during the +past few years with considerable benefit in producing even motion and +the use of lighter mainsprings. It should be definitely understood +that these tests refer to the vertical positions of the watch only and +that the horizontal positions are not affected in the same way by lack +of poise. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +RELATIVE PINNING POINTS OF THE HAIRSPRING + + +29. _Original Springing of Watches._ + +Theory and practice agree that different models of watches have +important relative points of attachment of the spring to collet and +stud. In the original springing and adjusting of high grade watches, +these points receive careful consideration, and only a very small +percentage ever require future alterations. + +There are instances, however, where the original allowance of position +variation has been considerable, also medium grades where no attention +has been directed to pinning points and in which an occasional +alteration may be required before a close position rate can be +obtained. + + +30. _How Pinning Point Alterations are Made._ + +These alterations are generally made by breaking off or letting out a +small section of the inner coil at the collet. In making such +alterations a quarter of a coil broken away at the collet will have +the same effect as will a quarter of a coil broken off at the outer +end and will require less weighting of the balance to correct the mean +time. It will also avoid breaking and remaking the over coil and the +possible necessity of readjustment to temperature. Letting out the +spring can be accomplished by unpinning and repinning the spring at +collet with less of the coil entered in the pinhole. This is not a +positive alteration, however, because very often the segment in the +pinhole is as short as it can be with safety. + +A more substantial correction is that of reforming the over coil in a +manner that will cause the end holding the stud to be shifted further +forward. + +The method of obtaining this correction is illustrated in Fig. 8. The +broken line shows the original formation of the over coil with the +stud on the line "B". The solid lines show the corrections with the +stud shifted to the line A. + +[Illustration: Fig. 8] + +When the collet is turned to replace the spring in beat, the stud will +be in its original location on the line "B." + +This will cause the pinning point at collet to be shifted from "A" to +"B" and bring it that much nearer to the horizontal line "C." + +This alteration has the same effect as that of letting out the spring +at the collet or of moving the stud forward on the over coil, with the +advantage of eliminating any change in the mean time. + +It should be definitely understood that the objective in making the +above alterations and as illustrated with the aid of the following +cuts, is the relation of the pinning point at collet to the pinning +point at stud, and that the change in length of the spring has no +bearing on the matter whatever as far as the position rate is +concerned. + + +31. _Even Coil Hairsprings Very Incorrect for Some Models._ + +It is often supposed that hairsprings having exactly even coils are +correct for close position and isochronal rating. Such springs do +approximate the nearest correct relation in more instances than any +other relation. They are precisely correct for very few models, +however, and are very incorrect for many models, as will be seen +through study of the following cuts showing the various points of +attachment and the different results obtainable in each. + + +32. _How to Find the Correct Collet Pinning Point for Any Watch._ + +A very simple method of locating the proper point of attachment of the +spring to collet is to face the train side of the movement and hold +the balance stationary with a small twig, and with the pallet fork +just midway between the two bankings. + +[Illustration: Fig. 9] + +Presume the existence of a vertical line through the center of +hairspring and collet as shown at "A B" Fig. 9. Then presume a +horizontal line as shown at "C D" on the same cut. + +[Illustration: Fig. 10] + +The proper pinning point is at the intersection of the collet and +horizontal line; the spring may be either over or under even coils, +depending entirely upon the location of the stud hole in the balance +bridge as demonstrated by Figures 9, 10, 14, 15. + +When the spring develops to the right from collet as shown in Fig. 9, +for example, the proper point of attachment is on the right side of +collet as shown at "E" Fig. 9, and also at "J" Fig. 14. + +If it develops to the left as the springs of all fine Swiss watches +do, the proper point of attachment is on the left side of collet as +shown at "F" Fig. 10. + + +33. _Results in Vertical Position Rates Due to Changing the Pinning +Point._ + +In either of the above instances the spring will develop upward as it +leaves the collet. These points of attachment always produce a fast +pendant up rate when compared to the opposite, or pendant down rate, +and all high grade watches are originally fitted with springs +conforming to this principle. + +If these points of attachment were changed to the opposite side of +collet so that the spring would develop downward as shown at "G" Fig. +11, and "H" Fig. 12, the results would be reversed and the pendant up +rate would be slow in comparison to the pendant down rate. + +[Illustration: Fig. 11] + +This point of attachment in which the spring develops downward from +the collet is generally known as the slow point among adjusters, and +when a spring is pinned at either the slow or fast point the pendant +right and left positions generally compare quite closely to each other +in timing, provided that the poise and other conditions of the watch +are correct. + +If the pinning point was changed to the intersection of the collet and +vertical line as shown in "I" Fig. 13, the pendant up and down rates +would compare nearly equal to each other and the pendant right +position would be slow compared to the pendant left position. + +[Illustration: Fig. 12] + +If it were pinned at the intersection of the collet and vertical line +just opposite to that shown in Fig. 13, the pendant left position +would be slow compared to the pendant right position. + +[Illustration: Fig. 13] + +The vertical points of attachment are seldom used, for the reason that +the variation between the pendant right and left positions would be +very difficult to control within close limits, due to the existence of +the natural error. As these positions, together with the pendant up +position are the most important of the four vertical positions, they +are given preference, and the natural error is placed in the pendant +down position where it will be the least detrimental to the +performance of the watch. + + +34. _The Natural Position Error and Why it Cannot be Eliminated._ + +[Illustration: Fig. 14] + +The natural error generally consists of from twelve to fifteen seconds +in finely constructed watches, and exists because of the fact that it +is impossible to perfectly poise a spiral spring. The location of the +heavy point, however, may be shifted by changing the point of +attachment at collet as described in No. 33, this Chapter. The nearest +approximation of a poised spiral spring is probably attained through +L. Lossier's inner terminal curve. Results are not positive, however, +and any deviation from the required precision makes the curve +valueless. It is possible to obtain perfect adjustment between three +vertical quarter positions and the two horizontal positions, but all +four quarter positions cannot be perfectly adjusted because the +natural error will show up in one of them. Manufacturers of fine +watches do not of course presume to supply perfect adjustment in the +five positions. Some however, have considerably closer limits of +allowance for variation than do others and it is logical to presume +that a line of high grade watches having a five position allowance of +six seconds from one position to any other would show better results +than another line which had even a six position adjustment and an +allowance of fifteen seconds from one position to any other. + + +35. _Principle of Pinning Point Alterations._ + +[Illustration: Fig. 15] + +When an alteration of any pinning point is necessary, the extent and +direction of the alteration are determined by the rate of the watch. +For instance, if a spring is pinned at the fast point and if a +slightly slower pendant up rate is desired, the spring can be broken +off at the collet and pinned one-eighth above the horizontal line. + +If the rate is to be made slightly faster, the spring can be let out a +trifle at the collet, the over coil reformed or the stud moved forward +on the over coil so that the collet point of attachment will come +slightly below the horizontal line when the spring is placed in beat. +The former alteration causes an approach toward the slow point and in +making the latter alteration we assume that the fast point is a trifle +below the horizontal line on that particular watch. When altering +springs from the extreme fast point to the extreme slow point, it is +advisable to remove a trifle less of the inner coil than the extreme +calculation. This will cause the point of attachment to be slightly +above the horizontal line on the slow side and will most always +produce the result desired and if it does not, there is still a +possibility of further alteration. The same principle applies in +making an alteration from the extreme slow to the extreme fast point +and in this case the point of attachment to collet may be just a +trifle below the horizontal line. + +The theory of this is that all shortening of the coil from the fast to +the slow point produces a slower rate pendant up, until the extreme +slow point is reached. After passing this extreme slow point the +pendant up rate begins to grow faster until the extreme fast point is +reached. [A]The designations "right" and "left" in regard to pinning +points are used with the explicit understanding that the individual is +facing the train side of the movement. The same designations used as +referring to position rates, or results to be expected in positions +should be interpreted to mean with the individual facing the dial side +of the watch. + + +36. _Same Principles Apply in Case of American Hunting Models._ + +The points shown in Figures 14 and 15 refer generally to American +hunting models. In all other high grade watches the location of the +balance and spring will be found either to the right or left of the +center of the watch. + +In American hunting models the balance and spring are located in the +lower center of the watch. + +This is due to the fact that American manufacturers do not construct +separate models for hunting watches as is done by foreign +manufacturers. + +Instead of producing an entirely separate model, the method simply +calls for a change in the construction of the barrel bridge by +reversing the position of the barrel and winding wheels. This places +the winding sleeve at figure three on the dial, which is customary on +hunting watches and causes the entire movement to be shifted by ninety +degrees with the balance just about opposite the pendant. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote A: Important Note.] + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +MANIPULATION OF THE REGULATOR PINS + + +37. _Altering the Length of Spring by Regulator Pins._ + +On some occasions when the pinning points seem to be comparatively +close and the watch is in good condition with the balance in poise, it +is possible to obtain corrections by closing or opening the regulator +pins. + +This, however, can only be resorted to, to a limited extent, as +otherwise the value of the regulator may be impaired. + +The pins should not be closed tight enough to cause "kinking" of the +over coil and they should not be spread apart any more than enough to +make the mean rate about 2 seconds per hour slower. + +Some models of watches consistently require that the pins be closed, +while other models require that they be slightly spread, and it is +therefore advisable not to disturb the pins when cleaning watches +unless they have been bent by incompetent hands. + +It is better to reserve the majority of pin alterations for such time +as the position rate determines the necessity of an alteration. When +the pins are open, however, it is necessary to adjust the coil so that +its vibration will be equal. + +Correct execution in spreading or closing the pins will very often +make it possible to obtain a correction of six or eight seconds +between the vertical and horizontal positions. + + +38. _Method of Examining Vibration of Over Coil Between the Pins._ + +The proper method of examining this vibration is to stop the balance +and observe the movement of the coil between the pins. + +The vibration should be equal at the slightest oscillation of the +balance as well as during the longer arcs. The coil should not rest +against one or the other of the pins at any time unless they are both +closed. Emphasis is placed upon equal vibration of the coil when the +pins are open because of its importance, and if results are not +obtained (as expected) the examination should be repeated to see if +correct conditions have been attained. Examination of this vibration +should be made from both sides of the pins and usually the best +estimate can be obtained by looking between the pins from the stud +side. + + +39. _Position Corrections Obtained by Spreading or Closing the +Regulator Pins._ + +When the regulator pins are tightly closed and the watch has a fast +pendant up position rate, it will be possible to obtain a slower rate +by slightly spreading the pins. + +When the pins are spread and vibration of the coil between them can be +discerned, and the pendant up rate is slow, a faster rate can be +obtained by closing them. + +In spreading the pins they should be drawn away from the coil equally, +as otherwise the coil will strike one pin with more force than the +other, which will not produce results as expected and will cause +uncertain regulation. In closing the pins they should be drawn +together one at a time until both are in equal contact. They should +not be merely squeezed together, as this causes distortion of the coil +at the point of contact. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +FACTORY AND REPAIR SHOP ADJUSTING + + +40. _Routine Varies According to Circumstances._ + +The principles covering the adjustment of watches are the same in the +repair shop as they are in the factory and they are equally the same +in the various lines of high grade watches regardless as to whether +they are of American or foreign extraction. + +The routine covering the work to be done, however, may vary, depending +upon the quantity of watches that are turned out. In the factories +where large numbers of watches are adjusted the adjuster is trained in +the various branches of watch work and eventually devotes his entire +time to adjusting. The watches are generally turned over to him after +they are all assembled and ready for the final balance and spring +work, or after they have been finished and rated, in which instance he +receives only those that are not within the requirements and he then +makes the necessary alterations, after which they are again tested for +results. + +In some repair shops where large numbers of fine watches are handled, +a similar system is used and one competent adjuster devotes his time +principally to the work of timing and adjusting. + + +41. _Considering the Watchmaker in the Small Shop of One or Two +Workmen._ + +By far the greater number of watchmakers are employed in stores having +only one or two workmen who are required to do the cleaning and to +make all repairs. For this reason an adjuster of equal skill could not +do as much actual adjusting as could be done in either of the two +previous instances, but for the same reason he would not be expected +to do as much. + +He can, however, adjust the high grade watches that he repairs just as +closely, and he should not permit himself to feel that time and the +nature of his position prohibits him from doing so. Whether it does, +or does not prevent him from obtaining close rates depends entirely +upon his training and understanding of the necessary details. If he is +skilful and accurate, his output of work in the long run will not be +reduced, his work will give better satisfaction and he will have less +"comebacks" to take up his valuable time. + + +42. _Advantage of Understanding Adjusting Even Though Watches are Not +Tested in Positions or Isochronism._ + +To understand position adjusting thoroughly is of the greatest +advantage in obtaining satisfactory time from any medium or high grade +watches even though they are not to be tested in positions because +vital points will receive intelligent observation where they would +otherwise be overlooked. + + +43. _Concerning Watchmakers of Limited Experience._ + +The previous notes and rules covering pinning points of the hairspring +as detailed by the cuts and descriptions, together with the concrete +adjusting examples to follow would no doubt be of sufficient note for +watchmakers of considerable experience. + +There are, however, many ambitious workmen who have not devoted any +time whatever to the study or practice of adjusting and to whom some +elementary study and practice may be quite indispensable. + +To be of service to this class of workmen chapters XI and XII are +devoted to preliminary notes and practice lessons. + +The contents of these chapters can be worked out in practice by almost +any workman who is capable of holding a position as watchmaker and it +is substantially necessary that they be mastered before finished +results are to be expected. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE FOR BEGINNERS + + +44. _Practical Suggestions._ + +Experience will eventually prove that most of the variations in +positions are caused by apparently insignificant details. The mistake +made by the average repairer is generally that of failing to detect +these details and to make slight corrections where necessary, as he +proceeds with the ordinary cleaning and repairing of the watch. + +This oversight often prevents what would otherwise be excellent +results in timekeeping and makes it necessary to utilize extra time +and labor in the effort to obtain more consistent timekeeping. + + +45. _The First Point of Consideration in Learning to Adjust._ + +The first consideration in position adjusting should be directed +toward equalizing the time in the two horizontal positions. This +equalization should be accomplished entirely by attention to details +that can be plainly seen before arriving at the point of actual timing +of the watch. The principal requirement for equal time between dial up +and dial down is equal arc of motion of the balance in each of the two +positions, and the adjuster should become capable of obtaining this +equal arc of motion before attempting to obtain close rating in the +other positions. + + +46. _Causes of Variation Between Dial Up and Dial Down._ + +Variations between dial up and dial down may be due to one or more of +the following causes which have been arranged in two groups, the +first group consisting of the most frequent and common causes, while +the second group consists of causes equally detrimental but less +common. + +Group No. 1 + + 1. Dirt or thick oil in one or both balance jewels. + 2. Burred or marred balance pivots. + 3. End of one balance pivot flat or rough and opposite pivot polished. + 4. Ends of both balance pivots polished but not same form. + 5. Balance pivot bent. + 6. Hairspring rubbing balance arm or stud. + 7. Hairspring concave or convex in form instead of perfectly level. + 8. Over coil rubbing under balance cock. + 9. Over coil rubbing center wheel. (Some watches). + +Group No. 2 + + 10. Balance pivots fitted too close in jewels. + 11. One pivot having excessive side shake and the opposite close + fitting. + 12. Escape or pallet pivots bent or damaged. + 13. Balance end stone pitted or badly out of flat. + 14. Over coil rubbing outside coil, at point where it curves over + spring. + 15. Balance arm or screw touching pallet bridge. + 16. Balance screw out too far, touching bridge or train wheel. + 17. Safety roller rubbing dial plate or jewel setting. + 18. Fork rubbing impulse roller. + 19. Guard pin rubbing edge of safety roller. + 20. Roller jewel long and rubs guard pin. + + +47. _Short Motion Generally Indicates Where to Find Trouble._ + +Any of the above irregularities will cause a variation in motion +between dial up and dial down and invariably the trouble will be +found on the side which has the shorter motion. For instance, a pivot +that is flat or rough on the end will cause a shorter motion, when it +is down, than will the opposite pivot when it is down, provided that +its end is slightly rounded and highly polished. The same is true when +the oil is gummy or dirty in one jewel and the opposite jewel is clean +and freshly oiled. + +Capped escape or pallet pivots when flat or rough on one end have the +same effect to a lesser degree. + +It is never proper to make the end of a pivot flat or rough and +thereby shorten and equalize the motion. Neither should the ends of +both balance pivots be flattened at any time. On the contrary, the +ends of pivots should always be slightly rounded and highly polished: +there is no logical reason for having them otherwise. + + +48. _Short Motion Sometimes Caused by Burr on Opposite Pivot._ + +There are occasionally instances where a poor motion on one pivot is +caused by a slight burr on the opposite pivot. This is usually due to +the fact that while the burred pivot is running on its own end stone, +there is space enough between the end stone and jewel to give the burr +clearance, but when the position of the watch is reversed, the balance +end shake allowance causes the burr to rub on the top of jewel hole +and prevents perfect freedom of motion when the good pivot is +downward. + + +49. _Examining the Hairspring._ + +The hairspring may be true and level but it should be carefully +examined to see that there is no possibility of touching at any point. +The observation should take place during the full arc of motion of the +balance, for there are some instances in which no rubbing takes place +until the motion accelerates. The watch should be held at different +angles and the space between the balance arm and spring, and the stud +and spring, closely scrutinized for possible contact. The space +between the spring and over coil at the point where the over coil +rises and curves over the spring should be at least equal to the width +of the coils and care should be taken to see that the over coil just +before the point of rising has the usual space between it and the next +coil. Either position in which the hairspring may rub will have a +shorter motion and a gain in time compared to the opposite position in +which there is no interference. + + +50. _Exceptions in Regard to Gaining Rate and Short Motion._ + +Invariably the arc of motion which is the shortest will gain time +compared to the opposite position which has a longer motion. There +are, however, some few instances in which there are exceptions to this +rule, and knowledge of these exceptions is quite valuable in +preventing confusion and doubtfulness in the certainty of making +specific alterations. As an example in the horizontal positions; if +both end stones are perfect and the freedom of one pivot in the jewel +is correct while the opposite pivot has entirely too much freedom, the +motion may be somewhat shorter with the proper fitting pivot downward +while the rate may be slower compared to the opposite position. This +is caused by the balance describing a larger circle when the large +hole jewel is upward, as the pivot is allowed to travel a greater +distance from the center of the hole as it wavers from side to side +during the oscillations. + +When the watch is reversed the weight of the balance prevents the +pivot from wobbling in the large hole and eliminates the possibility +of compensating for the larger circle described by the balance in the +opposite position. + +The same results are possible when the freedom of both pivots is +correct and when one end stone is pitted, as the pit in the stone +causes a short motion when downward and prevents the pivot from +having any side play whatever, while the opposite pivot enjoys full +play to whatever freedom there may be and through this causing a +somewhat larger circle to be described by the balance and a slower +rate in time. + +It should be understood that this does not refer to instances where +the end stone surface is merely slightly worn, but to pittings in +which the surface of the stone has been actually pierced. In most +instances of slight wear the motion will be shorter and the rate fast +which conforms to the general rule covering rate and motion. + + +51. _Detailed Practice._ + +For preliminary practice in position adjusting, select a watch of +about 17 jewels which has just been cleaned and put in order to the +best of one's ability. + +Regulate it so that it will time within ten seconds in twenty-four +hours. Then run it dial up for twenty-four hours and make a notation +as to the number of seconds either fast or slow. Next run it dial down +for twenty-four hours and make note of the number of seconds fast or +slow in this position. If there is a variation in time between the two +positions it will be found that the position having the faster rate of +the two will also have a shorter arc of motion.[B] + +The exact arc of motion in each position can be known by observing the +arms of the balance and comparing the extent of the arc with some +point on the pallet bridge. + +A variation of one-eighth of an inch in motion will generally make a +difference of four or five seconds in the rate and greater variations +will make corresponding increases in the difference. + +When a watch is in good order a correct motion for the horizontal +positions is generally considered to be that of one and one-half turn, +which consists of three-quarters of a revolution of the balance in +each direction. + +Should the motion be very much below this, in both positions, there +may be something wrong with the general condition of the watch or +possibly there may be a weak mainspring at fault, or an imitation +spring that is too long and thick may take up too much room in the +barrel and cause poor motion as surely as will one that is two weak. + +Assuming, however, that the motion is good in one position and drops +off in the other, it is quite probable that only an ordinary position +correction will be required and the immediate problem to be considered +is that of causing the short arc of motion to accelerate enough to +equal the longer arc. The precise correction required will most +probably be found among the causes listed in No. 46, this Chapter. + + +52. _Which Rate to Use as the Unit for Comparison._ + +The horizontal position which has the slower rate of the two should be +considered as the unit which is correct and it will always have the +longer motion of the two, barring the occasional exception as +described in No. 50. + +This longer arc of motion is universally due to a better condition, +while the shorter motion indicates that something is wrong, and it +should always be the aim of the adjuster to improve some condition +that is below standard, rather than to make some good condition a +little worse in order to equalize the rates. + +It may be possible to equalize horizontal rates by flattening the ends +of pivots, but it does not require much more time to improve the +motion in one position than it does to make it a little worse in +another. The advantage is all one way and results either good or bad +depend entirely upon the viewpoint of the worker and how he applies +himself to the situation. + + +53. _Damaged Pivots, Pitted End Stones and Methods of Correction._ + +In the examination of pivots, end stones and jewels, it is necessary +to use a stronger glass than the one used for ordinary work. + +Damaged pivots can often be detected by looking through the end stone +with a strong glass while the balance is moving. If imperfect they +will appear dark or display a slight waver or flash and if they are in +good condition they will appear bright and seem to stand still. They +can also be examined in the lathe and a good true enclosed balance +chuck is of immense value in detecting burrs, chipped edges, rings on +the sides, slight bends and poorly shaped ends. The complete balance +and spring can be inserted and the pivots can be refinished without +disturbing the roller or hairspring. The chuck should be revolving +very slowly when making the examination and moving the belt with the +hand will enable one to see more than can be seen when the lathe is +running at regular speed. Some watchmakers use small bow lathes for +examining and finishing pivots, or the Jacot lathe, which is excellent +for this kind of work. An end stone that has been deeply pitted should +always be discarded and a new one supplied. If the hole is very +slight, however, it can be removed entirely and the surface of the +stone re-polished on a lap charged with No. 5 diamond powder, but the +stone and setting should be thoroughly cleansed by brushing and +pithing before replacement. + +Should a slight particle of diamond or any other hard stone powder +possibly remain on the stone or in the bezel it might eventually enter +the end of pivot and again cause pitting. In case that the end stone +is of the type that is flat and highly polished on both sides, such as +is usually found on detachable dome foreign watches, it can be punched +out with a piece of brass wire or peg wood and replaced in reverse +position, after which the bezel can be closed and the stone will be +just as serviceable as a new one. + +Pivots that have been running on pitted end stones are generally rough +on the end which is charged with some hard substance. They require +special treatment to remove the cause of the pitting and the following +method of refinishing is very good. Place the balance in the lathe and +draw a soft Arkansas oil stone over the end of pivot with pressure +enough to remove a bit of the metal. This will drag out any hard +particles that may be lodged in the end and after this has been done +the pivot should be pithed clean and polished with a smooth hard steel +burnisher covered with oil. + +A hard stone such as sapphire or jasper, or a steel burnisher should +not be used on the pivot until the Arkansas stone has first done its +work, because a hard instrument of this description will force the +small particles that cause the pitting further into the end of the +pivot instead of removing them entirely. + +A pivot that has been treated in this way will not pit the end stone a +second time unless carelessness in the use of hard powder permits +additional particles to come in contact with the pivot or end stone. + +There are some instances in which the steel is highly carbonized but +manufacturers generally use the best steel obtainable for balance +staffs and excessive carbon can generally be detected with a +magnifying glass. Free use of diamond powder and emery wheel dust are +more often responsible. The holes of jewels should never be enlarged +or polished with diamond powder after the jewels have once been placed +in their permanent settings, as this allows the powder to lodge +between the jewel and the setting where it cannot be removed by +cleaning but where it will be drawn out by the oil and charge any +pivot that may be run in the jewel. The grey powder in such instances +may be seen through the top of jewel with a strong glass. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote B: Note Exceptions in No. 50.] + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +PRELIMINARY NOTES AND PRACTICE ON VERTICAL CORRECTIONS + + +54. _Five Principal Causes and Corrections for Pendant Up Variation._ + +The first of the vertical positions to be considered is that of +Pendant Up and to understand the causes of and corrections for +variations in this position completes what is known as three position +adjusting. + +The usual causes of variation in the pendant up position as compared +to the horizontal positions are as follows. + + Poor Motion Pendant Up. + Regulator Pins not properly adjusted. + Balance not in poise. + Hairspring not in circle. + Hairspring not pinned at proper point. + + +55. _Poor Motion, Cause and Effect._ + +Among these causes that of Poor Motion covers a number of troubles +such as roller jewel rubbing in fork, guard pin rubbing roller, strong +lock on the escapement, or no lock on some teeth. + +Such causes may not prevent close rating between the horizontal +positions because of non-interference until the position of the watch +is changed. + +The pendant up motion should therefore be the first vertical point of +investigation and if at fault the cause should be eliminated. In this +connection it should not be expected that the arc of motion in the +pendant up or any other vertical position will be as long as it will +be in the horizontal positions, for when a watch is in excellent +condition in every particular the vertical arcs are always +approximately one-fourth of a turn shorter than the horizontal. + +This is due to frictions and is impossible of correction and therefore +should not be confused with a poor motion of greater extent which has +removable causes that are practical of execution. + +A good motion is to be considered as one of the results to be expected +in overhauling and putting a watch in good order and it should not be +understood that it is particularly to be associated with adjusting +only, nor should any watch be slighted in cleaning and assembling with +the idea that adjusting will correct it in a few minutes' time. On the +other hand it should be understood as fundamental that no watch can be +a close time keeper unless it has a good motion and no good adjuster +will attempt to obtain close time in one position or a close rate in +different positions until the motion is first what it should be. If it +is what it should be, about ninety per cent of the necessary work +required for obtaining close position rates will have been completed. + + +56. _Regulator Pin Practice for Pendant Up Variation._ + +When the watch is in reasonably satisfactory condition and a three +position test proves that the pendant up position has a variation of +from ten to twenty seconds either fast or slow compared to the +horizontal positions, the regulator pins may be the first point of +examination. If there is considerable vibration of the coil between +them, and the pendant rate is slow, it will be necessary to close the +pins and if the rate is fast and the pins are found to be closed so +that there is no vibration of the coil, it will be necessary to spread +them slightly. Closing the pins will of course make the general timing +of the watch faster and spreading them will make it slower and +therefore it will be necessary to regulate the watch for one or two +seconds per hour before again testing it in positions. The result of +either operation, however, will be to cause the rate in the pendant up +position to conform more closely to the horizontal rates. + +Preliminary and profitable two position experiments can be made +between dial up and pendant up, by having the pins closed on most any +watch that is in good order and timing it within five or ten seconds +in twenty-four hours, then rating it in these two positions. Next +spread the pins slightly, re-time the watch and rate it in the same +two positions and compare the variations. A few experiments of this +description will soon demonstrate as to the extent of correction that +can be obtained in this way.[C] The rule of equal vibration of the +coil between the pins after they have been spread must be rigidly +enforced. + + +57. _Pendant Up Corrections Through Poise of Balance._ + +Assuming that the motion and regulator pins seem to be satisfactory, +the next point of investigation should be the poise of balance. The +hairspring should be removed and the pivots known to be straight and +polished before testing. The rollers are of course a part of the +balance and are not to be removed. A perfectly poised balance can be +stopped at any point on the tool and it should at least remain +stationary at each of the four quarters of its circumference. No. 28, +Chapter VII, should be consulted for details on poise corrections. + + +58. _Concentricity of the Hairspring._ + +The next point of consideration may be the concentricity of the +hairspring, and it is quite important that the spring be centered as +nearly perfect as the trained eye can determine. Any unusual pressure +of the spring in one direction will cause undue friction and a fast +rate compared to the opposite direction. + +There are several easy tests for determining as to how nearly the +spring may be centered. One of these is to look straight down upon the +spring and examine the space between the coils that extend beyond the +circumference of the dome. This test may be made in three ways, one +with the balance at rest, one with the coils of the spring wound up +and the third with the coils unwound. With the balance at rest and the +spring centered there will be the same space between the coils all +around as though the spring were out of the watch entirely and laying +on the bench. + +If it is not properly centered there will be more space between the +coils on one side than there will be on the opposite. The same +conditions will be apparent when the spring is wound up, although the +coils will all be nearer to each other than they were with the balance +at rest, and when they are unwound the coils will all be farther apart +with the same apparent difference on opposite sides when the centering +is not correct. + +The winding and unwinding of the spring is alternating and almost +instantaneous, as the balance oscillates from one extreme to the +other. For observation of the spring when it is wound or unwound it is +necessary to stop the balance with the finger or camel's hair brush as +it reaches its extreme arc of motion, then hold it stationary for a +few seconds while the space between the coils is being examined. The +balance should then be allowed to swing to the opposite extreme, when +it should again be held for examination of the coils. In one of these +extremes the coils will be wound and in the other they will be unwound +and after a few experiments in stopping and starting the balance it +will be found that the entire examination will not require over ten +seconds' time. + +When the spring is not properly centered the reason is of course +found in some curve of the over coil and the most usual point at fault +is the section or curve on which the regulator pins act. If the coils +open too wide on the side where the regulator pins are located this +section of the coil will be too near the center and should be moved +outward, possibly equal to one-half or one full space of the coils. If +the coils are too close on the side where the pins are it will +probably be found that the section requires shifting toward the center +slightly. The balance should be removed from the watch in either +instance and the coil circled with the over-coiling tweezer, although +experienced workmen can frequently make excellent corrections with a +fine pointed tweezer without removing the balance. + +Finely adjusted watches will always be found to have springs as nearly +perfectly centered as it is possible for expert workmen to get them +and it is quite interesting and instructive to observe the vibration +of a perfect spring by any one interested in the work. + +Some watchmakers center the spring on the balance cock before it is +staked on the balance and very good results can be obtained in this +way. The balance cock is placed on the bench in the inverted position +which makes it easy to locate the point or curve requiring alteration. + + +59. _Correcting Pendant Up Variation Through Pinning Point +Alterations._ + +Should most careful investigation of the condition of the watch +indicate that the Motion, Regulator Pins, Poise of Balance and +Centering of the Hairspring as well as the general condition of the +watch are satisfactory and the rating show that there is still +considerable variation between the horizontal positions and the +pendant up position there is still one source through which positive +correction may be obtained. + +This refers to the relative positions of the collet and stud pinning +points which is defined with explanatory cuts and formula in Chapter +VIII. + + +60. _Percentage of Watches Requiring Correction of Position Rates._ + +In constructing this chapter and the preceding one it has been +preferred to go into detail for the purpose of defining the possible +corrections and alterations, together with the results to be expected. +Not every watch demanding position correction would require the extent +of investigation and possible alteration that is pointed out and in +most instances the direct cause will be disclosed with very little +investigation. In fact, the experienced adjuster can tell almost +immediately where to look for trouble by merely observing the position +rate as entered on the card. + +It should also be clearly understood by the student that when the +repairing and cleaning of high grade watches is done by one who +understands the details of adjusting, there will be only a very small +proportion of the watches requiring position corrections. As a rule +among experienced adjusters there will be about seventy per cent of +the watches that will have very close rates. If, therefore, one +hundred watches are put in order and tested in positions there should +be seventy that do not require any correction, while about thirty will +require either minor or major alteration. The time required for making +alterations on this thirty per cent of the watches will be offset by a +smaller percentage of unsatisfactory returns and a better reputation +for doing good work. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote C: See Chapter IX, on Regulator Pin Alterations.] + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE THREE POSITION ALTERATIONS AND +LABOR UTILIZED + + +61. _Order of Position Timing and Method of Calculating the +Variation._ + +In submitting the previous chapters it is assumed that the average +ambitious watchmaker will gain enough knowledge from the various +details to enable him to understand the meaning of the adjustment of +watches, the causes of variations and the principal alterations for +obtaining corrections. + +There are many features covered that will enable him to develop in +practice and to experiment in individual points of importance, without +running up against mathematical deductions that halt and discourage +further interest in the subject. + +To understand the principles constitutes a large percentage of the +qualifications required and to be able to execute the practical +alterations and corrections required in different kinds of variations +completes the general qualifications. It would hardly be sufficient, +however, to conclude the work at this point without giving more +definite examples for comparison, together with some indication as to +the approximate time that may ordinarily be utilized in doing the work +and also showing some instances of a possible choice of several +alterations and why a particular alteration is advisable. For this +reason the following examples will be found to have an important part +in fulfilling the mission of this book. + +In selecting these examples the fineness of results has not been the +principal consideration. The deciding factor was the differences in +variation and alterations, and the fact that they cover the widest +field for general instruction that could be selected from hundreds of +equally good rates among various models of watches which, with three +exceptions, were put in order for railroad service. + +The method of computing the variation from one position to any other +is similar to that used in temperature adjusting as described in +Chapter 3, No. 13. The watch should first be timed closely and then +rated for twenty-four hours in each position. It should be wound +before being started in each position but should be set only on the +first day so that the time is never disturbed. + +The first position to be rated is universally Dial Up, then in +succession Dial Down, Pendant Up, Pendant Right and Pendant Left. The +daily total number of seconds fast or slow should be entered in the +first column of the rate card after each twenty-four hours run. This +column then constitutes the progressive rate from which the actual +variation between the different positions is ascertained. + +The figure in the upper square is first carried out to the adjoining +column at its full value and then the difference between this figure +and that of the second square is entered in the second square of +second column, and so on until the difference between each of the +succeeding squares of first column is registered in the second column. + +If the figure in a square of first column is greater than that in the +preceding square the carried out figure would be entered in second +column as + If the figure is less than the preceding square it would +be carried out as-. + +The total variation in positions is obtained from the figures entered +in second column. If these figures are all entered as either plus or +minus it is necessary to merely subtract the lesser figure from the +greater. If, however, some figures are entered as plus and others as +minus it will be necessary to add the greater figure of each of the +two denominations. + + +62. _Example No. 1, Three Positions._ + +Columbus, No. 358846, Open Face, 17 Jewels. + +Repairs Made. New balance staff, two balance screws changed, +hairspring trued and cleaned. + +After timing the watch closely it was tested in three positions and +found to have a variation of eleven seconds fast pendant up as per +second column, Fig. 16. + +Fig. 16 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _358846_ Make _Columbus_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 1 | + 1 | + 4 | + 4 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | 0 | - 1 | + 7 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +10 | +10 | +14 | + 7 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 11 4 + +Investigation showed the hairspring to be pinned nearly correct, true +level and in circle; balance true; regulator pins closed and motion +satisfactory. A correction could have been made in one of several +ways; either by making a slight alteration of the pinning point at the +collet; correcting a possible slight error in poise or by slightly +spreading the regulator pins. + +As the extent of variation did not indicate any serious error at any +particular point for a watch of this description the possible poise +error and the slight variation in the pinning point were waived and +the regulator pins were spread just enough so that slight equal +vibration of the coil could be seen with a double eyeglass. After this +alteration the mean time was found to be one second per hour slow +which was corrected on the mean time screws and the next test showed +that the variation had been reduced to four second as per fourth +column, Fig. 16. The time consumed in making the alteration aside from +the repairing was less than ten minutes. + + +63. _Example No. 2, Three Positions._ + +Ball No. B060816, Open Face, 17 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Refinished balance pivots and cleaned. The first test in +positions disclosed a variation of thirty-five seconds as per second +column Fig. 17. + +Investigation found the balance true; hairspring true, level and +circle; regulator pins very nearly closed and the motion one and +one-eighth turn. This rate like example No. 1, was also fast in the +pendant up position, but the greater extent of the error indicated +that there must be some serious poise error, and upon investigation +this was found to be the case. A screw on the roller jewel side or at +the bottom when the balance was at rest was found to be heavy. This +was corrected and the next test showed a much improved rate although +there was still a variation of eight seconds fast pendant up as per +fourth column Fig. 17. + +Fig. 17 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _B060816_ Make _Ball_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | + 7 | + 7 | + 7 | + 7 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 2 | 0 | +14 | + 7 | +14 | + 7 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +37 | +35 | +29 | +15 | +24 | +10 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 35 8 3 + +A better rate than this was desired and further examination proved +that the locking of the pallet stones and escape teeth was quite +strong and caused the pendant up motion to have a shorter arc than +would have been entirely desirable. An alteration was made by pushing +the receiving stone further back into the slot and rebanking the +escapement. The third position test showed an improved motion and a +variation of three seconds as per sixth column. The total time +required for making the alterations was about three quarters of an +hour. + + +64. _Example No. 3, Three Positions._ + +Elgin No. 7457488. Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Cleaned; polished pivots and new mainspring fitted. The +first position test showed a variation of nineteen seconds as per +second column, Fig. 18. + +It will be noted that this example differs from Nos. 1 and 2, in that +the rate is slow in the pendant up position. Examination showed all +points satisfactory except that the regulator pins were spread +considerably and allowed too much freedom of vibration for the coil. + +Had this vibration been slight it would have been advisable to examine +the poise. As it was considerable, however, the alteration made was to +close the pins so that only slight vibration was visible with a strong +glass. + +Fig. 18 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _7457488_ Make _Elgin_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | - 9 | - 9 | + 5 | + 5 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | -18 | - 9 | + 8 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | -46 | -28 | + 9 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 19 4 + +This watch was not equipped with mean time screws and it was therefore +necessary to fit a pair of thin timing washers because closing the +pins caused a gaining rate of two seconds per hour in the mean time. +The next position test showed a variation of four seconds as per +fourth column Fig. 18. + +The time consumed in making the alteration and fitting the washers was +about ten minutes. + + +65. _Example No. 4, Three Positions._ + +Hampden No. 1438676, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff and hole jewel fitted and cleaned. + +The first position test showed a variation of twelve seconds slow +pendant up as per second column Fig. 19. + +Fig. 19 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1438676_ Make _Hampden | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 4 | + 2 | + 6 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | - 6 | -10 | + 9 | + 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 2 + +Investigation found all points such as balance true, hairspring true, +level and circle and the regulator pins reasonably satisfactory. The +motion, however, was not as good as it should have been when the +spring was nearly wound up. It was let down to where it would +ordinarily be after about twenty-hours run and found to have barely +one turn pendant up and a trifle over one turn in the flat positions. +This proved that the motion was not satisfactory for a watch that had +just been put in order and all pivots were examined for close end or +side shake; they were found to be satisfactory and the mainspring was +removed for examination and found to be somewhat set and about 0.01 +mm. thinner than those generally used for this grade watch. A new +mainspring was fitted and the motion was improved by about one-fourth +of a turn and the next position test showed a variation of two seconds +as per fourth column Fig. 19. The time consumed in examination and +changing the mainspring was about twenty-five minutes. + +The three position limit of variation allowed by most manufacturers +and railroad inspectors is seven seconds from one position to any +other. Records of thousands of watches on which the work has been +carefully done in putting the watches in order, show that about +seventy per cent of the watches will rate within five seconds in the +three positions without making alterations and that only ten per cent +will be close to the limit of seven seconds, while about twenty per +cent will require alterations such as shown in the four examples +above. (See Chapter XII, No. 60.) + +One or two more examples might be introduced to show variations and +corrections between dial up and dial down; this feature has been +pretty well covered however in Chapter XI, and five position example +No. 9 also shows a variation of the horizontal rates with correction. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +CONCRETE EXAMPLES SHOWING DEFINITE FIVE POSITION ALTERATIONS AND LABOR +UTILIZED + + +66. _What Five Position Adjusting Consists of--Detailed Allowances._ + +Five position adjusting consists of a further refinement of the +condition of the watch. The fact that a very close rate is shown in +the first three positions is not an indication that the watch will be +an excellent timepiece under all conditions. + +In fact there are instances where there may be an excellent three +position rate and a further test in the pendant right and left +positions may disclose some error that would positively prevent close +timing in service. Even under the five position test the limit of +allowance must be reasonably close or unfavorable conditions may exist +and cause irregularity in timing. + +A popular allowance for very fine watches among Swiss and some +American manufacturers is six seconds variation for the five positions +as an extreme limit, and for medium high grades ten seconds extreme +variation is considered a fair allowance. These allowances are +graduated, however, and a six seconds extreme allowance watch would +have an allowance not exceeding three seconds in the horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional in the pendant up position and +one second additional in either the pendant right or pendant left +positions. + +Watches having an extreme allowance of ten seconds may be permitted to +have not more than five seconds variation between the two horizontal +positions, with two seconds additional for the pendant up position +and still three seconds additional in either the pendant right or left +positions. + +It will be noted that there is considerable difference between six or +ten second allowances of this description and straight limits of six +or ten seconds. + +Some manufacturers have greater limits of allowance, sometimes as +great as twenty-five seconds for the five positions, but as a rule the +first three positions are required to rate within seven seconds and +the difference of eighteen seconds is divided between the right and +left positions. + +Under limits of this description a watch that would not be tolerated +under the six or ten seconds class would be considered as good. +Watches having such large allowances, however, and rating close to the +limit are hardly justified in being considered as adjusted to five +positions. The fact that they are so considered however, is the reason +why watchmakers will sometimes fine wide variation in new watches +before they have been damaged or mishandled. The following five +position examples were selected with the same care as were the three +position specimens and will be found to cover a wide field of +variation for comparison with rates that the adjuster may desire to +correct. + + +67. _Example No. 5._ + +Hamilton, No. 248027; Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff and cleaned. The first test in five +positions showed a variation of twenty seconds as per second column +Fig. 20. It will be noted that in four of the positions the rate was +quite close and that the pendant right position had an extremely fast +rate. + +A casual investigation indicated that all points relating to the +spring, regulator pins and balance were reasonably satisfactory but +that there was a slight falling off in motion in the pendant right +position. Further investigation of this feature disclosed a slight +striking sound when the watch was held to the ear in this position. +The dial was removed and the bankings were closed to drop whereupon it +was discovered that the fork was long on the inside, or when the +receiving stone was locked on the escape teeth. This prevented the +roller jewel from passing through the fork freely as it did on the +opposite side. + +The balance pivots had the limit of allowance for side shake which +aided the cause of the roller jewel in striking. + +Fig. 20 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _248027_ Make _Hamilton_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 1 | + 1 | + 3 | + 3 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 2 | + 1 | + 7 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 4 | + 2 | + 8 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | +22 | +18 | +12 | + 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | +20 | - 2 | + 8 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 20 8 + +After correcting the roller jewel shake and readjusting the slide and +guard pin freedom the next test showed a variation of eight seconds in +the five positions as per fourth column Fig. 20. The side shake of the +balance pivots was not detrimental after the real cause of the +variation had been removed and therefore no correction was required in +this respect. + +If the error in the escapement had not existed and if the watch had +shown the same rate with all points appearing to be satisfactory, the +trouble would most likely have been found in the poise of balance with +the upper side heavy in the pendant right position. + +The time consumed in making the correction was about one half hour. + + +68. _Example No. 6._ + +Elgin. B. W. Raymond. No. 4,109,543, Open Face, 15 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New fourth pinion; new end stone; mainspring; refinished +balance pivots and cleaned. Note that this was only a 15-Jewel watch. + +It belonged to a railroad engineer, however, who wanted it placed in +first class condition, as it had not been satisfactory. The first five +position test showed an error of twenty-four seconds as per second +column Fig. 21. + +Examination of the motion, pivots, regulator pins, escapement and +poise proved them to be satisfactory. + +The hairspring however, was found to be pinned at the slow pendant up +point as per illustration in Fig. 22. + +Fig. 21 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _4109543_ Make _Elgin_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 8 | + 8 | + 2 | + 2 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | +16 | + 8 | + 3 | + 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | 0 | -16 | + 2 | - 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P R | + 4 | + 4 | - 1 | - 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P L | - 1 | - 5 | - 6 | - 5 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 24 7 + +The alteration made was to break out one-half of the inner coil at +collet so that it was pinned at the fast point as illustrated in +Fig. 23. + +A pair of balance screws were removed and a heavier pair fitted to +correct the mean time, which would have been about ten minutes fast in +twenty-four hours because of shortening the spring. + +The balance was repoised and the next test in positions showed a +variation of seven seconds as per fourth column Fig. 21. + +The time required for making the alteration was about one half hour. + +[Illustration: Fig. 22] + +[Illustration: Fig. 23] + +This watch was a full plate model with the train developing to the +left from the center and illustrations No. 22 and 23 are given to +show that, while the train follows the Swiss development, the spring +follows the American method and develops to the right from the collet +even though it is located to the left of the watch center. The +principle remains the same as that illustrated by Figs. 9 and 11 and +explained in Chapter VIII. + + +69. _Example No. 7._ + +Waltham. No. 10504112. Open Face, Vanguard model, 23 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Cleaned and new hole jewel. + +First five position test showed a very erratic rate as per second +column Fig. 24. + +Investigation proved that the motion dropped off considerably after a +few hours run and that the mainspring was too weak for this grade of +watch. A proper mainspring was fitted which in turn corrected the +motion, but the next test in positions proved that there was still a +variation of eighteen seconds as per fourth column Fig. 24. + +Fig. 24 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _10504112_ Make _Waltham_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | 0 | 0 | - 2 | - 2 | - 1 | - 1 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | 0 | 0 | - 5 | - 3 | - 1 | 0 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | +14 | +14 | -21 | -16 | - 4 | - 3 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | + 4 | -10 | -19 | + 2 | - 5 | - 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | +16 | +12 | -25 | - 6 | - 3 | + 2 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 24 18 5 + +The balance and spring were removed and considerable poise trouble was +discovered. The trouble was at different points of the balance and no +one location seemed to be heavy at all times. The balance pivots were +carefully gauged with a metric micrometer and found to be out of +round, or to be exact, more oval in form than cylindrical. A new staff +with round pivots was fitted, after which the balance was easily +poised and the next test showed a variation of five seconds as per +sixth column Fig. 24. The total time required for making the +examination and alterations was about one hour. + + +70. _Example No. 8._ + +Vacheron and Constantin. No. 272,854, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff, hole jewel, cap jewel, glass, and +cleaned. + +The first test after making the repairs showed a variation of twelve +seconds as per second column Fig. 25. + +It will be observed that the rates in the horizontal positions are on +the fast side and those in the vertical positions are on the slow +side. In this instance the hairspring developed to the left from the +collet similar to the illustration shown in Fig. 10, page 45. + +Fig. 25 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _272854_ Make _V. & C._ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | - 4 | - 4 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | + 5 | + 3 | - 8 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | - 1 | - 6 | -14 | - 6 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | - 8 | - 7 | -21 | - 7 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | -17 | - 9 | -25 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 12 3 + +Investigation found the escapement, regulator pins and pinning point +satisfactory; the motion was one and one-fourth turn in the vertical +positions when fully wound and only a trifle less when partially let +down. In the flat positions, however, the motion was very little +better than in the vertical, which indicated either pivot or end +stone trouble as under normal conditions the flat motion would be +about one-fourth turn greater than that of the vertical. + +Inspection of the end stones proved that they were satisfactory but +the ends of the balance pivots were found to be somewhat flat and not +perfectly polished. + +The ends of the pivots were slightly rounded and highly polished, the +jewels and end stones cleaned and reoiled and the balance replaced, +after which the motion in the flat positions was one and one-half turn +with the mainspring fully wound and only slightly less when partially +let down. + +The motion in the vertical positions was also slightly improved and +the next test in position showed a variation of three seconds as per +fourth column Fig. 25. + +Time required for making the above alteration was about one-half hour. + +In the study of this example it should be clearly understood that when +the ends of balance pivots are flat, burred or not well polished, or +when the end stones are dry or dirty the motion in the horizontal +positions will be shorter than normal and this will always cause the +rate to be faster than it should be. Acceleration of the motion in +such instances by means of refinishing the pivot ends or by cleaning +and reoiling the jewels and end stones will always produce a slower +rate through causing a longer arc of motion. + +This point is covered in Chapter XI, No. 47. + + +71. _Example No. 9._ + +E. Howard. No. 1,116,735. Open Face, 23 Jewels. + +Repairs made. New balance staff; hole jewel; mainspring and cleaned. + +The first test in positions showed a variation of eleven seconds. The +rate in all positions was fast with the exception of the dial down +rate, which was slow. See Fig. 26. + +At first glance it might appear that by causing a faster rate of six +or seven seconds in the dial down position the watch would have a very +good rate. This, however, would not be consistent unless the rate was +due to the exception referred to in Chapter XI, No. 50. + +Examination of the motion in the horizontal positions proved that it +was about one fourth turn better in the dial down position than it was +in the dial up position which rate compared very closely with the +vertical positions. It was therefore evident that the dial up rate was +not true and investigation found the oil in the upper jewel had become +thickened by the entrance of dirt which caused the short motion and +fast rate when the balance was running on this end stone. + +Fig. 26 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1116735_ Make _E. Howard_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | + 2 | + 2 | - 5 | - 5 | + 2 | + 2 | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | - 3 | - 5 | -10 | - 5 | + 4 | + 2 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 1 | + 4 | - 6 | + 4 | + 9 | + 5 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | + 7 | + 6 | 0 | + 6 | +10 | + 1 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | + 9 | + 2 | + 2 | + 2 | +14 | + 4 | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + 11 11 4 + +After thoroughly cleaning the jewel, end stone and pivot, the motion +in the dial up position was improved and equaled that of the dial down +position. + +The next position test showed the horizontal rates to be equal but the +variation of eleven seconds in the five positions still existed as per +fourth column Fig. 26. The vertical rates were all fast compared to +the horizontal; the regulator pins were found to be slightly open +which prevented a correction at this point. The locking of the +escapement was examined and found to be satisfactory, so the balance +was again removed and tested for poise which was also found +satisfactory. + +The hairspring was pinned at the usual fast point as per illustration +in Fig. 9, Chapter VIII. The most positive alteration to be made under +the circumstances was to break off the spring at the collet and repin +it at about 45 deg. above the horizontal line. This would be slightly +approaching the slow point as explained in detail in Chapter VIII, No. +35. + +The mean rate of the watch would necessarily be faster after +shortening the spring; the mean time screws were found to be turned in +close to the rim and were each turned out about one full turn to +compensate for the gain. The poise was tested and found to remain +correct and the next position test showed a variation of four seconds +as per sixth column Fig. 26. + +The total time required for the alterations was about one hour. + + +72. _Example No. 10._ + +Illinois. No. 1,483,023, Open Face, 21 Jewels. + +Repairs made. Trued and poised balance, new balance jewel and cleaned. + +This example has been selected for the purpose of illustrating a test +in the sixth or pendant down position and to give a practical +demonstration showing that the rates in the pendant down and pendant +up positions can be reversed, with positive results, through reversing +the collet pinning point of the spring, as covered in "Relative +Pinning Points" Chapter VIII. + +This alteration can be undertaken with assurance of results even +though there may be serious errors of construction in the watch. + +The first five position test proved that the rate pendant up was +extremely fast compared to all other rates as per second column Fig. +27. + +Investigation proved that the hairspring was properly centered and +pinned at the fast pendant point and that the regulator pins were +slightly spread with equal vibration of the coil between them. The +motion was about one and one-fourth turn pendant up and over one and +one-half turn in the horizontal positions when the mainspring was +nearly full wound. The ends of balance pivots were found to be +perfectly flat, which was no doubt due to an effort to produce a +faster rate in the flat positions to cause them to compare more +favorably with the pendant up rate. This, however, was unsuccessful as +indicated by the rate. + +It is quite possible that if the watch ever was closely rated it was +due to counterpoise of the balance as with the present rate the poise, +escapement and regulator pins were satisfactory and did not admit of +further corrections that would be of advantage. + +By examining the P. U. rate in second column Fig. 27, it will be found +to be twelve seconds fast and then by referring to the separate P. D. +(Pendant Down) rate at the bottom, it will be found to be four seconds +slow. Adding these figures gives a total variation of sixteen seconds +between these two positions. + +Fig. 27 + + +--------------------------------------------------+ + | No. _1483023_ Make _Illinois_ | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | D U | - 3 | - 3 | - 1 | - 1 | | | P | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | D D | - 8 | - 5 | - 2 | - 1 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P U | + 4 | +12 | - 6 | - 4 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P R | 0 | - 4 | - 4 | + 2 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | + | P L | - 6 | - 6 | - 7 | - 3 | | | | + +--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ + | P.D. | - 4 +11 | + +--------+-----------------------+ + +Now if these rates were reversed and the P. D. rate was in the place +of the P. U. rate the watch would have shown a very good position +rate in the first five positions and the greater part of the sixteen +seconds variation would have been in the pendant down position where +it would be of the least disadvantage. In order to obtain this +condition the collet pinning point was changed from the fast to the +slow point, or from "E", Fig. 9, to "G", Fig. 11, Chapter VIII. + +A pair of heavier screws were fitted to the balance to compensate for +the difference in time caused by shortening the spring and the next +five position test showed a variation of six seconds. A separate +pendant down test proved that the pendant up and pendant down rates +had been practically reversed as shown in the fourth column. + + +73. _Causes of Extremely Fast Vertical Rates._ + +Extremely fast pendant up rates are not particularly unusual, although +the causes and corrections may be widely different. + +For instance, the poise and motion feature, No. 28, Chapter VII, may +be responsible, or the balance may be in poise and the collet having a +wide slot may cause out of poise and be responsible if the slot is +located at the proper point. A defective escapement or regulator pins +tightly closed may also be responsible. Should these points be found +satisfactory, however, the rate is generally due to one of three +causes. + +1. Excessive side friction of pivots because of being too large in +diameter. + +2. Train wheels and pinions being of incorrect proportion and causing +irregular motion and affecting the vertical positions mostly. + +3. Centrifugal force, which would cause the balance rims to spring +outward in the longer arcs of vibration and thereby produce an +abnormal slow rate in the horizontal positions where the arc of +motion is always longest. This is due to the balance rims being too +heavy in proportion to the arms or center bar. + + * * * * * + +When either of these three conditions are found there will be others +among the same lot of watches, but as a rule they are only found on +older watches made before correct proportions were firmly established. + +Train depthings can often be improved if the workman is equipped with +a rounding up machine and knows how to use it. Otherwise the watch can +be sent to the factory for correction and the only alternative of the +repairer is to cut the spring to the slow point, or counterpoise, with +the intention of eliminating expense and getting as good results as +can be expected for the financial returns that are to be received. + + +74. _How to Locate Defective Gearings._ + +Defective gear or depthing of wheels can be detected in two ways, one +by observing the engaging surfaces of the wheel teeth and another by +testing the engagement of wheel and pinion. + +If the gearing is correct, observation will show that the engaging +surfaces of the wheel teeth are smooth and either dark or possibly +polished from wearing away of the plating. If the gearings are not +correct the engaging surfaces will have cuts or ridges crosswise which +have been produced by the pinion leaves. + +The cause of this cutting is due to either a faulty construction of +the teeth or to the fact that the pitch circle of the wheel is too +small while that of the pinion is too large. + +Testing the gearing in the watch is accomplished by placing the +engaging wheel and pinion in the watch so that they are free to turn +without engaging with any other wheel. A piece of ivory or celluloid +several inches long and about the diameter of a piece of peg wood +should be pointed at one end and this end should be held between the +upper pivot and oil cup of the jewel, with enough pressure of the left +hand to cause friction in turning the pinion. The larger wheel should +then be turned in the direction in which it revolves when running; +this is accomplished with a piece of peg wood held in the right hand. + +If the gearing is perfect there will be smoothness as the wheel and +pinion turn and if it is imperfect there will be a butting effect in +the action. Should there be a slight intermittent stepping action due +to drop of the wheel teeth on the pinion leaves it should not be +mistaken for butting as this is not detrimental and will not cause +cutting of the teeth. + +Watches that have below standard train gearings require considerably +stronger mainsprings than do those which have correct gearing and they +will seldom take a reasonably good motion without a strong spring. + +A safe way to judge gearings if in doubt is by the motion and the +engaging surfaces of the wheel teeth. If the motion is steady and the +teeth are not cut by the pinion leaves they may be considered as +satisfactory. If the motion is steady for a time and then suddenly +drops off there is generally something wrong in the gearing. The wheel +and pinion in error can be determined by noting at what particular +intervals the motion decreases. In nearly all instances this condition +will cause a gaining rate in the vertical positions because of the +fact that the vertical arcs are shorter and comparatively more easily +affected than the horizontal arcs. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +TIMING AND FINAL REGULATION + + +75. _Mean Time Screws and Timing Washers._ + +In the general overhauling of watches, changing staffs, retruing and +repoising of balances it is often necessary to make corrections of +several minutes per day in the mean time. + +For this reason and for the convenience of the future some +manufacturers have provided from two to four mean time screws in the +balances. A complete revolution of these screws either in or out, +generally corrects any variation that may be required and frequently +considerably less is all that is required in bringing the watch to +time. + +It is of course necessary that these screws be turned in opposite +pairs as well as equal distances and that they be fitted with enough +friction to prevent looseness and not too tight to cause bending of +the pivots when they are turned. + +If properly used for the purpose for which they were intended they are +of inestimable value to the repairing fraternity in producing results. + +The manufacturers of some watches do not supply mean time screws with +the balances and the repairer is obliged to depend entirely upon +timing washers for fast corrections, for it is, of course, not to be +expected that repair shops will carry an assortment of all different +kinds of screws such as the factories are able to maintain. + +Occasionally a jeweler or watchmaker will be found who has strenuous +objections to the use of timing washers in any sense, but unless they +are supplied with a large assortment of the various makes and weights +of screws and are willing to use the extra time required for properly +changing the screws it is difficult to see just what legitimate +alternative they can adopt. Investigation of this point disclosed the +fact that the method employed by some watchmakers was to spread the +regulator pins, which would of course make the mean time slower but +would certainly destroy the adjustment to positions and make it +practically impossible to obtain results from the regulator. + +It is admittedly poor workmanship to use ill-fitting washers and poor +taste to use brass washers on high grade gold screw balances, but the +fact should not be overlooked that the manufacturers of many fine +watches use washers to a limited extent, even when an abundance of +balance screws are available and very fine Swiss models are often +supplied with a pair of thin platinum washers which are not easily +detected. The regulator should not be moved from the center of the +index in correcting the mean time but should be used for minor final +regulation only. The length of the hairspring should also not be +disturbed in correcting the mean time of an adjusted watch and while a +slow rate can be corrected by reducing the weight of a pair of balance +screws it is necessary to use either heavier screws or washers for +correcting a fast rate. + + +76. _Importance of Properly Fitted Regulator._ + +Final regulation of watches is necessary after making repairs +regardless as to whether they have been adjusted to positions or not. +Position rating does not necessarily suggest that the timing has been +completed as the object is only to limit the variations from one +position to any other and a test of three or four days should always +be made in one position after the position rating has been completed. +This additional timing has for its purpose the close regulation of the +watch either in the pendant up position or in the position it is +carried. The last column on the rate card is reserved for this +purpose. In this respect the repairer who comes in contact with the +customer may gain considerable advantage by noting in which pocket the +watch is usually carried and then being guided in the final regulation +by this knowledge. The method of doing this regulating consists +generally of moving the regulator which requires certain attention to +be effective when it is moved. + +The regulator should be carefully fitted around the dome and all +attachments in connection should be tightly fitted to the plate or +bridge so that they will remain rigid when regulation takes place. + +The tension around the dome should be even and if a tension spring is +used in connection it should be strong enough to keep the regulator +against the screw constantly without sticking at any point as the +screw is moved forward and backward. + +It should also be closely examined to see that there is no shake. This +can be determined by lightly taking hold of the segment holding the +regulator pins and moving it up and down and side ways before the +tension spring is fitted. This should be examined with a glass and a +correction made if any looseness is noted. + + +77. _Effect of the Middle Temperature Error._ + +In the final regulation of watches it is important that the middle +temperature error receive due consideration. This error is always a +few seconds fast as explained in temperature adjusting Chapter V, No. +21, and is of some consequence in the larger number of complaints +regarding losing rates in the pocket, compared to complaints of +gaining rates. + +The position rating as well as the final regulation is generally done +in normal temperature which produces a rate from two to four seconds +faster than the heat extreme and it is to be expected that the pocket +rate will be slower because the temperature will be higher than +normal. This loss may not be the full amount of the middle error as +it would depend upon the actual temperature encountered for the entire +twenty-four hours and the watch may only be subjected to the pocket +temperature for a part of this period. This works in exactly the same +way in a lower temperature, as the variation is a loss in either +direction from the middle or normal temperature and in case that the +watch should be subjected to a freezing temperature at night the +result will be a loss during that period. + +As an example we will assume the regulation of a watch in which the +temperature rate at the extremes of 40 deg. and 90 deg. Fahr. is +perfect, while at the temperature of 70 deg. it will time four +seconds fast. + +Now if this watch is regulated to no variation in the normal +temperature it will be plainly seen that there will be a loss of four +seconds per day if the watch is placed in service at either of the +temperature extremes. If it had been regulated to run four seconds +fast in the middle or normal temperature it would time more nearly +correct in the pocket. + +It is safe to assume that the watch will lose its proportional rate +with a lesser change in temperature and for this reason it is of +advantage to finally regulate all watches from two to four seconds +fast in the rack rather than to time them just correct. + + +78. _Some Practical Reasons for Slow Rates._ + +There are additional reasons for the suggestion of timing watches a +few seconds fast rather than just correct. Among them may be mentioned +the fact that many watches are carried in the left vest pocket, and +that in this instance they very often assume the pendant right +position which is generally a trifle slow compared to pendant up in +most watches of close adjustment. Magnetism to any extent whatever +always causes a slow rate and this will have its effect whenever the +balance, hairspring, regulator, regulator spring or pallet are +slightly effected or when the mainspring, large winding wheels or +case springs are considerably charged and experiments have shown that +in no instance has a fast rate been produced from this cause. + +The gradual weakening or loss of elastic force of the hairspring is +also a factor to be considered. + +There are some influences which cause a gaining rate that to some +extent may offset these losses, although in the absence of necessity +for cleaning or other repairs these influences are slight in +comparison to the natural and possible causes for a slow rate. + + + + +PART III + +SPECIAL NOTES + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +SPECIAL NOTES + + +79. _Efficiency of Execution Analyzed (Two Examples)._ + +In performance of the various alterations and corrections that have +been touched upon in the chapters devoted to position adjusting there +are some points that deserve special note. This refers to positive +execution of the correction which the watchmaker sets out to make. + +As an example we may analyze the simple feature of polishing a pivot +and cleaning and reoiling a jewel to improve the motion in one of the +horizontal positions. Ordinarily this would seem to be a very simple +proceeding requiring no additional remarks. + +It is, however, quite possible to go through all of the operations of +removing, cleaning and reoiling the jewel and polishing the pivot and +then find that no improvement has been made in the motion. + +Invariably the workman of moderate experience will say that he has +just cleaned and reoiled the jewel and polished the pivot and that it +must be all right. + +Investigation, however, will sometimes show that the pivot has again +been marred or that a particle of dirt has found its way into the +jewel hole during replacement either through dust in the oil or +through clinging to the end of the pivot when the balance was laying +on the bench. + +This experience is one that comes occasionally to the best and most +careful adjusters and if it is found that results have not been +obtained the first time it will be necessary to go over the operations +a second time. + +It is possible to almost entirely eliminate this duplication of work +if proper care is exercised in examining the pivot and jewel with a +good glass before replacing and in using oil from a closed receptacle +in which it has not been possible for dust to collect. + +The point raised in this instance is that the improvement desired is +not assured because of merely going through the operations of doing +the work. + +It is necessary to actually remove the cause and then keep it removed. +The proof is found in the improved motion and it would hardly be worth +while to retest in positions until this improvement was obtained. + +Proper curvature of the over coil within the range of the regulator +pins is another feature that may be corrected and the correction +unconsciously destroyed in replacing the balance or in centering the +spring. + +A slight kink in the coil close to the regulator pins may cause the +spring to be forced out of center when the regulator is moved, or it +may cause the coil to lay against one pin and cease vibrating between +the pins. This would cause a gain of some seconds per day when the +regulator had actually been moved to cause a slower rate. + +These two examples are introduced to convey the idea that it is +necessary to actually produce the corrections or alterations in any +instance and that close timing and close position rates depend more +upon this practical execution and understanding as displayed by the +watch repairer than they do upon a high degree of technical knowledge. + +Personal instruction of watchmakers in adjusting has demonstrated in +most instances that the refinements are not considered seriously +enough at first, but that consistent practice and reference to the +rules soon make the proper impression, after which results are +attained in less time than was at first required for faulty +execution. + + +80. _Truing the Balance._ + +The balance should invariably be true in the round and flat and always +in poise before it is placed in the watch. + +It is at times pardonable to pass a balance that is not perfectly true +in the round, especially when the watch has been repaired on several +occasions and it is noted that the rims have a tendency to become set +slightly inward or outward after having been perfectly trued. This +shows a natural tendency of the metals to find a permanent position +which may be slightly away from the true concentric form. A balance of +this description may be poised as it is and often will produce better +timing results than would be gained by perfect truing and subsequent +regulation during readjustment of the metals. + +It is advisable to always have the flat true as by doing so any +slightly bent pivots will be detected through wavering of the balance +and the flat is not very frequently affected by setting of the metals. + +Balances should generally be trued and poised in normal or slightly +above normal temperature. If they are trued in a low temperature they +will be out of true and possibly out of poise in the temperature to +which they are mostly subjected. Compensation balances are not +presumed to be true in the round under variations of temperature and +therefore inspection for true is necessary in somewhere near the same +temperature in which they are trued. + + +81. _Poising the Balance._ + +In poising balances it is necessary to consider the mean rate of the +watch and several details in connection therewith. + +If the rate is known to be fast, weight should be added to the light +side, and if it is known to be slow weight may be removed from the +heavy side. + +If the rims of the balance have been trued outward it is a safe rule +to remove weight from the heavy side in poising and if they have been +bent inward to get the balance true, weight should be added to the +light side in poising. + +A balance that is in perfect poise can be brought to a perfect stop on +a fine jeweled poising tool at any point of its circumference. For +ordinary work it is generally considered as satisfactory if it can be +brought to a perfect stop at each of the four quarters. When the heavy +point seems to be first at one place and then just opposite it is +proof that either a pivot is bent or oval in form instead of round. + +In some instances balances will be found to swing slightly and stop at +several different places. This is usually an indication that there are +several flat places on one or both pivots and if the watch is a fine +one the staff will require changing or the pivots may be rounded up on +a Jacot Lathe. A fine edge jeweled poising tool is best for fine work +as defects in pivots and variations in poise can be more easily +discovered than with calipers. + + +82. _Truing Hairsprings._ + +Original truing of the hairspring is made necessary by the fact of +attaching the collet to its center. When springs are turned out by the +manufacturer they are perfectly true, that is, the coils are level and +perfectly spiral in form and the deviation from this spiral form, made +necessary in attaching the collet, is what demands certain forming of +the inner terminal so that it will blend with the other coils of the +spring which have not been disturbed. + +In attaching the collet it is first necessary to have the spring level +before the pin is forced tightly in place. This can be fairly well +determined by sighting across the flat of the spring and focusing upon +the inner coil to see that it is level for at least one half of its +length from the point of exit. After this operation has been +completed and the pin has been set up tight, with the surplus ends cut +off flush with the collet it will be necessary to slightly pull the +coil up or down, providing it is not perfectly level. The next +operation will be that of truing the round and all work and bending of +the spring for this operation is concentrated within the first quarter +of the coil from its point of attachment and it is seldom ever +necessary to make any bends beyond the first eighth of the coil from +the attached point. + +Figure 28 may be of some value in gaining an idea as to just how this +inner coil should appear when it has been trued. + +The broken lines illustrate a condition after colleting and before +truing. The heavy lines illustrate two positions into either of which +the coil may be formed in getting the spring true. + +[Illustration: Fig. 28] + +The outer black line shows the most adaptable form for most instances. +The inner black line shows the most practical form for use in +instances where there is unusual space between the collet and the +inner coil. It will be noted that these two forms blend into the true +spiral form of the spring at about one-eighth of the coil distant from +the collet. These forms may be used as a basis for truing the spring +in any instance in which it has been bent or mishandled around the +collet after its original truing. + +Experts always true springs after they have been staked to the balance +and a light weight calipers tapered on one end to a smaller diameter +than the collet is used for spinning the balance, making observations, +and corrections. + +Considerable progress can be made by some watchmakers in removing the +spring from the balance and placing it on a colleting tool or tapered +broach and then truing the flat and round as good as possible, after +which it should be perfected in the calipers. When the balance is +spinning in the calipers and the spring is true in the flat there will +be no jumping or quivering of the coils as observation is made across +the top of the inner four or five coils. + +When it is perfectly true in the round and the balance is spinning in +one direction the coils will seem to be whirling into a hole of which +the collet is the center. When spinning the balance in the opposite +direction the effect of the coils will be similar to the waves +produced by dropping a small stone in still water and they will appear +to be whirling away from the center. This effect in both instances is +caused by the eye following the spiral form of the coils as the spring +revolves. + + +83. _Treating a Rusty Hairspring._ + +When rust begins its attack upon any point of a hairspring there will +be a constant loss in time until its advance is stopped. + +Should considerable headway have been made by the rust before the +watchmaker's attention is enlisted for an examination it may be +necessary to change the spring entirely before good results can again +be obtained. + +There are many instances, however, in which proper care at the right +time will produce as good results as will a new spring. + +The first appearance of rust is generally indicated by one or more +spots of a light brown shade and in such instances it has hardly +attacked the metal to any serious extent, although usually enough to +cause a slightly losing rate. At this stage the spots may be scraped +with a piece of peg wood after which the spring can be placed in a +small copper pan containing lard oil to a depth of about one-fourth +inch. + +This pan should then be held over an alcohol lamp until the oil +becomes hot enough to smoke, after which the spring should be removed, +immersed in benzine for about thirty seconds and then dried in +sawdust. This treatment will stop further rust and the only indication +of previous rust may be a removal of the color from the spot which had +been affected. + +In case that the rust has reached a stage far enough advanced to +seriously pit the metal, good results cannot be expected from the +spring even though further rusting may be prevented. + + +84. _Stopping by Escapement Locking When Hands are Set Backward, or +When Watch Receives a Jar._ + +This is sometimes a very annoying trouble and while it should not +occur on high grade watches at all, it does show up just often enough +to cause a certain degree of unpleasantness for the owner of the watch +as well as for the watchmaker. + +There are two principal causes for the difficulty. One is due to the +back of discharging pallet stone having a very sharp corner combined +with a slightly rough edge on the back of the escape wheel teeth and +when the two factors meet with some slight force, such as is caused by +reversal of the train wheels the sharp corner of the stone wedges +itself into the rough surface of the tooth and holds until pulled away +by some small instrument. This can be remedied by removing the sharp +edge of the stone on a diamond charged polishing lap and a very slight +correction is sufficient. + +The second principal cause is due to sharp edges on the roller jewel. +First quality roller jewels always have these edges rounded, as +otherwise they may wedge into the horn of the fork and often will not +release through ordinary shaking of the watch. + +A short guard pin can also cause the trouble by allowing the roller +jewel to catch on the end of the fork horn before it enters, or the +guard pin may catch on the edge of the crescent on the safety roller, +but the two causes mentioned above will allow "hanging up" even when +the guard pin, roller jewel and all other shakes are correct. + +When the above conditions are correct and all setting connections are +properly fitted, the hands may be set either forward or backward +without in any way disturbing the time. There are instances, however, +where the watch will stop when the hands are reversed and at times the +second hand will actually turn backward although the watch will +immediately begin to run as soon as the backward pressure on the hands +is discontinued. + +This is caused by the cannon pinion being so tightly fitted that +turning it backward will require more force than that which is +supplied by the mainspring. A condition of this description is more +pronounced when the mainspring is nearly run down and sometimes it +will happen at such times and will not occur when the spring is fully +wound. + + +85. _Essentials and Non-Essentials in Cleaning Watches._ + +It would be difficult to suggest a best method for general cleaning of +watches. Different watchmakers have different methods and good results +are attained in more than one way. Whatever the method, however, there +are certain definite requirements that are fundamental. + +Among these are the thorough cleansing of pivots, jewels, pinion +leaves, wheel teeth, mainspring and winding parts. + +It is not sufficient to depend upon routine and simply dip the parts +in various solutions, brush and reassemble the watch. There are many +instances in which the oil becomes gummy and sticks to the jewels and +pivots to such an extent that peg wood and pith must be applied with +considerable energy to obtain perfectly clean surfaces and holes. + +The essential feature is that of actually removing every particle of +dirt from the contact surface. + +It is not essential that the plate and bridges should have a high +lustre, as this does not facilitate the running. If it is desired and +if facilities are available, the plates and bridges may be dipped in +benzine and dried in sawdust, then washed and brushed in a solution of +hot water, borax and castile soap, then rinsed in fresh water, dipped +in alcohol and dried in sawdust. This produces a lustre to the plate +bridges and wheels. When it is not convenient to use hot water the +parts may be dipped and brushed in benzine for at least one minute and +dried in sawdust, then dipped in alcohol and again dried in sawdust. +In either event thorough pegging and pithing of the jewels, pivot +holes and pivots is necessary as well as brushing and examining all +wheel teeth and pinion leaves. The steel parts should be examined and +gummy oil eliminated. Fresh oil should be applied in proper quantities +in the proper places. This requires some study, as either too much or +too little oil is detrimental. + +When a watch is cleaned annually by the same workman it is not +necessary that the mainspring be removed and reoiled each time, for a +mainspring properly oiled will last for two or three years before +requiring cleaning and reoiling. + +It is well known that mainsprings frequently break shortly after being +removed and cleaned and this annoyance may be avoided in many +instances by intelligent use of this rule. + +Balances should not be dipped in acid solutions, as the liquid gathers +under the screws and will often cause them to discolor in a short +time. It is better to polish them with fine rouge and cotton thread +arranged on a wire bow as the lustre will be more lasting. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Rules and Practice for Adjusting +Watches, by Walter J. Kleinlein + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK RULES, PRACTICE--ADJUSTING WATCHES *** + +***** This file should be named 38340.txt or 38340.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/3/4/38340/ + +Produced by Gísli Valgeirsson and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was +produced from images generously made available by The +Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/38340.zip b/38340.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..42314cd --- /dev/null +++ b/38340.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92215af --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #38340 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/38340) |
